TENOSCOP 2 6000 - 9000 C.C.D - M.D.A. Service Manual PDF

e Medical Systems
Stenoscop/MDA 826921P615
HOME
TOC Preinstallation Installation Functional Check Service Procedures Renewal Parts Schematics TOC Theory
Schematic Symbols/Abbreviations
Technical
Publications
826 921 P615
Revision 2
STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 C.C.D. – M.D.A.

sm
Service Manual
do not duplicate
Copyright 1998 GE Medical Systems
February 1998
ATTENTION
LES APPAREILS À RAYONS X SONT DANGEREUX À LA FOIS POUR LE PATIENT ET POUR LE MANIPULATEUR
SI LES MESURES DE PROTECTION NE SONT PAS STRICTEMENT APPLIQUEES
Bien que cet appareil soit construit selon les normes de sécurité les plus sévères, la source de rayonnement X représente un danger
lorsque le manipulateur est non qualifié ou non averti. Une exposition excessive au rayonnement X entraîne des dommages à l’organisme.
Par conséquent, toutes les précautions doivent être prises pour éviter que les personnes non autorisées ou non qualifiées utilisent cet
appareil créant ainsi un danger pour les autres et pour elles–mêmes.
Avant chaque manipulation, les personnes qualifiées et autorisées à se servir de cet appareil doivent se renseigner sur les mesures de
protection établies par la Commission Internationale de la Protection Radiologique, Annales 26 : Recommandations de la Commission
Internationale sur la Protection Radiologique et les normes nationales en vigueur.
WARNING
X–RAY EQUIPMENT IS DANGEROUS TO BOTH PATIENT AND OPERATOR
UNLESS MEASURES OF PROTECTION ARE STRICTLY OBSERVED
Though this equipment is built to the highest standards of electrical and mechanical safety, the useful x–ray beam becomes a source of
danger in the hands of the unauthorized or unqualified operator. Excessive exposure to x–radiation causes damage to human tissue.
Therefore, adequate precautions must be taken to prevent unauthorized or unqualified persons from operating this equipment or exposing
themselves or others to its radiation.
Before operation, persons qualified and authorized to operate this equipment should be familiar with the Recommendations of the Interna-
tional Commission on Radiological Protection, contained in Annals Number 26 of the ICRP, and with applicable national standards.
ATENCION
LOS APARATOS DE RAYOS X SON PELIGROSOS PARA EL PACIENTE Y EL MANIPULADOR
CUANDO LAS NORMAS DE PROTECCION NO ESTAN OBSERVADAS
Aunque este aparato está construido según las normas de seguridad más estrictas, la radiación X constituye un peligro al ser manipulado
por personas no autorizadas o incompetentes. Una exposición excesiva a la radiación X puede causar daños al organismo.
Por consiguiente, se deberán tomar todas las precauciones necesarias para evitar que las personas incompetentes o no autorizadas
utilicen este aparato, lo que sería un peligro para los demás y para sí mismas.
Antes de efectuar las manipulaciones, las personas habilitadas y competentes en el uso de este aparato, deberán informarse sobre las
normas de protección fijadas por la Comisión Internacional de la Protección Radiológica, Anales No 26: Recomendaciónes de la Comi-
sión Internacional sobre la Protección Radiológica y normas nacionales.
ACHTUNG
RÖNTGENAPPARATE SIND EINE GEFAHR FÜR PATIENTEN SOWIE BEDIENUNGSPERSONAL,
WENN DIE GELTENDEN SICHERHEITSVORKEHRUNGEN NICHT GENAU BEACHTET WERDEN
Dieser Apparat entspricht in seiner Bauweise strengsten elektrischen und mechanischen Sichereitsnormen, doch in den Händen unbe-
fugter oder unqualifizierter Personen wird er zu einer Gefahrenquelle. Übermäßige Röntgenbestrahlung ist für den menschlichen Orga-
nismus schädlich.
Deswegen sind hinreichende Vorsichtsmaßnahmen erforderlich, um zu verhindern, daßunbefugte oder unqualifizierte Personen solche
Geräte bedienen oder sich selbst und andere Personen deren Bestrahlung aussetzen können.
Vor Inbetriebnahme dieses Apparats sollte sich das qualifizierte und befugte Bedienungspersonal mit den geltenden Kriterien für den ge-
fahrlosen Strahleneinsatz durch sorgfältiges Studium des Hefts Nr. 26 der Internationalen Kommission für Strahlenschutz (ICRP) vertraut
machen: Empfehlungen der Internationalen Kommission für Strahlenschutz und anderer nationaler Normenbehörden.
GE Medical Systems STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 C.C.D. – M.D.A.

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
SUMMARY
2 – PREINSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. 1
2–1 BASIC CONFIGURATION – OPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. 1
2–2 DOSE AREA PRODUCT METER SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. 4
2–3 IMAGER 16/22 CCD SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. 5
2–4 MONITOR SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. 11
3 – INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. 1
3–1 RECEPTION OF THE MOBILE SURGICAL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. 1
3–2 MAIN SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. 5
3–3 INTERCONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. 7
3–4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. 7
3–5 CDRH CERTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. 8
3–6 DR4 / MD10 COMPONENTS INTERCONNECTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . 10
3–7 MDA COMPONENTS INTERCONNECTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . 11
3–8 COMPONENTS POWER SUPPLY WIRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . 12
3–9 CCM 620 – Photography parameters setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . 13
4 – FUNCTIONAL CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. 1
4–1 MECHANICAL TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. 3
4–2 CDRH COMPLIANCE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. 5
i

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
SUMMARY (CONT.)
6 – SERVICE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. 1
6–1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. 1
6–2 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. 3
6–3 JOB CARDS SYNOPTIC TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. 6
6–4 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY SHEETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. 6
6–5 ADJUSTMENT SHEETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. 110
MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. 111

ELECTRONIC ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. 127
6–6 LIST OF USED MEASURING EQUIPMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. 217
7 – SCHEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. 1
7–1 IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. 3
7–2 SCHOTTKY DIODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. 3
7–3 LIST OF SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. 3
7–4 LIST OF THE ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THE SCHEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. 4
7–5 USE OF THE SCHEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. 8
9 – SPARE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9. 1
9–1 STENOSCOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
9–2 LASER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 70
9–3 DOSE AREA PRODUCT METER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 72
9–4 IMAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 74
9–6 MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 90
9–7 KITS (MONITOR CART) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 92
SCHEMATICS A3 (see TOC page A – i) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–i
ii

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
REVISION HISTORY
REV DATE TYPE OF MODIFICATION

A August, 1996 Preliminary release from engineering validation.
0 November, 1996 Product document release.
1 January, 1997 Update and corrections.
2 February, 1998 M5 version; update and corrections.
+ RG 251 : II input dose clarification.
+ RG 256 : gain adjustment procedure revised because of the release of a new
Sony CCD module.
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION

NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER
Title page 2
Safety Instructions 2
Summary
i to ii 2 Chapter 6
Rev. history Table of contents
iii to iv 2 6–i to 6–viii 2
6–1 to 6–218 2
Chapter 2 Chapter 7
Table of contents Table of contents
2–i to 2–ii 2 7–i to 7–ii 2
2–1 to 2–12 2 7–1 to 7–10 2
Chapter 9
Chapter 3 Table of contents
Table of contents 9–i to 9–ii 2
3–i to 3–ii 2 9–1 to 9–98 2
Prod. 3–iii to 3–iv 2
3–1 to 3–14 2
Schematics –Din A3
Table of contents
A–i to A–ii 2
Chapter 4 A–1 to A–78 2
Table of contents
4–i to 4–ii 2
4–1 to 4–14 2
iii

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Blank page
iv

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
CHAPTER 2 – PREINSTALLATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2–1 STENOSCOP : BASIC CONFIGURATION – OPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
2–2 DOSE AREA PRODUCT METER SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
2–2–1 Model 841–SO Chamber : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4

2–2–2 Electronic Enclosure : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
2–2–3 Display Unit : not used with MDA Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
2–2–4 Power Supply : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
2–2–5 Cable : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
2–3 IMAGER 16/22 CCD SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
2–3–1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5

2–3–2 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
2–3–3 Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
2–3–4 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6
2–3–5 Special Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9
2–3–6 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . 10
2–4 MONITOR SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . 11
2–4–1 Physical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . 11

2–4–2 Power Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . 11
2–4–3 Video Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . 11
2–4–4 Rotating Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . 11
2–4–5 Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . 11
2–4–6 Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . 12
2.i

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Blank page
2 . ii

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
2 PREINSTALLATION
2.
2–1 STENOSCOP : BASIC CONFIGURATION – OPTIONS.
According to the order specifications, the STENOSCOP Series 6000 / 9000 C.C.D. is available in 4 models.
MODEL TCB92 601 P 478 STENO 2 6000 CCD 50 Hz

TCB92 601 P 479 STENO 2 6000 CCD 60 Hz
TCB92 601 P 480 STENO 2 9000 CCD 50 Hz
TCB92 601 P 481 STENO 2 9000 CCD 60 Hz
The components of these models are listed in 2 charts and indexed according to the following criteria :
OO , OF , SOF , ACC , C , USA
OO : OBLIGATORY option necessary for the operation of the unit

To be ordered separately.
OF : FACULTATIVE Option
SOF : OBLIGATORY option necessary for the operation of the unit but DEPENDING
of THE FACULTATIVE Option
Components supplied according to the FACULTATIVE Option
ACC : Spécific components

C: Consommable
USA : Supplied direct by GE – USA following the GE – CGR spécifications.
2.1

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
STENOSCOP 2 CONFIGURATION – Only for information

MODEL TCB92 601 P 481 STENO 2 9000 CCD 60 Hz
TCB92 601 P 480 STENO 2 9000 CCD 50 Hz
TCB92 601 P 479 STENO 2 6000 CCD 60 Hz
TCB92 601 P 478 STENO 2 6000 CCD 50 Hz
COMPONENTS DESCRIPTION CATALOG 478 479 480 481

NUMBER
STENO 2 –MOBILE FRAME ASM OO OO OO OO
(with XR head, without monitor cart)
BASE 6000 / 9000 OO OO OO OO
KIT STENO 6000 / 9000 CCD PEG OO OO OO OO
IMAGER 16 (6”) CCD 50 Hz OO

16 CCD IMAGER KIT (collimator + screened mylar) OO OO

22 CCD IMAGER KIT (collimator + screened mylar) OO OO
CASSETTE HOLDER (16) 24 x 30 cm (1) B92 601 P325 OF OF

CASSETTE HOLDER (16) 9,5” x 9,5” B92 601 P326 OF
CASSETTE HOLDER (16) 10” x 12” B92 601 P358 OF OF
CASSETTE HOLDER (22) 24 x 30 cm (1) B92 601 P327 OF OF
CASSETTE HOLDER (22) 9,5” x 9,5” B92 601 P328 OF
CASSETTE HOLDER (22) 10” x 12” B92 601 P359 OF OF
RAD REMOVAL GRID (1) B95 601 P172 ACC ACC ( 1 ) ACC ACC
24 x 30 cm (8:1, 28 L / cm)
RAD REMOVAL GRID B93 601 P157 ACC ACC ACC
9,5” x 9,5” (10:1, 44L / cm )
RAD COLLIMATOR KIT 24 x 30 cm B92 601 P453 OO OO OO OO

RAD COLLIMATOR KIT 9.5” x 9.5” B92 601 P454 OO OO
TV MONITOR FFD NOT ROT.( with MDA ) 2153979 OO OO OO OO

TV MONITOR FFD/ROT. (+/– 170o) (with DR memory) 2153980 OO OO OO OO
2nd TV MONITOR FFD/ROT. (+/– 170o) (with DR memory) 2153980 OF OF OF OF
1 MONITOR KIT (with shelf) OO OO OO OO
2 MONITOR KIT (with shelf) OF OF OF OF
2.2

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
COMPONENTS DESCRIPTION CATALOG Nber 448 449 450 451

MDA MEMORY B92 601 P494 OF ( 2 ) OO OO OO
Seq. Low Speed B92 601 P495 OF OF OF OF
Seq. Mid Speed B92 601 P496 OF OF OF OF
Seq. High Speed B92 601 P497 OF OF OF OF
Soft Measure B92 601 P500 OF OF OF OF
Soft Vascular 1 B92 601 P501 OF OF OF OF
Soft Vascular 2 B92 601 P502 OF OF OF OF
DR4 MEMORY + KIT B92 601 P441 OF ( 2 ) OO OO OO
MD10 MEMORY + KIT B92 601 P442 OF ( 2 ) OO OO OO
MD10 KEY BOARD OF ( 3 ) OF OF OF
CCM 620–1 VISIPLEX CAMERA 625L B92 601 P385 SOF SOF SOF SOF
CCM 620–1 + 4 VISIPLEX CAMERA 625L B92 601 P445 SOF SOF SOF SOF
CCM 620–1 + 4 VISIPLEX CAMERA 525L B92 601 P446 SOF SOF SOF SOF
FILM IMAGER KIT /STENO 6000/9000 SOF SOF SOF SOF
PAPER IMAGER UP890 CEI/ 220V 861 190 P035

PAPER IMAGER UP880 UL/ 110V 861 190 P045
PAPER IMAGER SONY UP910 CEI/ 220V 861 190 P015 SOF SOF SOF SOF
PAPER IMAGER SONY UP910/ 110V 861 190 P025 SOF SOF
PAPER IMAGER KIT / STENO 6000/9000 SOF SOF SOF SOF
VCR S–VHS SONY 220V/ 625 L/ CEI / RS232 B92 601 P503 SOF SOF
VCR S–VHS SONY 110V/ 525 L/ UL / RS232 B92 601 P504 SOF SOF
KIT VCR .SONY STENO 6000/9000 B92 601 P505 SOF SOF SOF SOF
STERILE DRAPES SET (cloth) B92 601 P350 C C C C

DISPOSABLE STERILE DRAPES SET B92 601 P357 C C C C
PM STAND ALONE KIT B92 601 P506 OO OO OO OO

XR HANDSWITCH KIT B92 601 P338 OF OF OO OO
KIT LASER IMAGER 16 (6”) B92 601 P457 OF OF

KIT LASER IMAGER 22 (9”) B92 601 P458 OF OF
KIT LASER CUVE 832 139 G015 OF OF OF OF
KIT DAP B92 601 P459 OF OF OF OF
(1) Not for USA

(2) One of those is obligatory
(3) With MD10 memory only
2.3

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
2–2 DOSE AREA PRODUCT METER SPECIFICATIONS.
2–2–1 Model 841–SO Chamber :
D Type: full field ion chamber.

D Chamber active area: 72.38 cm2.
D Dose area product rates: 1 mGycm2s–1 to 400000 mGycm2s–1.
D Energy range: 50 KVp to 150 KVp.
D Chamber sensitivity: 130 pC/mGycm2.
D Absorption: less than 0.5 mm Al.
D Connection: 2 sets of co–axial cable.
D Warm up time: 8–10 minutes.
D Transparency: greater than 75 %.
2–2–2 Electronic Enclosure :
D Calibration and offset adjustment: user accessible controls.

D Weight: 0.200 Kg.
D Signal processing: assembly contains integrated electronics.
D Test and reset push buttons.
D Power on indication.
D Physical size: 165mm x 44mm x 28mm.
2–2–3 Display Unit : not used with MDA Memory
D Display: 8 digit LCD with reset and test function.

D Display units: mGycm2.
D Dose area product range: 1 mGycm2 to 99,999,999 mGycm2.
D Free running rate: 10 KHz.
D Response time: dose rate dependent 1 ms – 5 seconds.
D Power input: < 120 mA at 24 VDC.
D Power input range: 15 – 28 VDC.
D Test & reset buttons.
D Overall size (including overlay): 120mm x 30mm x 19.5mm.
D Weight: approximately 200g.
2–2–4 Power Supply :
D Local supply at Image Intensifier: 24 VDC, 120 mA (tolerance 15 – 28 VDC).

2–2–5 Cable :
D Co–axial cable: RG174.

D Type: 9 mm oval cross section, pvc insulated 6 core.
D Length: X–ray machine specific.
2.4

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
2–3 IMAGER 16/22 CCD SPECIFICATIONS.
2–3–1 Overview
The Imageur 22 Stenoscop CCD* and 16 Stenoscop CCD are compact image intensifier (II)
systems used to:
D Convert radiology images to a video image (625– or 525–line).

D Display this image on a TV monitor.
The Imageurs Stenoscop are intended to equip mobile surgical units Stenoscop 2 –
6000/9000.
The different versions of the Imageur Stenoscop are:
D Imageur 22 Stenoscop CCD 625 L

2–3–2 Composition
The Imageur Stenoscop CCD includes the following subassemblies:
D Mechanical mount,
D II tube (image intensifier),
D High voltage power supply,
D Optical unit, equipped with a CCD sensor.
The front cover is fitted with an anti–scatter grid which is protected by a sheet of Impax.
* Charged–Coupled Device.
2–3–3 Safety Instructions
The Imageur contains Extra High Voltage circuits indicated by a

CAUTION DANGER – HIGH VOLTAGE label.
D Pay close attention to high–voltage safety warnings (label: ).
D All disassembly should be performed by the Field Engineer only.

D Before any disassembly of the Imageur, ensure that the unit is not under power.
D Before using the Imageur, ensure that it is correctly connected to ground by the yellow/green
ground wire connecting the power supply chassis to the II assembly.
2.5

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
2–3–4 Specifications
2–3–4–1 Regulations
The Imageur complies with the following regulations:
D UL 187.
D CSA 22–2 114.
D IEC 601–1.
D JIS Z 4701 (Reference to IEC 601 – General Rule for Medical X–Ray Equipment).
D JIS Z 4721 (Medical X–Ray Intensifier).
D CDRH – Code of Federal Regulation 21 CFR.
D REDACT.
D GE 806–1 thru 806–14.
D EMC – According to IEC 601–1–2.
2–3–4–2 Operating conditions
D Temperature – Operating 0°C thru 45°C

– Storage/transport – 40°C thru 70°C
(IEC Standard 601–1)
D Relative humidity – Operating <80% w/o condensation
– Storage/transport <95% w/o condensation
D Altitude – Operating 0 m thru 5000 m
– Storage/transport 0 m thru 5000 m
D Power supply – Voltage 24 V (dc) +10%/–15%

– Consumption 850 mA (typical)
– Fuse rated 2A–250 V
2.6

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
2–3–4–3 Mechanical characteristics
ILLUSTRATION 1–1
IMAGEUR 22 CM STENOSCOP
D IMAGEUR 22 STENOSCOP CCD

– Dimensions (H x D x W) 456 x 407 x 302 mm
(see ILL. 1–1).
– Input Field (at grid) 210 mm (SID of 913 mm)
in Normal Mode
150 0.5mm (SID of 913 mm)

in Mag 1 Mode
– Axis/C–Arm distance 240 mm
– Weight 28 kg
ILLUSTRATION 1–2
IMAGEUR 16 CM STENOSCOP
D IMAGEUR 16 STENOSCOP CCD

– Dimensions (H x D x W) 450 x 350 x 220 mm
(see ILL. 1–2).
– Input Field (at grid) 144 mm (SID of 913 mm)
– Axis/C–Arm distance 145 mm
– Weight 26.7 kg
2–3–4–4 Performance
D Horizontal resolution of video image

– 22 cm
13 lp/cm in Normal Mode
19 lp/cm in Mag 1 Mode
– 16 cm
17 lp/cm
(Measurements are performed at 50 kV for an exposure rate of 30 R/s
(22 cm) or 60 R/s (16 cm) under standard conditions in the nominal field).
D Video bandwidth 0.5 db from 50 Hz through 7 MHz
2.7

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
2–3–4–5 Image intensifier tube
The II Tube converts the radiant image to a high luminosity image of excellent contrast. Each
II tube has several qualities:
D High resolution,
D Excellent resolution uniformity.
Parameters Imageur 22 Stenoscop Imageur 16 Stenoscop Units

CCD CCD
II Tube TH 9438 HX-H560 TH 9449 HP-H506 -
Quantum detection efficiency 65 65 %
Typical conversion factor 200 (150 min.) 180 (140 min.) cd m-2 /
mRs-1
Typical contrast ratio (10 % disk) 30 (24 min.) 20 (16 min.)
Diameter of output image 25.2 ±0.2 14.5 ±0.5 mm
Useful entrance field size (min) 215 145 cm
Typical maximum resolution
D Normal Mode Center ≥46 ≥40 lp/cm

70% radius ≥44 ≥40 lp/cm
D Mag 1 Mode Center ≥52 - lp/cm

70% radius ≥50 - lp/cm
2–3–4–6 Anti–scatter grid
An anti–scatter grid is mounted inside the bottom cover of the II System. It is sealed by a sheet
of Impax of very low absorbtion coefficient (2%). The grid eliminates the x–rays scattered by
the patient. The features of this anti–scatter grid are:
Imageur 22 Stenoscop CCD Imageur 16 Stenoscop CCD
Grid ratio 10 : 1 8:1
Focal spot 90 cm 90 cm
Number of lines /cm 36 36
Diameter 234 mm (useful diameter 225 mm) 170 mm (useful diameter 160 mm)
A spigot positions the grid at ± 45° with respect to the two sweep axes, to avoid moiré effects
on the image.
2.8

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
2–3–5 Special Functions
2–3–5–1 Fluoroscopy regulation
Automatic monitoring of the fluoro dose is based on the measurement of the average video
signal value, inside a round window inserted in the image. The diameter of this window is
40% of the usable diameter of the image. In addition, the measurement circuit features a
device which enables the computation of the average value without taking into account the
dark zones of the image (collimator blades, barite, etc.). With this system, the image can be
used under all circumstances, particularly when the collimator blades are closed.
Note: This system operates in Automatic Mode only.
ILLUSTRATION 1–3
MEASUREMENT WINDOW
2–3–5–2 Automatic gain control (AGC)
The generator can no longer ensure the automatic dose control when it is at min. or max. stop,
the automatic gain control circuit of the camera takes over. This circuit regulates the average
value of the video signal, in the same window as described above (40% of the usable diameter
of the image). The AGC dynamics covers the x5 to ÷2 range.
2–3–5–3 Dose
The Imageur can operate for two different dose rates, corresponding to the two iris diaphragm
positions.
2–3–5–4 Recursive filter
The CCD sensor mounted in the Imageur is inherently remanence–free. In the Imageur
Stenoscop CCD, the noise reduction function is performed by digital processing included in
the DSM memory.
2–3–5–5 Iris diaphragm
In Automatic Mode, when the generator has reached the max. stop, a system enables the
automatic opening of the iris diaphragm in order to widen the range of video signal regulation.
D This function can be disabled.
D It is maintained to the end of the fluoroscopy sequence.
D The next fluoroscopy sequence will start with normal iris diaphragm.
2–3–5–6 Go to black
During a radiographic exposure, the image is masked by the Go to Black function.
2.9

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
2–3–5–7 Buzzer
Triggering of the buzzer located in the II assembly indicates that an excessive temperature has
been reached. In case of buzzer triggering, terminate the examination. Call the GEMS
maintenance service.
2–3–5–8 CLEANING
Do not use solvents, which could dull the finish or damage the labels. Simply use a clean
duster and warm soapy water.
2–3–6 MAINTENANCE
2–3–6–1 Maintenance principle

The causes of faulty operation on the Imageur can usually be located by the user.
However, reconditioning and adjustments following replacement of defective parts call for
qualified personnel.
Five main types of operating fault have been listed:
D No image appears on screen.

D Video mask only visible on screen.
D X–ray image out of focus.
D Image is present but unstable.
D Image too bright or too dark.
Note: Most defective parts can be repaired at the factory. It is therefore strongly recommended
to recuperate these parts.
2–3–6–2 Preventive maintenance
Checks to be performed annually by the Field Engineer:
D Thermal safety buzzer.
1. Connect a wire between TP2 and TP5 on the CCD Supply Board. The buzzer should
sound.
2. Remove the wire.
3. If the buzzer does not sound, replace the CCD Supply Board.
D Focusing.
1. Set the kV to the minimum, and run the test wide open using a FUNK test pattern
10–48.6 lp/cm.
2. The resolution limit measured must be superior or equal to the values given in
Para 4.4. If the correct values are not found, repeat the II tube focus adjustment
(see ASM, RG 350), and if necessary the optical focus adjustment (see ASM,
RG 351).
D Dose rate control.
Run the tests described in RG 256 (Periodic Dose Check) of this document.
2–3–6–3 Fuse
F1/CCD Supply Board: rated 2 A/250 V (protects the 24–V (dc) power supply located in the
Stenoscop unit).
2 . 10

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
2–4 MONITOR SPECIFICATIONS.
2–4–1 Physical Characteristics
20”
Weight 23.5 kg (52.76 lb)
Width 460 mm (18.11 inches)
Height 379 mm (14.92 inches)
Depth 382 mm (15.03 inches)
2–4–2 Power Input
The monitor is a full range input of voltages:
D 90V to 264V.
D 50/60Hz.
D 70W.
2–4–3 Video Input
The monitor is set to a nominal 1 V signal (0.7 V video amplitude, 0.05 V set-up level, 0.3 V
synchro). As normally adjusted, a signal with video amplitude up to 1 V can be accepted
without detriment to the display, provided that the overload white level signal does not occur
over more than 30% of the image area.
A higher video signal (up to 1.8 V), can be accepted by adjustment of the CONTRAST
CONTROL.
In all applications the video signal must be terminated by a 75 W load (normally plugged into
the OUT connector; for chained monitors only the last monitor in the chain is terminated).
2–4–4 Rotating Connector
On FFD–ROT models, this connector carries the rotation control signals: the maximum
current required is less than 25 mA.
2–4–5 Environmental Conditions
The monitor will maintain its performance under the following conditions:
D Temperature: -10 to +45C.

D Relative Humidity: < 95% non-condensing.
D Atmospheric Pressure: 700 to 1060 hPa.
D Storage Temperature: -40 to +70C.
2 . 11

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
2–4–6 Regulations
The monitor complies with the standard and regulation requirements of the following:
D Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. (UL), an independent testing laboratory following (UL 478).
D Canadian Standards Association (CSA).
D International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC), international standards organization:
– IEC 601–1–2 (EMC),
– IEC 601–1.
D 21 CFR para. 1020.10 (ionizing leakage radiation).
2 . 12

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
CHAPTER 3 – INSTALLATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3–1 RECEPTION OF THE MOBILE SURGICAL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. 1
3–1–1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. 1
3–1–2 RECEPTION OF THE STENOSCOP 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. 1
3–1–3 IDENTIFICATION AND COMPATIBILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. 1
3–1–4 Travel conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. 3
3–2 MAIN SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. 5
3–2–1 NETWORK ADAPTATION OF THE MOBILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. 5

3–2–2 SUPPLY CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. 7
3–3 INTERCONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. 7
3–4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. 7
3–4–1 UNBLOCKING THE COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. 7
3–5 CDRH CERTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. 8
3–6 DR4 / MD10 COMPONENTS INTERCONNECTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . 10
3–7 MDA COMPONENTS INTERCONNECTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . 11
3–8 COMPONENTS POWER SUPPLY WIRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . 12
3–9 CCM 620 – Photography parameters setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . 13
3–9–1 Brightness, contrast and density adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . 13
3.i

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Blank page
3 . ii

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
3 . iii

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Blank page
3 . iv
TOC Preinstallation
Preinstall Installation Functional Check Service Procedures Renewal Parts Schematics TOC Theory

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
3 INSTALLATION
3.
3–1 RECEPTION OF THE MOBILE SURGICAL UNIT
3–1–1 INTRODUCTION
The STENOSCOP 2 is supplied ENTIRELY FACTORY MOUNTED AND CALIBRATED, so it needs NO

ADJUSTMENT ON PUTTING INTO SERVICE.
The procedure given below makes it possible to check the reception of the various components and set the
system going.
3–1–2 RECEPTION OF THE STENOSCOP 2
See chapter 2 PRE–INSTALLATION to check both the conformity of the site for installation and the composi-
tion of the equipment to be received.
3–1–2–1 DETERIORATION DUE TO TRANSPORT
On the delivery of the equipment, all the packages will be examined to make sure that they have not been dam-
aged during transport.
If damage is observed, immediately notify the transport service and the transport insurance service of the fac-
tory.
The same will apply for non–apparent damage due to transport discovered when unpacking the material or dur-
ing installation, UP TO 15 DAYS MAXIMUM AFTER DELIVERY.
A transport service will generally not pay a bill for non apparent damage unless an inspection has been
demanded within 15 days after delivery.
If damage is discovered, immediately contact the services concerned, specifying the type of apparatus, the
serial number and the order number if possible, and describe the nature of the damage.
3–1–2–2 UNPACKING AND INSPECTION
See chapter 2 PRE–INSTALLATION for checking the conformity of the delivery and of the equipment
ordered.
The unpacking of the components of the apparatus before it is transported into the room will be made only if
necessary for checking damage occurring during transport.
The packages will be minutely examined during installation, in order not to overlook parts of small dimensions
or envelopes containing screws, washers, etc.
3–1–3 IDENTIFICATION AND COMPATIBILITY
The STENOSCOP 2 is identified by labels giving the following information :

. Date and place of manufacture
. Serial number
. Model type and number
. Type approval and compliance with standards.
In addition, to meet HHS requirements (USA) concerning RX radiation, mAs accuracy, filtration and source–
skin distance, the different components concerned carry a label ”COMPLIES WITH RADIATION PERFOR-
MANCE STANDARDS 21 CFR SUBCHAPTER J”.
Other labels are also supplied separately for specific compliance with prevailing local regulations.
3.1

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Imager
Imager
Cassette
Holder
Collimator
Frame Xray Tubehead
Monitor Cart
3.2

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
ITEM DESCRIPTION REFERENCE MODELE

(USA)
A FRAME – CONTROL CONSOLE 828 490 G055 ZF0XCST2

B X R HEAD 828 520 G015 ZH0HTST2
C COLLIMATOR for IMAGER
16 cm (6”) 828 751 G 025 Z0A16ST2
22 cm (9”) 828 752 G 025 Z0A22ST2
D CASSETTE HOLDER for IMAGER 16 cm (6”)
24 x 30 cm 830 534 G 015
9,5” x 9,5” 830 535 G 015 Z0L16ST2
CASSETTE HOLDER for IMAGER 22 cm (9”)
24 x 30 cm 830 536 G 015
9,5” x 9,5” 830 537 G 015 Z0L22ST2
E IMAGER 16 cm (6”) CCD 50Hz 860 926 P 075 ZCCD16ST
22 cm (9”) CCD 50Hz 860 926 P 095 ZCCD22ST
16cm (6”) CDRH 60Hz 860 926 P 085 ZCCD16ST
22cm (9”) CDRH 60Hz 860 926 P 105 ZCCD22ST
F MONITORS CART
3–1–4 Travel conditions
To move the mobile unit from one place to another, respect the following conditions :
– vertical ”C–Arm” – imager upwards
– ”wigwag” movement centered
– C–Arm retracted as far as possible toward the console
– column low position
– movements locked
– ratchet the direction handle in order to have the back wheels parallel to the chassis
– foot brake released
CAUTION
THE MOBILE UNIT IS NOT EQUIPPED WITH NEGATIVE ACTION BRAKES.
FOR TRAVELLING ON A SLOPE, THE OPERATOR HAS TO BE IN FRONT OF THE MOBILE UNIT AND
THE MONITOR HOLDER, AND, IF NECESSARY A SECOND PERSON MUST BE AVAILABLE TO HELP.
3.3

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
3A3 DIAPHRAGMES 2 832 502 G015
3.4

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
3–2 MAIN SUPPLY
The mobile is factory wired for :

228V/50Hz single – phase networks (Europe)
OR 120V/60Hz single – phase networks (U.S.A.)
A frequency adaptation on site requires adaptations in the mobile but also in the imager, memory and monitor
For the mobile, proceed as specified hereunder.
3–2–1 LINE ADAPTATION OF THE MOBILE
ATTENTION : The Imager frequency is not adaptable on site. The complete CCD Camera must be changed
if the frequency has to be modified.
3–2–1–1 9TR1 TRANSFORMER
The line adaptation is made at the transformer 9TR1 (diagram 1–10)

Connect wires marked A and B, and jumpers marked C and D as shown in the hereunder chart according to the
mains voltage and frequency.
MAINS SUPPLY
FREQ
240V 228 V 220 V 208 V 200 V
* * *
120V 108 V 100V
Marqued wire
9TR1 TERMINALS
Frequency 50Hz 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
Adaptation A
60Hz 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Voltage B 1 1 1 3 3 1 2 3
Adaptation
Jumper C 4–5 4–6 4–7 4–6 4–7 4–8 4–8 4–8
Jumper D 2–2 2–2 2–2 2–2 2–2 1–5 2–6 3–7
* For the lines 120, 108 and 100V, it is obligatory to switch the machine over to REDUCED POWER.
The REDUCTION OF POWER is programmed at the CI 3A3 DIAPHRAGMS 2 using the switch S133.B
(2–7) (diagram 117F)
S133.B OFF Normal power
S133.B ON Reduced power
* For the lines 120V 108V and 100V, it is also obligatory to connect in parallel on 9R1 an additional
resistor 9R2, see diagram 1–10b–2A
Connect the jumper from 9R2 to 9R1.
220V to 240V Mains 100V to 120V Mains

1 9R1 2 Jumper 1 9R1 2
Jumper
1 9R2 2
1 9R2 2
Series Parallel
3.5

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Locking rood
Transportation
lock bar (rod)
9Sm1
ON / OFF
9PL1
3.6

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
3–2–2 SUPPLY CABLE
For the mobile units wired for 120V(USA), the supply cable is delivered from the factory with its plug.
For the mobile units wired for 228V (Europe), the supply cable is delivered without a plug.
According to local regulations, connect a plug (min 16A single phase + earth) as follows :
blue wire : 228V
brown wire : 228V
yellow/green wire : earth
3–3 INTERCONNECTION
– Connect the cable coming from the mobile unit to the plug 9PL1 situated on the back of the monitor holder.
Screw the fixing device in a clockwise direction.
– Connect the supplementary equipotentiality cable to the earth terminal bar (CEI only).
– Connected the network supply cable to the socket provided at the installation.
3–4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
Put the apparatus under tension with the switch at the back of the monitor cart.
3–4–1 UNBLOCKING THE COLUMN
For transport, this equipment is fitted with a bar which immobilizes the column. This bar is placed in a sheath
situated under the chassis and accessible from near the right rear wheel.
The bar must be removed to allow the column to move.
To remove the bar, activate for a short instant the button controlling the descent of the column.
This action has the effect of unblocking the bar which can then be removed.
ATTENTION!
It is absolutely necessary to keep this bar and put it back in place if the equipment has to be transported.
To avoid losing it, it is suggested that the bar be fixed on the monitor cart (behind the monitor).
3.7

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
3–5 CDRH CERTIFICATION
The unit is completely assembled and tested for CDRH compliance in the plant except for video imager, which
for certain markets, is associated in the field.
In order to make sure that the installed unit complies, the following tests have to be made :
1. Check that all mounting bolts for the X–Ray head and image intensifier are tightened.
If a loose bolt is found, perform the beam alignement in Rad and Fluoro.
2. Check operator display, operation of pushbutton and of buzzers.
See chap 6 RG 40 PWB swiches position.
3. Verify Fluoro mA
4. Verify Rad mAs
5. Verify Fluoro mA kVp range in manual and automatic mode
6. Make a quick test of the Fluoro ABC loop.
With 2 mm copper on the X–ray head, in normal fluoro automatic mode, the kVp–mA normally stabilize
for the 6” II
for the 9” II, large field :
9” Low Dose High Dose

KV 65/67 65/67
mA 1.7/1.9 3.2/3.4
6” Low Dose High Dose

KV 68/70 68/70
mA 1.9/2.0 3.6/3.9
If this test fails, make a complete kVp test.
3.8

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Blank page
3.9

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
3–6 DR4 / MD10 COMPONENTS INTERCONNECTIONS.
DR4 / MD10 DR4 / MD10

FRONT PANEL REAR PANEL
R.X. CONTROL R.X. CONTROL HARD COPY SCREEN A SCREEN B CAMERA HARD COPY
POWER I.R. REMOTE
DSM DR VIDEO OUT OUT IN CONTROL
DB 15 Male DB 15 Female BNC BNC BNC BNC DB 9 Male BNC DB 9 Male
Only in DR Monitors
(EMULATION)
A or B C or D
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ MD10 Option
C A B D
or
3 . 10

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
3–7 MDA COMPONENTS INTERCONNECTIONS.
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏ

3 . 11

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
3–8 COMPONENTS POWER SUPPLY WIRING.
9A1 TRANSPANEL
PL4
+12V
8

10
3 . 12

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
3–9 CCM 620 – Photography parameters setting
This procedure is a summary of this one available in the camera documentation (furnished with the unit).
3–9–1 Brightness, contrast and density adjustment.
Values to be set:
Positive Negative 50 Hz 60Hz
BRT 020 025 Density 056 064

CRT 250 200
a Switch ON the Video Imager.

b The message windows indicates the warm – up cycle time (60 sec.)
WARMUP 60
WARMUP 59
WARMUP 58
WARMUP 00
c At the end of warm – up, you will hear a short beep, followed by the messages here after.
SELF TEST
CALIBRATING
IMG 1/1 USR1 POS
d Hit the ”PROGRAM” button and check the displayed message.
>FMT4 USR1 POS
cursor
3 . 13

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
POS. or NEG. Selection.
Hit the buttons to set the cursor on the left side of ” POS ”. POS 1
NEG 3
Then hit the buttons to select ” POS ” or ” NEG ”
2 RESET
4
1
3
Press once the key in order to diplay >B00 C00 D00
2 RESET
Adjust the BRIGHTNESS with the keys 4
>B020 C00 D00
Hit once the key to select the CONTRAST with the keys 1
3
Then adjust the contrast with the keys

>B020 C250 D00
1
Press the button 3
2 RESET
4
and set the appropriate DENSITY ( 50 or 60 Hz ) >B020 C250 D050
Store these new values with the ” PROGRAM ” button.
Refer to the CCM 620 manual for more details over these
adjustments.
3 . 14

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
CHAPTER 4 – FUNCTIONAL CHECK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4–1 MECHANICAL TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. 3
4–1–1 DISPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. 3
4–1–2 WIG–WAG of ”C” ARM ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. 3
4–1–3 IN–OUT MOTION OF ”C” ARM ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. 3
4–1–4 C – ARM ROTATION AROUND THE HORIZONTAL AXIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. 3
4–1–5 ORBITAL ROTATION OF C–ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. 4
4–1–6 STABILITY OF ”C” ARM ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. 4
4–1–7 C–ARM UP–DOWN MOTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. 4
4–2 CDRH COMPLIANCE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. 5
4–2–1 GENERATOR OPERATOR INDICATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. 5

4–2–2 LEAKAGE RADIATION TESTING OF THE DIAGNOSTIC
SOURCE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. 5
4–2–3 PRIMARY BARRIER PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. 6
4–2–4 RADIATION LEAKAGE OF THE IMAGE INTENSIFIER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . 4. 6
4–2–5 KV PEAK MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. 6
4–2–6 FLUORO mA MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. 7
4–2–7 TUBE CURRENT EXPOSURE TIME PRODUCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. 8
4–2–8 FLUOROSCOPY TIMER. (Not required for tube replacement or re–load). . . . . . 4. 8
4–2–9 REPRODUCIBILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. 9
4–2–10 QUALITY CONTROL OF THE X RADIATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. 10
4–2–11 MAX FLUOROSCOPIC ENTRANCE EXPOSURE RATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. 11
4–2–12 ALIGNMENT OF THE X–RAY FIELD AND SPOT FILM CASSETTE . . . . . . . 4. 12
4–2–13 ALIGNMENT OF THE EDGES OF THE X–RAY FIELD WITH
THE EDGES OF THE FLUOROSCOPIC IMAGE RECEIVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. 13
4.i

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Blank page
4 . ii

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
4 FUNCTIONAL CHECK
4.
4.1

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
4
3
4.2

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
4–1 MECHANICAL TESTS
The mechanical tests will be only performed when unit installation is completed : all the covers are fixed.
The cassette holder is not present on the image intensifier head excepted if required.
4–1–1 DISPLACEMENT
With brake ON, a minimum of 180 N (18 kg – 40 lbs) is required to move the unit on a level hard sur-
face.
With brake released (item 1), a maximum of 50N (5kg – 11 lbs) is required.
4–1–2 WIG–WAG of ”C” ARM ASSEMBLY
Motion : 12.30 degrees.
with brake ON (item 2), a minimum torque of 100 mN (10 mkg– 72 foot pounds) is required to move the
assembly.
With brake released, a maximum torque of 1.5 mN (1,5mkg – 11 foot pounds) is required.
4–1–3 IN–OUT MOTION OF ”C” ARM ASSEMBLY
Travel : 200 mm
When brake is released (item 3 : not showed on image), a maximum of 50 N (5kg – 11 lbs) in required to
move the assembly when the unit is horizontal.
When the brake is ON, a minimum of 250 N (25 kg – 55 lbs) is required.
4–1–4 C – ARM ROTATION AROUND THE HORIZONTAL AXIS
Rotation : 330o ( 210o CW and 120o CCW)
With brake ON (item 4), a minimum torque of 100 mN (10 mkg – 72 foot pounds) is required to rotate the
assembly.
With brake released, a maximum torque of 20 mN (2mkg – 14.5 foot pounds is required.
4.3

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
4–1–5 ORBITAL ROTATION OF C–ARM
Rotation from the horizontal : 115º with 16 cm (6”) imager

105º with 22 cm (9”) imager
1. C–Arm in a vertical plane
With brake released (item 5), a maximum of 50 N (5kg – 11 lbs) is required to rotate the assembly.
2. C–Arm in an horizontal plane
With brake released, a maximum of 100 N (10 kg – 22 lbs) is required to rotate the assembly.
With the brake ON, a minimum of 250 N (25kg – 55 lbs) is required to rotate the assembly.
4–1–6 STABILITY OF ”C” ARM ASSEMBLY
Conditions :
– all covers in place

– cassette holder no fixed on the imager
– brakes released : C–ARM, C–ARM support...
A maximum of 30 N (3kg – 7 lbs) is required to maintain the assembly in any position.
4–1–7 C–ARM UP–DOWN MOTION
Total travel : 455 mm (17,9”) for Imager 16 cm (6”)

475 mm (18,7”) for Imager 22 cm (9”)
The maximum time of travel is 13 seconds.
4.4

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
4–2 CDRH COMPLIANCE TEST
For more details, see HHS Stenoscop Test – Direction 46–017567.
Precautions
a) Be sure that both leads are connected when the milliammeter is
inserted in the middle point of the H.V. transformer.
Failure to do so could cause electrical shocks and damage the
equipment.
b) Avoid thermal overload of the X–ray tube. Refer to the tube rating charts (included in the user’s
manual (OM)
c) The sign indicates that X–rays will be emitted during this test.
GUARD AGAINST X–RADIATION.
NOTE 1: instruments used are listed at the end of this chapter § 5.

NOTE 2: if the measured or calculated values are not within the tolerances, consult a qualified techni-
cian.
The FDA tests for the Stenoscop are suitable for the GE HHS form 3382.
The following information on doing the applicable tests will provide the means for adapting the data to
the form 3382. Applicable data forms are referenced with sample date.
References are made to standard GE methods described in DIRECTION 13894, SYSTEM TESTS FOR
HHS. Only the tests that apply to the Stenoscop are included.
4–2–1 GENERATOR OPERATOR INDICATORS
TONES AND BUZZERS YES - NO - N/A -
WARNING LABEL PRESENT YES - NO - N/A -
TONES AND BUZZERS ALSO INCLUDE LIGHTS.

As a radiographic exposure is made the exposure push button lights and at the end of the exposure it
extinguishes.
In addition a tone is heard at the end of the exposure.
In Fluoro the 5 minutes timer push button flashes at 4:27 seconds and at 4:57 seconds it terminates the
fluoro exposure. The ”YES” box should be checked.
WARNING LABEL PRESENT is applicable.

The label can be found below the lock for the rotational motion of the C Arm. ”WARNING : This X–ray
unit may be dangerous to patient and operator unless sale exposure factors and operating instructions are
observed.” The ”YES” box should be checked.
4–2–2 LEAKAGE RADIATION TESTING OF THE DIAGNOSTIC SOURCE ASSEMBLY
The radiation leak test is carried out in factory on each unit.

Rejection limits : 60 mR/H or 1 mR/min (at 110 kV – 1 mA continuous duty).
This leakage radiation being a constant factor, there is no need to check it on site.
4.5

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
4–2–3 PRIMARY BARRIER PROTECTION
On each unit, the conformity of the primary barrier, dimensions, position and Lead thickness is verified
by the manufacturer.
4–2–4 RADIATION LEAKAGE OF THE IMAGE INTENSIFIER ASSEMBLY

(Max 1 mR/hour)
Test performed on each unit by the manufacturer (must not be checked in the field).
4–2–5 KV PEAK MEASUREMENT
Tools Needed :
kV measurement Wisconsin Cassette or Keithley 35080 kVp divider, (or equivalent)

(32865C Filter Pack, 65 kV – 135 kV)
Note : Conversion factor for this Pack = +.55V.
Voltage measurement Digital Multimeter, 4 digits
input impedance > 10 megohm
Rippel measurement Oscilloscope dual channel
input impedance > 10 megohm
Procedure:
A direct measurement of the kVp is not possible because the ANODE and CATHODE connections are not
accessible.
This procedure uses the Keithley non – invasive kVp meter to calibrate the voltage reference at 110
kV and then to rely on this calibrated voltage reference to check the other kVp values.
NOTE: kVp measurements may also be taken with the Keithley, the appropriate filter pack and it’s con-
version factor, however the accuracy of these different packs at these different ranges is not established.
So use these as a means of checking and not necessarily as the actual definitive measurement.
Connect DVM to 3A12.a12 with reference to V. Com. (DVM...)

Make these radiographic exposures : 110 kV XmAs
choose the mAs appropriate, see Wisconsin or Keithley manual.
kVp 110kV
K Example 19.94 109.1 kV
DVM 3A12.a12 5.47 V
Now this RATIO K can be used to calculate the other kVps as the 3A12.a12 values are measured : (No
exposures needed).
4.6

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
SELECTED kV 3A12.a12 (X) CALCULATED KV (K * X)

40 _______ _______
54 _______ _______
55 _______ _______
80 _______ _______
110 _______ _______
Rejection Limits = 40 to 54 kVp : + / – 15%

55 to 110 kVp : + / – 7%
With a scope check : 3A12.E7 / E8 for 55 kV: 27.5V Pk. + / – 15%

Ripple 110 kV: 55.0V Pk. + / – 10%
SEE SHEET RG 201 or RG 202 FOR ADJUSTMENTS IF NEEDED
4–2–6 FLUORO mA MEASUREMENT
Instrument required: mA meter (category 0.5).
The tube current is preset only in manual fluoroscopy.

The current measured with the mA meter, connected to the middle point of the HV transformer, will
be the sum of the tube current and the current in the voltage divider.
At 40 kV, the current in the voltage divider is 0.1 mA (i.e. without filament heating). This corrective fac-
tor is proportional to the kVp.
At 100 kVp, take the following measurements, after connecting the mA meter to the HV circuit (middle
point) as shown in schematic 17C.
Preset value Measured current Corrective factor Tube current

at 100 kVp
0,1 _______ 0.25 _______
0,4 _______ 0.25 _______
1,6 _______ 0.25 _______
4,5 _______ 0.25 _______
Max. limits accepted.
The difference between tube current and current displayed must not
exceed + / – (0,18 mA + 7% of preset value)
NOTE: If the measured values are not within the tolerances, apply the adjustment procedure
on sheet RG 204.
4.7

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
4–2–7 TUBE CURRENT EXPOSURE TIME PRODUCT
Instrument required : mAs meter.

Connect the mAs meter to the middle point of the HV transformer –,see schematic 17C.
mAs measurement to be taken at 60 kVp:
mAs setting mAs measurement
60 kVp 0.16 _______

1 _______
5 _______
160 _______
Max. limits: + / – (0,18 mAs + 7% of preset value)
NOTE : If the measured value is not within tolerances, apply the adjustment procedure of adjustment
sheet RG 210.
4–2–8 FLUOROSCOPY TIMER. (Not required for tube replacement or re–load).
Tools : Huer stop watch
Method Measure the time

Measured time must be between 4 min. 26 sec between a reset of Fluoroscopy and the moment
when the buzzer is energized : + / – 10 sec.
Check the ”YES” box.
NOTE: If the measured value is not within tolerances, apply the adjustment procedure on adjustment
sheet RG 206.
4.8

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
4–2–9 REPRODUCIBILITY
Tools:
Capintec 192 Dosimeter with PM30 ionization chamber (30cc) or equivalent device.
Procedure :
. Place the radiation probe approximately 300 mm from the Image

Intensifier as shown below.
NOTE : X RAY TABLE TOP CAN BE USED WITH THE C
ARM EITHER VERTICAL OR HORIZONTAL TO POSITION
THE PROBE.
. Place Aluminum filtration of 3.8 cm 200 mm from the
image intensifier. 200
mm 300
Note that the Aluminum filtration have a very slight influ- FILTRATION mm
ence on the measurement.
PM30 IONISATION
. Select 80 kV, 50 mAs and make a preheating exposure CHAMBER
. Select 50 kV, .16 mAs and make an exposure and measure
the dose in mR.
. Select 110 kV, 20 mAs and make an exposure and mea-
sure the dose in mR.
. Repeat these last two steps ten times within one hour and
fill in the table below; STENCDRH1
REPRODUCIBILITY OF EXPOSURE TEST 3.6
EXPOSURE – (mR)
kVp mAs Sec
Sec. X S CV
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
50 .16
110 20
X = Average exposure
S = Standard deviation 1
ȱ n ǒXi – XǓ2ȳ
ȧȍ n – 1 ȧ
CV = Coefficient of variation = ( S : X ) 2
Standard deviation =
Acceptance Criteria CV < 0.045
Xi = Exposure # 1 . 2 . 3 etc
Ȳi+1 ȴ
n = Number of exposures
4.9

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
4–2–10 QUALITY CONTROL OF THE X RADIATION
NOTE : Specific test point is at 71 kV, thus the minimum half value layer requirement is 2.1 mm of Al.
(mandatory).
Tools:
Capintec 192 Dosimeter with PM30 ionization chamber(30cc) or equivalent device.
Standard absorber : 2.5 mm of 1100 type Al : 46–173 632G1.
Procedure :
. Position the radiation probe as shown here;
NOTE : X RAY TABLE TOP CAN BE USED
WITH THE C ARM EITHER HORIZONTAL OR VERTICAL TO
POSITION THE PROBE.
. Open the collimator blades.

. Select 71 kV at 2.5 mA in Fluoro Mode.
PM30 IONISATION
. Make an exposure and measure the exposure rate with no CHAMBER
added filtration.
300 mm
This represents 100% transmission level. STANDARD
. Place the Standard Absorber in the beam as shown in the ABSORBER
illustration and repeat the above exposure and also note exp. rate.
. Divide the WITH ABSORBER reading by the WITHOUT
ABSORBER reading :
RATIO + Std Initial

Absorber Reading (Rńmin)
Reading (Rńmin)
Ratio must be greater than 0.50
Record value on form 3382
RADIATION READING ADDITIONAL FIL-

RATIO TRATION MOUN-
(WITH/WITHOUT) TED IN BEAM TO
WITHOUT STAN- WITH OBTAIN THIS
DARD ABSORBER STANDARD RATIO (NONREMO-
ABSORBER VABLE)
STENOSCOP 2
4 . 10

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
4–2–11 MAX FLUOROSCOPIC ENTRANCE EXPOSURE RATE
Tools :
Capintec 192 Dosimeter with PM30 ionization chamber (30 cc) or equivalent device.
Lead Sheet 1/8” thick or equivalent blocking.
Standart absorber 20 x 20 x 3.8 cm Alu type 1100
Procedure :
. Position equipment as shown in the illustration; 200 LEAD SHEET – PLOMB

300 mm
Note : I.I. needs to be blocked from Radiation. mm ABSORBER
NOTE : X RAY TABLE TOP CAN BE USED WITH
THE C ARM EITHER HORIZONTAL OR VERTICAL PM30 IONISATION
TO POSITION THE PROBE. CHAMBER
Place Aluminum filtration of 3.8 cm 200 mm from
the image intensifier.
Note that the aluminum filtration have a very
slight influence on the measurement.
. Open the collimator blades.
. Select AUTO mode (HLC) and initiate Fluoro.
. Note the exposure rate and the kV / mA parameters
110 kV – 3.9 mA.
. Select MANUAL mode 90 kV at 5.5 mA and initiate Fluoro.

Note the exposure rate.
Record value on form 3382
TECHNIC DATA TAKEN
NORMAL DOSE HLC DOSE

SELECTED DIALED ACTUAL
mA MODE kVp kVp mA R/MIN mA R/MIN
Maximum 40
Manual
60
80
110
Maximum 110
Automatic
The dose rate shall not exceed 9 R/Min.
4 . 11

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
4–2–12 ALIGNMENT OF THE X–RAY FIELD AND SPOT FILM CASSETTE
On each unit, the X–ray field and the film cassette are aligned by the manufacturer.
This alignment is not to be checked on site, except in the case of replacement of image intensifier or
X–ray tube head.
Test:
equipment required:
cassette, ( 9” 1/2 x 9” 1/2 for USA ), standard X–ray film, and a lead plate (2 mm thick and
about 3 cm of diameter).
Procedure :
Install the cassette holder :

Place a cassette ( 9” 1/2 x 9” 1/2 for USA ) with the lead plate in its center in the cassette holder.
Initiate 3 RAD exposures 50 kV – 1 mAs.
WITHOUT MOVING THE CASSETTE, remove the lead plate.
Initiate 1 RAD exposure 50 kV 1 mAs.
After processing the film, measure the distances between the edges of the images and the edges of the
film.
The edge of the image is determined with points having the same density than in the mark of the
lead plate.
Then, measure the distance between the center of the field and the center of the film.
Max. limits: L + L’ and l + l < 2,5% SID (22.5 mm)

L + L’ + l + l’ < 3,5% SID (31.6 mm)
a < 1,5% SID (13,5 mm)
SID (source image distance).
a
l l’
L’
If measured values are not within the tolerances, see Disassembly / Reassembly sheet D/R 11.
4 . 12

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
4–2–13 ALIGNMENT OF THE EDGES OF THE X–RAY FIELD WITH THE EDGES OF THE FLUOROSCOPIC IMAGE
RECEIVER
This alignment is carried out on each unit by the manufacturer and is not to be checked on site, except
when the image intensifier, X–ray tube head or collimator is replaced.
Test equipment required:

Special fixture made of two sets of steel wires.
Each set is made of straight parallel wires (1 cm apart).
A washer is located in the center of the mesh, standard X–ray film and cassette.
Method:
–Place the fixture on the cassette holder and make an exposure in fluoro mode (50 kV – 0.5 mA – 3 sec.).
The collimator must be open to the fluoroscopic field size.
–After processing the film, observe the image of the fixture (in the same position) on the TV screen and
then redraw this image on the processed film taking the mesh and the washer as a reference.
The edges of the X–ray field and the edges of the fluoroscopic image receiver are then visible on the
same film and the alignment faults can be measured as shown
Max. limits: L’ + L” < 2,5% SID (22.5 mm)

l’ + l” < 2,5% SID (22.5 mm)
L’ + L” + l’ + l” < 3,5% SID (31.6 mm)
NOTE 1 : With the dual field image intensifier, this alignment shall be checked with the 2 fields.
NOTE 2 : Mandatory Compliance Form is supplied with each system.
l’
L’ R L”
Edge of the field (film)
l”
Edge of the image
If measured value are not within the tolerances, see Disassembly/Reassembly sheet D/R 11.
4 . 13

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Blank page
4 . 14

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
CHAPTER 6 SERVICE PROCEDURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6–1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
6–1–1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1

6–1–2 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
6–1–3 ANNUAL CHECK OF ELECTRONIC ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
6–2 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
6–2–1 OPERATING PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3

6–2–2 BOARD INTERCHANGEABILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
6–2–3 FUSES REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5
6–3 JOB CARDS SYNOPTIC TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6
6–4 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY SHEETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6
6–4–1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6
6–4–2 STENOSCOP D/R SHEETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7

Purpose: DISSASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF MOBILE SYSTEM FRONT COVER. 6.8

Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF MOBILE SYSTEM REAR COVER. . . 6 . 10

Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF X–RAY HEAD UPPER COVER. . . . . . 6 . 12

Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF THE STEERING HANDLE. . . . . . . . . 6 . 14

Purpose: CONTROL CONSOLE OPENING PROCEDURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 16

Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF GAS SPRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 18
6.i

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)

Purpose: RELEASING THE CONVERTER AND CARD RACK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 20

Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF BACK WHEEL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 22

Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF BACK WHEEL BRAKE CAM. . . . . . . 6 . 24

Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY BRAKE SHOE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 26

Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF X–RAY HEAD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 28

Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF THE C–ARM MOTOR PWB. . . . . . . . . 6 . 32

Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF MODULATOR CAPACITORS
4C1 TO 4C6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 34

Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF INVERTER RECTIFIER

BRIDGE 4CR7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 36

Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF PRESSE–PACK
SEMICONDUCTORS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 38

Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF TRANSFORMER 5TR1. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 40

Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF HEATING POWER SUPPLY 5A1. . . . 6 . 42

Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF CONTROL CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 44
6 . ii

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF C–ARM MOTOR 1M1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 46

Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF BREAKER 9SM1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 48

Purpose: X–RAY LAMP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 50

Purpose: “C–ARM” CABLE REPLACEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 52
6–4–3 DAP D/R SHEETS ........................................ 6 . 59

Purpose: ION CHAMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 60

Purpose: DOSE AREA PRODUCT METER DISPLAY REPLACEMENT
(NOT WITH MDA MEMORY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 62
6–4–4 IMAGEUR D/R SHEETS ............................... 6 . 65

Purpose: IMAGEUR HEAD DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 66

Purpose: X–RAY IMAGE INTENSIFIER TUBE DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY. . . . 6 . 68

Purpose: EHV POWER SUPPLY DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 74

Purpose: COMPACT OPTICS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 76

Purpose: BOARD CAGE DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 82

Purpose: PRINTED WIRING BOARDS DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY. . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 84
6 . iii

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
6–4–5 MEMORY D/R SHEETS ................................ 6 . 87

Purpose: MIDAS BOARD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 88

Purpose: AVIAS BOARD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 90

Purpose: RS 232 BOARD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 92

Purpose: VGA BOARD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 94

Purpose: TOUCH SCREEN ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 96

Purpose: HARD DISK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 98
6–4–6 MONITOR D/R SHEETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 101

Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF MONITOR CART COVERS. . . . . . . . . 6 . 102

Purpose: DISSASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF BOARDS FROM THE MONITOR . . 6 . 104
6 . iv

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
6–5 ADJUSTMENT SHEETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 110
6–5–1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 110
MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 111

6–5–2 STENOSCOP R/G SHEETS ( MECHANICAL ) . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 111

Purpose: BACK WHEELS ALIGNMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 112

Purpose: HANDLE POSITION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 114

Purpose: “C ARM” ROTATION BRAKE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 116
6–5–3 LASER R/G SHEETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 119

Purpose: EXTERNAL LASER AIMING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 120

Purpose: INTEGRATED LASER ALIGNMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 124
ELECTRONIC ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 127

6–5–4 STENOSCOP R/G SHEETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 127

Purpose: KV CIRCUIT (3A12 – R216) – DIAGRAM 23D MEASURE WITH
WISCONSIN CASSETTE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 128

Purpose: KV CIRCUIT (3A12 – R216) – DIAGRAM 23D MEASURE WITH
KEITHLEY 35080. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 130

Purpose: TRAVEL SAFETY (3A19 – R123) DIAGRAM 38B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 132

Purpose: FLUORO ADJUSTMENT (3A26 – R9) DIAGRAM 81E FILAMENT 4. . . . . . 6 . 134
6.v

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

Purpose: FLUORO PREHEATING (3A26 – R3) DIAGRAM 84D FILAMENT 4. . . . . . . 6 . 136

Purpose: FLUORO TIMER – DIAGRAM 103A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 138

Purpose: RAD SAFETY DIAGRAM 83D FILAMENT 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 140

Purpose: RAD MA – RAD PREHEATING (3A26 – R4) DIAGRAM 84B FILAMENT 4. 6 . 142

Purpose: RAD / FLUORO SWITCH CHECK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 146

Purpose: MAS INTEGRATORS (3A26 – R6) DIAGRAM 82C FILAMENT 4. . . . . . . . . 6 . 148

Purpose: AUTOMATIC FLUORO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 150

Purpose: 3A1 INTERFACE DSM PWB (201 – 210B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 158

Purpose: PWB SWITCHES PROGRAMMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 165
6–5–5 DAP R/G SHEET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 167

Purpose: CALIBRATION DOSE AREA PRODUCT METER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 168
6–5–6 IMAGER R/G SHEETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 175

Purpose: INTERFACE CONTROLS ALIGNMENT CHECK. ( IMAGER ) . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 176

Purpose: DOSE ADJUSTMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 180
6 . vi

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

Purpose: “X–RAY ON “ DELAY ADJUSTMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 184

Purpose: BLACK LEVEL THRESHOLD ADJUSTMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 186

Purpose: II ASSEMBLY ALIGNMENT WITH LONGITUDINAL AXIS. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 189

Purpose: VIDEO SIGNAL LEVEL CHECK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 190

Purpose: PERIODIC DOSE CHECK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 193
6–5–7 MONITOR R/G SHEETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 199

Purpose: MONITOR ADJUSTMENT IN 100 HZ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 200

Purpose: MONITOR ADJUSTMENT IN 120 HZ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 206

Purpose: MONITOR BRIGHTNESS AND BLANKINK ADJUSTMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 212
6–6 LIST OF USED MEASURING EQUIPMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 217
6–6–1 RADIATION MEASUREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 217

6–6–2 ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 217
6 . vii

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Blank page
6 . viii

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
5 SERVICE PROCEDURES
6 SERVICE PROCEDURES
5.
6.
6–1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
6–1–1 GENERAL
The purpose of preventive maintenance is to maintain equipment and verify correct equipment performance.
It has three stages :
– routine maintenance: daily or weekly maintenance by the user,
– annual electronic adjustment check: this check consists in checking and, if necessary, resetting all main elec-
tronic adjustments of the equipment in order to prevent derivation.
– These tests are carried out by qualified technician, the CDRH compliance tests: testing procedures required to
check that the unit meets its operational specifications (see ch. 4 § 2)
These tests will be performed when X–ray head or collimator are replaced or when corrective maintenance is per-
formed in regulation networks of kV and mA.
6–1–2 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
This maintenance is carried out by the user. See User’s Manual.

6–1–3 ANNUAL CHECK OF ELECTRONIC ADJUSTMENTS
These adjustments are made to ensure the highest possible operating safety. See User’s Manual.
6.1

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Blank page
6.2

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
6–2 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
6–2–1 OPERATING PRECAUTIONS
6–2–1–1 X–RAY PROTECTION
During an operation involving X–ray emission, put a lead apron between the X–ray head and the image intensifier
of the mobile system.
6–2–1–2 DIFFERENTIAL ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS
Differential electrical measurements taken with the oscilloscope (in particular, thyristor trigger voltages) must be
taken with the oscilloscope in differential mode.
Measurements taken in common mode with an earthed oscilloscope may destroy components.
6–2–1–3 CONNECTOR PL1 OF PWB 3A19 ”COMMANDE SCR”
Never remove this connector while the mobile system is energized.

The thyristor trigger protection currents are on PWB 3A19 and there is a risk of accidental triggering if PL1 is
disconnected.
6–2–1–4 GROUNDING OF BOARDS ON EXTENDERS
Don’t forget to ground the boards (with an extension wire with FASTON terminals).
6–2–1–5 BOARD REPLACEMENT
De–energize the mobile system when replacing or extending a board.

6–2–2 BOARD INTERCHANGEABILITY
6–2–2–1 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE
The standard troubleshooting technique consists in replacing the boards.
The interchangeability criteria for the boards are listed below in three groups:
1) Non–interchangeable boards.
2) Readily interchangeable boards.
Boards without adjustment or boards which have been calibrated in the factory.
3) Interchangeable boards which require adjustments.
NOTE : Make sure that the required procedure is at hand before proceeding with adjustments.
In some instances, it will be necessary to repair the mobile system on site and to recalibrate it.
All the information needed for this is given in the paragraph 4 of this chapter : Adjustments sheet RG...
6–2–2–2 NON INTERCHANGEABLE BOARDS
– DIVIDER 6A1 PWB

In factory, the divider PWB 6A1 is calibrated with the X–ray head, on which it is mounted.
This calibration requires specific tools which are not available on site.
After accidental destruction of the 6A1 circuit, it is, however, possible to recalibrate a circuit with similar charac-
teristics. This can be done in the factory only.
6.3

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
6–2–2–3 READILY INTERCHANGEABLE BOARDS
1A1 MOTEUR ARCEAU PWB (C–arm motor)
2A1 MODULE G2 (control console) PWB

Switches position : see adjustment sheet RG 213
2A3 MODULE D2 (control console) PWB
3A3 DIAPHRAGMES 2 (collimator) PWB

3A7 AD/kV PWB

Check the presence of bridge W10 (See sch 53A)
3A9 CONSIGNE kV/mA2 (kV/mA reference) PWB

Check the presence of W245 bridge (See sch 092D)
CAUTION : EPROM
Check agreement: name, position, revision
3A12 kV/mA PWB

Adjustment of kV measurement: may have to be corrected (see adjustment sheet RG 201 or RG 202)
Adjustment of FLUORO TIMER: may have to be corrected (see adjustment sheet RG 206)
Check bridges presence W107, W109, W220, W231, W244, W245.
3A19 COMMANDE SCR2 (SCR control) PWB

Check bridge presence W16
4A1 SCR No1 PWB
4A2 SCR No 2 PWB
5A1 PUISSANCE 4 PWB (Heating power)
7A1 FROTTEUR PWB (contact brush)
7A2 DISQUE PWB (Disk) – Complete adjustment of collimator
9A1/9A2 Relais PWB (relay)
9A4 PRISE PWB
6.4

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
3A1 INTERFACE DSM 828 988 G 035 – STENOSCOP 2

This board is also used for DR4 and DR7 memories.
This board is fully factory calibrated.
If an accidental uncalibration occurs, refer to adjustment sheet RG 212.
6–2–2–4 INTERCHANGEABLE BOARDS WHICH REQUIRE ADJUSTMENTS
3A5 Timer PWB (Minuterie 2.)

–Adjustment of ABC video (adjustment sheet RG 211).
3A26 Filament heating PWB (Chauffage filament 4)

–Adjustment of fluoro mA (adjustment sheet RG 204)
–Adjustment of fluoro preheating (adjustment sheet RG 205)
–Adjustment of RAD preheating (adjustment sheet RG 208)
6–2–3 FUSES REPLACEMENT
The unit is internally protected by fuses inaccessible by the user.

During corrective procedure, it is OBLIGATORY to replace a blowed fuse by means of the SAME MODEL
OF FUSE.
A plastic bag with spare fuses is provided in the unit in the module 3. See D/R 1 sheet for access.
This bag countains :
2 Fuses ABC 1A 250V code 854 352 P 025
1 Fuse ABC 3A 250V code 854 352 P 045
1 Fuse ABC 5A 250V code 854 352 P 055
1 Fuse ABC 8A 250V code 854 352 P 075
1 Fuse MDA 3A 250V code 854 352 P 425
1 Fuse FNQ 1A 500V code 854 362 P 315
It is possible to order this ”Maintenance bag” with the code number 828 731 G 015.
6–2–3–1 FUSES LIST
NAME MODEL LOCALIZATION ACCES

1A1F5 MDA 3A 250V UNIT see sheet
1A1F8 ABC 3A 250V MODULE 1 D/R 2
5F2 ABC 3A 250V UNIT see sheet
5F3 ABC 8A 250V MODULE 5 D/R 1
9F1 ABC 1A 250V MONITOR CART see sheet
9F2 ABC 1A 250V
9F3 ABC 5A 250V MODULE 9 D/R 90
9F4 FNQ 1A 500V
6.5

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
6–2–3–2 REMARKS RELATING TO FUSES REPLACEMENT
Replacement of 1A1 F5 fuse

MODEL MDA 3A 250V
When 1F5 fuse blows, verify the UP/DOWN motion system
– Check the wear of the driving shaft and roller plates of the column.
– Check cleanliness of the roller plates
– Verify that the motor current is lower than 2.5A when column is on mechanical stop.
6–3 JOB CARDS SYNOPTIC TABLE
Service Manual Advanced Service Manual
Subsystem D/R sheets RGm sheets RGe sheets RGe sheets LA sheets DI sheets
Stenoscop 1 – 22 101 – 103 201 – 213

(1 – 29) * (101 – 129) (201 – 229) (301 – 329) (401 – 429) (501 – 529)
Laser 130 – 131

(30 – 39) (130 – 139) (230 – 239) (330 – 339) (430 – 439) (530 – 539)
DAP 40 – 41 240
(40 – 49) (140 – 149) (240 – 249) (340 – 349) (440 – 449) (540 – 549)
50 – 55 250 – 256 250 – 256 450 – 456

Imager (50 – 69) (150 – 169) (250 – 269)
350 – 354 (450 – 469) (550 – 569)
(350 – 369)
Memory 70 – 75 570 – 579

(70 – 89) (170 – 189) (270 – 289) (370 – 389) (470 – 489) (570 – 589)
Monitor 90 – 91 290 – 292

(90 – 99) (190 – 199) (290 – 299) (390 – 399) (490 – 499) (590 – 599)
* ( ) : reserved numbers
6–4 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY SHEETS
6–4–1 GENERAL
– Each sheet gives the list of tools and equipment needed, preliminary precautions and part disassembly
and reassembly procedure.
– The part numbers of the hardware mentioned in this chapter are given in chapter 9, Renewal Parts.
6.6

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
6–4–2 STENOSCOP D/R SHEETS
6.7

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 C.C.D. – M.D.A Job Card D/R 1 1 of 2
Purpose: DISSASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF MOBILE Version No.: 00

SYSTEM FRONT COVER. Date: May 1993
Time: 10 min. Manpower: 1
1
1
1
2
6.8

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Job Card D/R 1 2 of 2
1 – TOOLS REQUIRED
– Cross–tip screwdriver.
2 – PRELIMINARY PRECAUTIONS
– De–energize the mobile system.
3 – DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE
– Remove the 4 CTFH M4x12 screws with cups (item 1), 1 CTFH M4x15 screws with cups (item 2)
and the 4 CTFH Parker 4.2 x 19 (item 3) holding the cover.
– Very carefully remove the cover and disconnect the ground terminal.
4 – REASSEMBLY PROCEDURE
– Carry out the previous operations in reverse order.
6.9

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF MOBILE Version No.: 00

SYSTEM REAR COVER. Date: May 1993
1
2
6 . 10

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
– Lift the C–Arm.
– Remove the front cover (D/R 01)
– Remove the 2 caplugs and the 2 Parker screws (item 1) fixing the top cover of the column (item 2).
– Remove the 2 caplugs and the 2 CTFH M4 x 16 screws (item 3) on each side
– Very carefully remove the cover (item 4).
6 . 11

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF X–RAY Version No.: 00

HEAD UPPER COVER. Date: October 1996
No display with
MDA memory
1
6 . 12

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
– Remove the stop–gap of the screws.
– Remove the 2 CTMS M4x8 screws (item 2) from either side of the X–ray head.
– Remove the 2 CTMS M4x12 screws with cups (item 3) in order to remove rear cover (item 4).
– Lift the cover and disconnect the 2 coaxial cables of the ion chamber (Option) and the flat cables from
the display if present.
– Remove the cover (item 1).
– Take care that the joint (item 5) between the cover and the C–arm is correctly set.
6 . 13

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF THE Version No.: 00

STEERING HANDLE. Date: May 1993
1 2
6 . 14

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
– Dia. 5 mm flat screwdriver.
– 3 mm hexagonal wrench.
In order to remove the steering handle, proceed as follows:
– Unscrew the 2 M6 screws (item 1) and remove the handle. (item 2)
– Set the rear wheels in the longitudinal direction.
– Put the handle back in place to hinge at the alignment with the wheels.
– Tight the 2 M6 screws (item 1).
– Alignment : See RG 101.
6 . 15

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Purpose: CONTROL CONSOLE OPENING PROCEDURE. Version No.: 00

Date: May 1993
1
2
1
2
6 . 16

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
– 4 A/F wrench.
– 6 A/F wrench.
3 – OPENING PROCEDURE
– Remove the front cover (See sheet D/R 1).
– Remove the rear cover (See sheet. D/R 2).
– Remove the steering handle (see Sheet D/R 4).
– Remove the 4 caplugs (item 1) : the 4 screws 6HSH, M4x10, with washer (item 2) are accessible through
the holes in the cover. Remove the 4 screws.
– Unscrew the 4 screws 6HSH, M4x10 on the card rack front side and the 2 screws on the card rack back side
in order to release the shield plate of the console..
– Unscrews the 2 screws holding the right handle (See ill of Job Card D/R 4).
– Remove the control console (item 3).
4 – CLOSING PROCEDURE
6 . 17

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF GAS Version No.: 00

SPRING. Date: April 1995
Time: 1.30 H. Manpower: 2
2 2
Insert
the rod
6 . 18

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
– Gas spring, code 824 035 P 024.
– Screwdriver.
2 –PRELIMINARY PRECAUTIONS
– The gas spring balances the whole movable load (column, C–arm, image intensifier, camera, X–ray generator).
– A faulty spring would first cause an increase in rise time.
– The safety device (parachute) would then be activated.
– The following procedure should be carried out by qualified technicians only.
– Before handling the gas spring, take all precautions to prevent the rod from being damaged.
– The least fault could make it unserviceable.
– Remove the front and rear covers (see sheets D/R 01 and D/R 02).
– Manually or by means of the motor, bring the mobile system column to the highest possible position
in order to loosen the spring as much as possible.
NOTE : There is no risk of damage to the mobile system column because travel is limited by a mechanical stop
(fixed to the lower part of the column) and a shaft (item 3)
– Install the locking rod through the holes provided in the column.
The column is locked in upper position.
– Remove the upper attachment screws (item 4) of the spring after having removed the 2 screws CTMS M4x8
and the 2 screws CTMS M4x16 (item 2) attaching the cover (item 1).
– Remove the clips and the attachment shaft from the lower part of the spring (item 5).
– Install the new gas spring, by installing in the lower part with the shaft and clips.
– Position the upper part of the spring in front of its attachment piece.
– Introduce a screwdriver between attachment piece and spring and use it as a lever to set the spring
to its correct position.
– Take all precautions not to damage the body.
– Position and tighten up the upper attachment screw–bolt.
– Unlock the safety device.
– Remove the locking rod.
– Lower the column (a few centimeters) and put back the stop shaft.
– Check that the safety device is not damaged.
– Check the operation.
– Install the cover.
6 . 19

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Purpose: RELEASING THE CONVERTER AND CARD Version No.: 00

RACK. Date: April 1995
6 . 20

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
– Allen wrench (6).
2 – PRELIMINARY PRECAUTION
3 – PROCEDURE
– Remove screw 6HSH M6x15 (item 1) to release the card rack (item 4).
– Remove 2 screws 6HSH M6x30 (item 2) to release converter (item 3).
– Carefully pivot the subassemblies, making sure that the cable bundles are not crushed.
6 . 21

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF BACK Version No.: 00

WHEEL. Date: April 1995
Illustration 1
2
Illustration 2
1
6 . 22

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
1 – TOOLS
– Metric wrenches and screw–drivers
– Jack
– Secure the C–arm once it is lifted
– Remove the caplug (ill.2/item 1).
– Unscrew the M4 screw holding the wheel cover and remove it.
– Repeat these two operations for the other wheel side.
– Lift the C–arm and secure it.
– Remove the clip (ill 1/ item 1)
– Push the shaft out (ill.1/item 2)
– Remove the defective wheel and replace by a new one.
6 . 23

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF BACK Version No.: 00

WHEEL BRAKE CAM. Date: April 1995
Illustration 1
4 4
5
5
3 3
1 1
2 2
Illustration 2 1
6 . 24

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
1 – TOOLS
– Metric wrenches and screw–drivers
– None
– Remove the chassis wheel cover
– Unscrew the nut (ill.1/ item 1) holding the rod, it is easier if the shaft (ill.1/ item 2) is lock by a screw–driver.
– Remove the screw (ill.1/ item 3) locking the rod.
– Remove the screw (ill./ item 4) holding the cam in place, pull out the rod (ill.1/ item 5).
– Carry out the previous operations in reverse order taking care of the cam position (see ill.2/ item 1) and
lubricating the different parts.
6 . 25

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY BRAKE SHOE. Version No.: 00

Date: April 1995
Illustration 1
1
2
6 . 26

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
– None
– Remove the wheel cover.
– Unscrew the 2 HSH M4x 16 holding the brake–shoe ( see ill 1/ item 1)
– Remove the brake shoe and replace by a new one ( see ill 1/ item 2).
– Carry out the previous operation in reverse order.
6 . 27

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF X–RAY Version No.: 00

HEAD. Date: April 1995
Time: 4 H. Manpower: 1
CAUTION
The X–ray head and the Divider PWB are associated and calibrated in the factory.
Verify that the X–ray head and Divider PWB have the same serial number.
1. TOOLS REQUIRED
– Centering tube assembly.
– Collimator centering bushing in X–ray beam.
– See BEAM ALIGNMENT KIT 827 112 G 035.
2. PRELIMINARY PRECAUTIONS
– Before removing the X–ray head, MAKE SURE THE C–ARM IS STABLE.
This stability depends on the CORRECT OPERATION OF THE C–ARM ROTATION BRAKE AND C–
ARM BRAKE.
– Check that the locks are operating properly.
3. X–RAY HEAD DISASSEMBLY

– Move the column, to its lowest position.
– Position the bar in order to lock the column in low position (see chapter 2 of this section, § 1.2).
– Rotate the C–arm so that the image intensifier is positioned on the mechanical stop (unit side).
– Remove X–ray head cover. See sheet D/R 3.
– Disconnect 7A1.PL1 and remove the collimator.
– Disconnect plugs 6PL1, 6A1.PL1, 6A1.PL2 and the Laser interface connectors.
– Disconnect ground wires and 6SaTh2 connections.
– Remove 6Sal support.
– Remove X–ray head.
– Before to perform the X Ray head replacement check the continuity of the kV and mA measure connections.
PROCEDURE
– Position 3A12 PWB on extender cart
– With an ohmmeter, check the connections between:
6A1. PL2. 9 3A12. PL1. 7
6A1. PL2. 8 3A12. PL1. 10
6A1. PL2. 3 3A12. PL1. 8 and 9
6A1. PL2. 10 3A12. PL1. 6
6A1. PL2. 7 3A12. PL1. 4
6A1. PL2. 6 3A12. PL1. 3
6A1. PL2. 5 3A12. PL1. 1
6 . 28

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
– During each measure, twist the cable in order to be sure that there is no intermittent breaking in measure
circuit cable.
– If cable default is detected, replace ”C Arm” cable: See sheet D/R 22.
4. X–RAY HEAD REASSEMBLY

– Position the new X–ray head.
– Connect plugs 6PL1, 6A1PL1, 6A1PL2,
– Connect the ground wires and the 6SaTh2 connections.
– Fix 6Sa1 support.
CAREFULLY CHECK THE CONNECTIONS IN ORDER TO ENSURE CONTINUITY OF THE kV

AND mA MEASUREMENT CIRCUIT.
5. UNIT CALIBRATION
– Preheating adjustment (see sheet RG 205).
– RAD mA adjustment (see sheet RG 208).
6. X–RAY HEAD CENTERING

– Remove the locking rod from the column.
– Rotate the C–arm in order to position the X–ray axis vertically with the X–ray head in low position.
Centering of X–ray beam limitation plate (RAD limitation) :

– Select FLUORO, Manual mode, 43 kV, 0.8 mA.
– Position X–ray beam limitation plate on X–ray head
– Insert the bottom of the centering tube in the aperture of the plate.
– Initiate fluoro sequence.
– Move the limitation plate and the centering tube in order to obtain on the TV monitor two concentric
spots of about 2 and 4 cm in diameter.
– Secure the limitation plate.
Centering of X–ray beam on the image intensifier :
– Select FLUORO.
MDA memory : – Select the centering pattern
– The memory displays a circle and a cross on the screen.
DR4 / MD10 : – Locate the center of the screen.

– Initiate FLUORO sequence.
– Using the 4 screws, adjust the direction of the X–Ray head in order to align
the 2 concentric spots at the center of the TV monitor.
– Secure the X–Ray head fixations.
6 . 29

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
– RAD mode centering adjustement.

See Chap. 4 § 2.12
7. COLLIMATOR ADJUSTMENT ON THE X–RAY HEAD

Collimator reassembly :
– Position and temporarily secure the collimator.
– Connect plug 7A1.PL1.
CAUTION :
NEVER MOVE THE BLADES MANUALLY.
Collimator centering in the X–ray beam :
– Select FLUORO, Manual mode, 43 kV, 0.8 mA.
– Close the 2 pairs of blades in order to have a square shape on the monitor and move the collimator
until the image is centered in the video mask.
– When the collimator is centered, the blades must appear symmetrically on monitor screen.
See chap. 4 TESTS CDRH COMPLIANCE
6 . 30

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Blank page
6 . 31

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF THE Version No.: 00

C–ARM MOTOR PWB. Date: May 1993
3
1
6 . 32

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
– Screwdriver (medium–size).
– Remove the rear cover of the mobile system block. See sheet D/R 2.
– Disconnect the plug 1A1.PL1 (item 1).
– Remove the self–tapping screws CTMS M3x20 (item 3) holding the board and remove it.
– Repeat the above operations in reverse order.
6 . 33

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF Version No.: 00

MODULATOR CAPACITORS 4C1 TO 4C6. Date: May 1993
2 2 4
6 . 34

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
– Flat box wrench for nut HH6.
– De–energize the equipment.
– Remove the mobile system front cover. See sheet D/R 1.
– Make sure 4DS1 light (item 1), indicating presence of residual voltage at capacitor terminals, is off (LED vis-
ible when mobile system front cover is removed).
– Remove the nuts (item 2) attaching bridge strips (item 4) on the faulty capacitor, and if necessary, loosen nuts
on other parts connected to these strips so as to be able to remove the capacitor smoothly.
– Remove the 2 TCY M3x10 screws (item 3) from the collar holding the capacitor.
– Remove capacitor.
6 . 35

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF INVERTER Version No.: 00

RECTIFIER BRIDGE 4CR7. Date: May 1993
1
1 2
2 3
4 4
5 5
1
2
1
2
6 . 36

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
– Flat fork wrench (8).
– Make sure 4DS1 light (See fig of sheet D/R 13, item 1), indicating presence of residual voltage at capacitor
terminals, is off (Light visible when mobile system front cover is removed).
– Remove the 4 HH M5x10 screws with nuts and washers (items 1 and 2 attaching the terminals.
– Remove the 2 MS M4x40 screws with nuts and washers (items 3 and 4) holding the rectifier bridge to
the side of the inverter.
– Remove the rectifier bridge (item 5).
6 . 37

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

PRESSE–PACK SEMICONDUCTORS. Date: May 1993
3 1 2 3
6 . 38

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
– Weld–iron
– Fork wrench (8).
– Screwdriver.
– Sandpaper, No. 320 or 500.
– Remove the 2 screws holding the inverter (module 4) and pivot (see sheet D/R 7).
– Locate the wires of the thyristor triggers and unsolder them.
– Remove the HH M6x16 screws (item 1) holding the various connection strips on the diode/thyristor
assembly (item 2).
4 – INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
– Replace the diode/thyristor assembly in the inverter and attach with screws (item 3).
– Resolder the thyristor trigger wires. If necessary, check wiring with diagrams 11 to 15.
– Attach the various connection strips to the diode/thyristor assembly.
– Replace the inverter, pivoting it and attaching it with 2 screws (See sheet D/R 7).
– Switch the unit on and test its functionnalities.
– Replace the mobile system front cover.
6 . 39

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

TRANSFORMER 5TR1. Date: May 1993
6 . 40

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
– Allen wrench .
– Release the converter. See sheet D/R 7.
– Remove the 4 6HSH M6x16 screws (item 1) attaching transformer 5TR1.
– Disconnect the primary wires:
wire number: 6 5F2
7 5TB1.3
10 E20
16 5F3
17 5CR3
23 5E20
– Disconnect the wires:

wire number: 1 4TB1.6
2 4E10
3 4TB1.5
21 1A1.TB2.1
– Remove 5TR1.
6 . 41

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF HEATING Version No.: 0

POWER SUPPLY PWB 5A1. Date:
Time: Manpower:
2
1
6 . 42

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
– Tube wrench for nuts M6.
– Remove the front cover ( see D/R 1)
– Remove connectors PL1, PL2 and PL3 of PWB 5A1.
– Remove the 2 M6 nuts (item 1) attaching the PWB.
– Remove PWB 5A1 (item 2).
6 . 43

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF CONTROL Version No.: 00

CONSOLE PWB. Date: October 1996
1 2
4 4
6 6
4 4
3
6
4 4 6
5
6
6 . 44

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
– Tube wrench (6).
– Open the mobile system control console. See sheet D/R 5.
– Left Module pwb 2A1 (item 1).
Disconnect PL1, PL2 and PL3 (item 3).
Remove the 7 M4 nuts (item 4) attaching the PWB beneath the console.
Remove the PWB.
– Right Module pwb 2A3 (item 2).
Disconnect PL5 (item 5).
Remove the 5 M4 nuts (item 6) attaching the PWB beneath the console.
Remove the PWB.
6 . 45

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF C–ARM Version No.: 00

MOTOR 1M1. Date: May 1993
2
1
6 . 46

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
– Hex. head tube wrench (6).
– Disconnect the power supply terminals (item 1).
– Remove motor support and motor : 4HSH screw M4x16 (item 2)
– Remove the belt (item 3)
– Remove the pulley from the motor : 1HSCPS screw M4x6
– Remove the motor : 3 HH screw M6x10
NOTE : Adjusting the belt tension (item 3).
– The tension is adjusted by moving the motor/reduction gear assembly upwards or downwards, then securing
with 4 HSH M4x16 screws.
– Tighten the belt until a play of 10 +/– 2 mm is obtained when a force of 5 N (0,5 kg) is applied between the 2
pulleys.
6 . 47

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF BREAKER Version No.: 00

9SM1. Date: May 1993
6 . 48

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
– Remove the plug from the mains outlet.
– Remove rear cover of monitor support.
– Rotate the breaker support (1 fixing screw).
– Disconnect FASTON terminals of breaker 9Sm1).
– Remove breaker from support (two fixing screws).
4 – REASSEMBLY PROCEDURE (NEW MONITOR SUPPORT)

– Carry out the above operations in reverse order.
6 . 49

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Purpose: X–RAY LAMP. Version No.: 00

Date: October 96
Time: 1/2 H. Manpower: 1
6 . 50

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
1 – TOOLS REQUIRED.
– Normal screw driver.
2 – PRELIMINARY PRECAUTIONS.
– Disconnect the equipment from the main supply.
– Unscrew the top cover. (See illustration)
– Replace the bulb.
– Carry out the above operations in reverse order.
6 . 51

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Purpose: “C–ARM” CABLE REPLACEMENT. Version No.: 00

Date: April 1995
1. EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
”C Arm” cable replacement kit 828 953 G565
Disconnect the equipment from the mains.–
The new Stenoscop CCD is E.M.C. compliant.
For this reason, the cable is shielded and the shield is grounded at its outputs.
To keep this E.M.C. compliance the spare part cable is now the same as the production cable.
The adequate tools for the cable assembling are furnished in the kit.
When removing the cable takecare of the way followed by this one in order to put the new cable back just in
place. This is important for the E.M.C. compliance.
3. PROCEDURE
DISASSEMBLY:
– Remove the Imageur top cover ( 2 screws and the stop rod for the 22cm; 3screws for the 16 cm).
– Remove the X–ray tank covers ( 4 screws)
– Remove the front and the back cover from the mobile.(see D/R 001)
IMAGEUR:
22CM/9 INCHES
– Disconnect the cables from the ion chamber preamplifier ( 2 coaxial cables andSNGL cable).
– Remove the ion chamber preamplifier.( 4 screws)
– Remove the Sub D 25 pins connector.
– Remove the cover from the CCD rack ( 4 screws)
– Remove the 2 coaxial cables, the Iris cable and the ribbon cable from the boards.
– Unscrew the 4 screws on the rack back side and remove the rack.
– Remove the foam from the inside of the C–arm.
16CM/6 INCHES
– Disconnect the cables from the ion chamber preamplifier ( 2 coaxial cables and SNGL cable).
– Unplug from J4 and J5 the 2 wires for the DAP power supply taking care of the polarity.
– Remove the ion chamber preamplifier.( 4 screws)
– Remove the Sub D 25 pins connector.
– Pull out the cable through the imageur frame taking care of the DAP cables.
6 . 52

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
X–RAY HEAD
– Unplug the cables from 6A1–PL1 and PL2.
– Remove the metallic collar from the PL2 cable shield.
– Remove the collimator (3 screws) and unplug the cable from 7A1–PL1.
– Remove the Y/G ground wire from the tank frame.
– Unscrew the connector 6PL–1. Remove the upper part from this connector.– With the AMP ( 305183–R) tool,
unplug the pins from 6PL1– M,N,P,R,S.
– Cut the other wires coming from the main cable.
– Disconnect the yellow/green wire and the wire Nb 11(faston tag) from the 6SaTH2 thermal witch.
– Disconnect the wires Nb 2 and Nb3 and unsolder the wire Nb 1 from the bellows device.
C–ARM
– Remove the cable clamp.
– At each extremity of the C–arm, join the different sub–cables together with a wire which will be used to reinstall
the cable.
– Pull out the cable from the C–arm taking care of the DAP cables as well as the ground wire between the Ima-
geur and the X–ray tank which must stay inside the C–arm..
– To remove the metallic ring holding the cable to the C–Arm, unscrew the HSCPS screw M5x8 and pull down
the ring.
GENERATOR
– Remove the metallic cable clamp
– Cut the collars keeping the cable in the harness.
– Remove the metallic collar holding the cable against the rack, cut the collar clamping the cable against the rack
and remove the plug from 3A12 board.
– Cut the shrink sleeve insulating the BNC–BNC connectors and unplug them.
– Remove the metallic collar holding the cable against the frame on the bottom.
– Unplug the cable from 5 A 1 PL–2
– Remove the clip on the direction rod.
– Remove the rod.
– Unscrew the 2 M6 screws on the right side of the inverter and open the rack.
– Disconnect the wires 2–4–6–8 from 4A1–E1, 1–3–5–7–9 from the heatsink 5 ( see view on left side of sche-
matic 11–20, in the service manual).
– Disconnect the Y/G wire from the heatsink 2 ( not for Stenoscop CCD).
– Remove the cable.
6 . 53

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
REASSEMBLY
Preparation:
WIRING OF THE ”C ARM”

Two persons are required for this operation to avoid to create a mechanical stress to the cable and
the connectors.
Offer up the 2 parts of the cable to the central opening of the ”C Arm”.
Replace the cable clamp by the new one furnished.
While one person pulls the wires on the ”X Ray” head and imager side, introduce and push the 2 parts of
the cable into the ”C Arm” until the rubber sleeve is correctly positioned for remounting the cable
clamp of the ”C Arm”. Take care to not damage the DAP cables if present.
Mount the cable as shown on the figure hereunder.
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
CABLE JOINT PLASTIC RING
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ INTERNAL CABLES
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
CABLE SHEAT
HANDEL
6 . 54

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Imageur side
Fix the wire provided when removing the cable to the Sub–D 25pins.
Using scotch tape, join the connector parallel to the cable. It will be easier to pass it inside the C–arm.
X–ray tube side
Cable installation:
Introduce the cable and pull from the C–arm extremities, carefully and taking care of the DAP cables.
IMAGEUR WIRING:
Remove the scotch tape and the pulling wire.
The cable length required in the imageur is:
Imager 16cm/6 inches
33cm
IMAGER 16 cm ( 6”) SUB D

25 pins
Y/G wire
27cm
Imager 22cm/9 inches
42cm
IMAGER 22 cm ( 9”)
SUB D
25 pins
Y/G wire
55cm
6 . 55

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Plug up the orifice of the C–Arm sole plate with the foam.
Rewire the imageur performing the steps of disassembly procedure in reverse order.
Reinstall the metallic ring cable support under the C–Arm.
– X–RAY HEAD WIRING

Remove the scotch tape from the cable extremity.
Plug up the orifice of the C–Arm sole plate with the foam strip.
Pass the wires throughout the Souriau connector rings.(included in the kit)
With the special insertion tool (8500–39), insert the pins from the wires inside the Souriau connector following
the table hereafter:
WIRE CONNECTOR 6PL1

4 from 6A1–PL1–4 N
5 from 6A1–PL1–5 P
8 from 6A1–PL1–8 S
9 from 6A1–PL1–9 R
10 from 6A1–PL1–10 M
WIRE 2 B
WIRE 4 D
WIRE 6 F
WIRE 8 H
WIRE 1 L
WIRE 3 A
WIRE 5 C
WIRE 7 E
WIRE 9 G
Plug the 6PL1 connector.
Plug back in place the 6A1–PL1and the 6A2–PL1 connectors.
Connect the shield and the yellow/green wire to the ground.
Reinstall the collimator and its cable. ( See Job Card D/R 11 for adjustment )
Secure the cables fixations with collars.
6 . 56

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
–GENERATOR:
Perform the disassembly steps in reverse order.
When all the connections are done, switch the unit ON and verify that the Stenoscop operates correctly.
Turn the unit OFF.
Reinstall the different covers and check again the functionnalities of the units.
6 . 57

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
ii. 6 . 58
blank page
6 . 58

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
iii– 6 . 59
6–4–3 DAP D/R SHEETS
6 . 59

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Purpose: ION CHAMBER. Version No.: 0

Date:
Time: Manpower:
ILLUSTRATION 1
Head Upper Cover
No display with
MDA memory
COVER
ILLUSTRATION 2
Ion Chamber and Housing Sub–assembly
Spacer
Nylon White Plate
Full Field Ion Chamber
ÏÏ ÏÏ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Housing
ÏÏ ÏÏ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Collimator Cover ÏÏ ÏÏ Gasket
Aluminium Filter
ILLUSTRATION 3
Coaxial Cables
3A
3B
6 . 60

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
– Cross–tip screw driver.
– Remove the head upper cover.
– See D/R 3
– Remove the spacer if present. (See illustration 2)
– Unscrew and remove the 3 TC M5 x 12 screws.
– Diconnect the 2 two coaxial cables. (See illustation 3A and 3B)
– Remove the ion chamber.
– Take care to put well in place the coaxial cables, out of the X–ray field.
– Check the functionnality and refer to the DAP Service Manual for adjustment.
6 . 61

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Purpose: DOSE AREA PRODUCT METER DISPLAY Version No.: 0

REPLACEMENT (NOT WITH MDA MEMORY) Date:
Time: Manpower:
ILLUSTRATION 1
Dose display
Dose display
ILLUSTRATION 2
Remote Display Unit
LCD Display
Test and Reset Buttons
Collimator Cover
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Overlay
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏ Aluminium Bracket
ILLUSTRATION 3
Display Overlay
mGyc
m2 TEST
6 . 62

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
– Cross–tip screw driver.
– Remove the head upper cover.
– See D/R 3.
– Remove the dose display mylar
– Unscrew the 2 TF M3 screws.
– Remove the display assembly taking care of the spacer
– Carefully take each item out of the shipping carton and remove its protective wrapping.
– Any discrepancies or obviously damaged items should be reported to your local representative without
delay. If transit damage is evident the packing must be saved for inspection by insurance investigators.
Powering Up : check the functionnality as follow:
Power up the Dose Area Product Meter by turning on the X–ray machine.
The following sequence of events should be observed:
1. A number will appear on the LCD display.
2. Press the “ “ button to zero on the display unit.
3. Press the “ TEST ” button> A number will appear on the display unit.
The value of the number depends on several factors which are characteristics of the chamber,
power supply and electronics.
4. Press the “ “ button to zero the display unit.
Note: Number will continue to be added to the display during the warm–up period (8–10 minutes).
If satisfactory, the instrument is now ready for calibration : see Job Card RG 240
and then routine use.
6 . 63

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
iv. 6 . 64
blank page
6 . 64

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Blank page
v– 6 . 65
6–4–4 IMAGEUR D/R SHEETS
6 . 65

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Purpose: IMAGEUR HEAD DISASSEMBLY / Version No.: 0

REASSEMBLY. Date:
Time: 15 min. Manpower:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
Imageur 22 Stenoscop CCD or Imageur 16 Stenoscop CCD.
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Hex socket and Allen wrench set.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
THIS UNIT IS IN EMC COMPLIANCE WITH THE IEC 601–1–2

WARNING STANDARD. DURING ANY DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY,
ENSURE THAT ALL THE SHIELDS ARE CORRECTLY
INSTALLED.
TAKE ALL USUAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR ELECTRONIC

BOARD MANIPULATION (I.E., MATS AND BRACELETS TO
PROTECT AGAINST THE ELECTRONIC DISCHARGES).
1. Be careful not to damage the antischater grid on the front panel of the Imageur.
2. Set the column at its lowest position and lock its movement using the transportation rod
(see SM of Stenoscop, chapter 3).
3. Remove power from the Imageur.
4. Recover all mounting brackets.
5. Because of the weight of the Imageur Head, prepare a flat surface on which to set the Imageur Head,
to facilitate assembly and disassembly.
6 . 66

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
1. Remove the rear cover from the Imageur Head (three M5 screws for the 16–cm unit and two M5
screws for the 22–cm unit).
2. Set the Stenoscop C–arm in the horizontal position in order to bring the Imageur just above its rest
surface.
3. Remove the stop rod (22–cm unit).
4. Remove the rear cover from the Imageur.
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1 Disassembly
1. Disconnect all cables coming from the C–arm that are connected to the Imageur as follows:
a. Main cable (HE5 connector, 25–contact).
b. Cable connected to the dose measurement preamplifier ( two coaxial cables with Subclic
plugs and supply cables ).
c. Green/yellow security cable.
2. Remove the Imageur and position it on its temporary support (four M6 screws).
3. Route the C–arm cables through the opening of the Imageur Chassis facing the C–arm mounting.
5.2 Reassembly
1. Follow the disassembly procedure in reverse order.

2. Check that the Imageur cable is properly clamped to ensure correct grounding of the strap
with the chassis.
6 . 67

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Purpose: X–RAY IMAGE INTENSIFIER TUBE Version No.: 0

DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY. Date:
Time: 1 H. Manpower:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
X–Ray Image Intensifier Tube 9438HX (22 cm) or 9449HP (16 cm).
SECTION 2
TOOLS

D Job Cards RG (SEE ASM).
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

INSTALLED.

DUE TO THE RISK OF IMPLOSION, SAFETY GLASSES

DANGER ARE MANDATORY FOR ALL II TUBE HANDLING.
1. Remove power from the Stenoscop.

3. Be careful not to damage the II tube external surface, especially the entry window.
6 . 68

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
1. Because of the weight of the Imageur Head, prepare a flat surface on which to set the unit to facilitate
assembly and disassembly.
2. Set the Stenoscop in the horizontal position in order to bring the Imageur just above its rest surface.
3. Prepare an area for II tube disassembly.
4. Remove the rear cover from the Imageur Head (three M5 screws for 16 cm and two M5 screws for 22
cm).
5. Remove the Imageur Head.
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1 Disassembly
1. Remove the shield from the optical system (Ill. 6 and 7, Item 1) and the lead ballast (Ill. 6 and 7, Item
14), if provided.
2. Remove the Imageur rack cover (Ill. 6 and 7, Item 2).
3. Disconnect the J3 connector (Iris) from the CCD Interface Board (Ill. 8, Item 1).
4. On the CCD chip module, disconnect:
a. Subclic plug from the video coaxial cable (Ill. 6, Item 4).
b. Ribbon cable (Ill. 6 and 7, Item 5).
5. Remove the optical system as follows:
On 16–cm units:
Remove the optical system (Ill. 7, Item 6) (three screws).
On 22–cm units:
a. The two Boards comprising the CCD Module assembly—(CCD Sensor Board (Ill. 6, Item 8) and
CCD Interface Module Board (Ill. 6, Item 9)—are interconnected by a flexible board (Ill. 6, Item
10). Disconnect the flexible board from the CCD Sensor Board.
b. Remove the two screws securing the support angle that supports the CCD Interface Module
Board (Ill. 6, Item 11).
c. Remove the CCD Interface Module Board – Support angle assembly.
d. Remove the optical system (Ill. 6, Item 6) (three screws).
6. Disconnect the high voltage cables which run from the II tube to the EHV power supply as well as the
cables connected to the EHV power supply ground terminal.
7. Unsolder the EHV contacts from the EHV cables.
6 . 69

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
8. Install the EHV connectors and contacts on the replacement II tube High Voltage cables (observe
polarization).
9. Remove the II tube (Ill. 6 and 7, Item 3):
On 16–cm units:
a. Remove the Imageur front cover (Ill. 7, Item 7) (three screws, Ill. 7, Item 8).
b. Remove the Imageur CCD rack temporarily to access the mounting screw of the II tube located
under the rack.
c. Remove the three screws securing the II tube to the chassis (Ill. 7, Item 9).
d. Remove the II tube from the front.
On 22–cm units:
a. Remove the stop (Ill. 6, Item 12).
b. Loosen the II tube mounting clamps on the chassis (Item 13, Ill. 6), as well as the clamp screws
(Ill. 6, Item 15) on the mounts (Ill. 6, Item 16).
c. Remove the rear cover (Ill. 6, Item 7) from the Imageur (two screws, Ill. 6, Item 17) and three
pins attached to the mounts (Ill. 6, Item 16).
d. Remove the three mounting screws (Ill. 6, Item 18) securing the II tube to the chassis.
e. Remove the II tube from the front.
5.2 Reassembly
1. Follow the disassembly procedure in the reverse order.

2. Check that the optics and the II output window are clean. Clean them if necessary, using Kodak
Optical Paper, Ref. No. 1546027.
3. Perform the EHV Power Supply adjustment (see ASM).
4. Perform the optical adjustments (see ASM).
6 . 70

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
ILLUSTRATION 6
imageur 22 steno CCD
4
9 8 1 10
6
14
18
5
11 13
16
12
15
17
6 . 71

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
ILLUSTRATION 7
Imageur 16 steno CCD
1 2
14
10
6 . 72

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
ILLUSTRATION 8
video processing module
6 . 73

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Purpose: EHV POWER SUPPLY DISASSEMBLY / Version No.: 0

REASSEMBLY. Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
Thomson TH7191 power supply.
SECTION 2
TOOLS

D Job Card RG : see ASM.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

INSTALLED.


SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
Remove the Imageur Head rear cover (three M5 screws for the 16-cm unit and two M5 screws for the 22-cm unit).
6 . 74

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1 Disassembly
1. Loosen and disconnect all EHV connections which run from the EHV power supply to the II tube.
2. Disconnect the ribbon cable connected to the EHV power supply.
3. Remove the EHV power supply (four M3 screws).
5.2 Reassembly
1. Recover the connectors and contacts to be soldered from the new power supply. These connectors
may be used to replace the II tube EHV connectors.
2. Secure the new power supply to the supporting metal plate (Imageur 16) or the chassis (Imageur 22)
with the four M3 screws.
3. Reconnect and tighten all the II tube EHV connections on the EHV power supply.
Note: On the TH9449HP H506 16–cm tube, the G2 electrode must be connected to the G3 terminal
of the EHV Power Supply.
4. Reconnect the ribbon cable to the EHV power supply.

5. On the CCD Interface Board, preadjust the control voltages to the minimum setting by turning
Potentiometers R1 thru R9 fully counterclockwise.
6. Restore power to the Imageur Chassis.
7. Perform the adjustments: Job Card RG from ASM.
6 . 75

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Purpose: COMPACT OPTICS. Version No.: 0

Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D Compact Optics: 50 Hz/625 lines 22 cm,

60 Hz/525 lines 22 cm,
50 Hz/625 lines 16 cm,
60 Hz/525 lines 16 cm.
CAUTION The optical system model is specific to each Imageur.
It is not possible to replace a 50 Hz/625 line optical system by a 60 Hz/525

line optical system.
The CCD sensor cannot be separated from the optical system. In case of
sensor malfunctioning, the CCD Module optical system assembly (the
two boards are coupled) must be replaced.
SECTION 2
TOOLS

D Job Cards RG (see ASM).
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNING STANDARD. DURING ANY DISASSEMBLY/ REASSEMBLY,
INSTALLED.

1. Remove power from the Imageur Chassis.

6 . 76

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
1. Tilt the C–arm aside to facilitate access to the Imageur.

2. Remove the Imageur Head rear cover (three M5 screws for the 16-cm unit and two M5 screws for the
22-cm unit).
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1 Disassembly
1. Remove the shielding from the optics (Ill. 9 and 10, Item 1), as well as the lead counterweight (Ill. 9
and 10, Item 14), if provided.
2. Remove the Imageur rack cover (Ill. 9 and 10, Item 2).
3. Unplug the J3 Iris connector on the CCD Interface Board.
4. On the CCD module, disconnect:
a. Subclic plug from the coaxial video cable (Ill. 9 , Item 4),
b. Ribbon cable (Ill. 9 and 10, Item 5),
5. Remove the optical system.
On the Imageur 16 cm:
Remove the optical system (Ill. 10, Item 6) (three screws, Ill. 10, 13 and 14, Item 3).
On the Imageur 22 cm:
a. The two boards comprising the CCD tandem – (CCD Sensor Board (Ill. 9, Item 8) and CCD
Module Interface Board (Ill. 9, Item 9)) are coupled by a flexible board (Ill. 9, Item 10).
Disconnect them from the CCD Sensor Board.
b. Remove the two screws (Ill. 9, Item 11) securing the CCD Module Interface Board.
c. Remove the CCD Module Interface Board/support angle assembly.
d. Remove the optical system (Ill. 9, Item 6), (three screws, Ill. 9, 11 and 12, Item 3).
5.2 Reassembly

2. Refer to Job Cards RG (ASM) for the necessary adjustments.
CAUTION The adjustment ring locking screw (Ill. 12 and 14, Item 5) must be
correctly tightened to avoid any play in the optical system.
6 . 77

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
ILLUSTRATION 9
imageur 22 ccd for stenoscop 2
11 4 9 8 1 10
6
5
3
14
6 . 78

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
ILLUSTRATION 10
imageur 16 ccd for stenoscop 2

6 . 79

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
ILLUSTRATION 11
compact optics – imageur 22 CCD for stenoscop 2 6000/9000

ILLUSTRATION 12
compact optics – imageur 22 CCD for stenoscop 2 6000/9000

5 P1
6 . 80

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
ILLUSTRATION 13
compact optics – imageur 16 steno CCD

ILLUSTRATION 14
compact optics – imageur 16 steno CCD

5 P1
1
6 . 81

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Purpose: BOARD CAGE DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY. Version No.: 0

Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
Board cage.
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Allen wrench set.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

INSTALLED.


SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
1. Tilt the Stenoscop C–arm aside to facilitate access to the Imageur.

2. Remove the Imageur rear cover from the Imageur (three M5 screws for the 16-cm unit and two M5
screws for the 22-cm unit).
3. Remove the Imageur rack cover (four M3 screws).
6 . 82

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1 Disassembly
1. Disconnect all cables connected to the Imageur rack as follows:

a. Iris cable (connected to J3/CCD Interface Board).
b. Imageur cable (connected to J6/CCD Interconnection Board).
c. CCD Module cable (connected to J8/CCD Interconnection Board).
d. Dose measurement preamplifier cable (connected to J5/CCD Interconnection Board).
e. CCD Module coaxial video cable (connected to J2/CCD Video Board).
2. Remove the rack and dose measurement preamplifier assembly (four M4 screws).
5.2 Reassembly
Follow the disassembly procedure in the reverse order.
6 . 83

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Purpose: PRINTED WIRING BOARDS DISASSEMBLY / Version No.: 0

REASSEMBLY. Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D CCD Power Supply Board.

D CCD Video Board.
D CCD Interface Board.
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Hex socket Allen wrench set.

D Job Cards RG CCD Interface Board and RG CCD Video Board : see ASM.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

INSTALLED.


SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
Remove the rear cover from the Imageur Housing (three M5 screws for the 16-cm and two M5 screws
for the 22-cm unit).
6 . 84

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1 Disassembly
1. Remove the rack cover (four M3 screws), leaving the lower screws in place.
2. Remove the board(s) that need replacing. To avoid error, colored tabs and handgrips show where
and in what orientation the boards are to be fitted on the rack.
5.2 Reassembly

2. Refer to Job Cards RG (ASM) for the necessary adjustments.
6 . 85

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
vi. 6 . 86
blank page
6 . 86

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
vii. 6 . 87
6–4–5 MEMORY D/R SHEETS
6 . 87

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Purpose: MIDAS BOARD. Version No.: 0

Date:
Time: Manpower:
6 . 88

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
SECTION 1
TOOLS REQUIRED
D Standard tool kit.
SECTION 2
PRELIMINARY PRECAUTION
1. Turn the power OFF.

2. All the precautions for electrostatic discharges have to be taken.
SECTION 3
PROCEDURE
1. Remove the monitor cart back cover. (see D/R 90 page 6 . 102)
2. Remove the monitor cart front cover. (see D/R 90 page 6 . 102)
3. Unscrew and remove the four screws holding the PC brackets to the cart.
4. Remove the PC.
5. Remove the top cover from the PC.
6. Disconnect the ribbon cable between AVIAS and MIDAS boards (item 1).
7. Unscrew the appropriate bracket and remove the board (item 2).
8. Replace the defective board by the new one and proceed in reverse order for the installation.
CAUTION MIDAS takes place on the PCI bus.
6 . 89

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Purpose: AVIAS BOARD. Version No.: 0

Date:
Time: Manpower:
6 . 90

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
SECTION 1
TOOLS REQUIRED

SECTION 2

SECTION 3
PROCEDURE
4. Remove the PC.
6. Disconnect the ribbon cable between AVIAS and MIDAS boards (item 1).
CAUTION AVIAS takes place on the ISA bus.
6 . 91

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Purpose: RS 232 BOARD. Version No.: 0

Date:
Time: Manpower:
SECTION 1
TOOLS REQUIRED

SECTION 2

SECTION 3
PROCEDURE
1. Remove the monitor cart cover. (see D/R 90 ).

2. Remove the monitor cart front cover. (see D/R 90 ).
4. Remove the PC.
7. Check the board configuration following the table here after.
8. Jumper JP9 – 5 / JP10 – 10 / JP11 – 7 / JP12 – 7.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
SW5 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON
SW1 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON
SW2 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON
SW3 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
SW4 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
6 . 92

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
9. Replace the defective board (item 1) by the new one and proceed in reverse order for the installation.
6 . 93

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Purpose: VGA BOARD. Version No.: 0

Date:
Time: Manpower:
SECTION 1
TOOLS REQUIRED

SECTION 2

SECTION 3
PROCEDURE
4. Remove the PC.
6. Unscrew the appropriate bracket and remove the board.
7. Check the board configuration with the drawing (see Ill. 1).
6 . 94

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
ILLUSTRATION 1
6 . 95

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Purpose: TOUCH SCREEN ASSEMBLY Version No.: 00

Date: October 1996
Time: Manpower: 1
VGA display
Grounding plug J2
J1
Touch screen interface

Take care of the position of this connector
6 . 96

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
SECTION 1
TOOLS REQUIRED

SECTION 2

SECTION 3
PROCEDURE
1. Remove the monitor cart front cover. (see D/R 90)

2. Disconnect the cables from the display and the touch screen interface.
3. Unscrew the four screws holding the touch screen assembly.
4. Replace the defective touch screen assembly by the new one taking care of the position.
(Connector : back side)
5. Carry these operations in reverse order.
6. Switch the unit On and check the functionnalities of the unit.
7. For touch screen calibration, see Advanced Service Manual.
6 . 97

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Purpose: HARD DISK Version No.: 00

Date: October 1996
Time: Manpower: 1
ILLUSTRATION 1–1
1 3
ILLUSTRATION 1–2
2
J6
SCI Hard disk jumper

J2
ILLUSTRATION 1–3
J2 J8 J3
IDE Hard drive
6 . 98

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
SECTION 1
TOOLS REQUIRED
SECTION 2
SECTION 3
PROCEDURE
1. Remove the monitor cart back cover. (see D/R 90)
2. Remove the monitor cart front cover. (see D/R 90)
4. Remove the PC.
6. Unscrew the two screws holding the hard disk assembly located on the back side of the PC frame.
( See illustration 1–1 : item 1 on opposite page )
7. Remove the power supply cable (ill. 1–1 item 2 ) and the ribbon cable (ill. 1–1 item 3 ) from the disk.
8. Remove the disk assembly.
9. Unscrew the four screws holding the disk on its frame.
10. Verify the jumper configuration of the hard disk ( See illustration 1–2 and 1–3)
11. Replace the disk by the new one carrying these operations in reverse order.
12. Switch the unit On and verify the functionalities of the unit.
13. Enter the service menu (system setup / permanent data), then insert the customer configuration
floppy (located inside the monitor cart) in the disk drive.
14. Press the « Restore config » key. The message « Restore is OK » is displayed in the mail box.
15. The following screen
will appear.
6 . 99

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
blank page
6 . 100

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
viii. 6 . 101
6–4–6 MONITOR D/R SHEETS
6 . 101

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
1
Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF MONITOR Version No.: 00

CART COVERS. Date: April 1995
Touch screen
front panel Cover C
1
Cover A
Cover B
2 6 . 102
6 . 102

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
1. TOOLS REQUIRED
– Cross tip screwdriver
– Switch OFF the unit
– Remove Mains plug from the outlet
3. COVERS REMOVAL
– Remove 9PL1 plug (item 1)
COVER A
– Remove the 10 screws CTFH M4x8.
– Remove the cover
COVER B
– Unscrew the 2 screws. (item 2)
– Remove the cover pulling it out.
COVER C
– Remove cover B first.
– Unscrew the 3 screws.
– Remove the cover.
4. REASSEMBLY PRODEDURE
– Carry out the previous operations in reverse order
6 . 103

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Purpose: DISSASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF BOARDS Version No.: 0

FROM THE MONITOR Date: January 1997
Time: Manpower: 1
ILLUSTRATION 1
TOP VIEW OF MONITOR WITH
CARDS LOCATION
1 : B.T. Power supply

2 : Deflection board
3 : A.T. Power supply
4 : Video board
5 : Selection board
6 : Light sensor board
7 : Yoke
8 : CRT
ILLUSTRATION 2
SIDE VIEW
6 . 104

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
SECTION 1
TOOLS REQUIRED
Standard tool kit.
SECTION 2
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
POWER REMAINS ON THE MONITOR FOR 2 - 3 SECONDS

WARNING AFTER SWITHING THE TERMINALS PS OFF .
VERY HIGH VOLTAGES ARE GENERATED IN THE MONITOR

( FOR EXAMPLE, THE FOCUS ELECTRODE IS IN THE REGION
OF 8 KV AND THE EHT IN THE REGION OF 23 KV ).
Capacitance discharge.
Note: The screwdriver handle must be insulated.
When disconnecting the EHT cap (final anode) or performing a task requiring the CRT to be handled,
the CRT buld capacitance.
A safe method to do this follows :
D Disconnect the monitor from its power source.

D Connect one end of a wire to the shaft of a screwdriver (handle insulated) and connect
the other end of the wire to the CRT conductive braiding.
D Hold the screwdriver by its insulated handle, then insert the tip under the EHT insulation
cal so the tip shorts the final anode to ground.
Take care not touch the screwdriver’s metal shaft and not scratch the tube glass.
Physical handling.
In addition to the safety precautions due to the presence of high voltage, the following guidelines
must also be observed :
D Never attempt to remove or straighten the mounting lugs or reposition the outer rimband of the tube.
D When it is necessary to remove the CRT from the monitor, never apply leverage to the glass bottle
or support handle or carry it by the neck (Wear safety glasses at all times when handling).
6 . 105

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
SECTION 3
PRELIMINARY OPERATIONS
For the removal of boards from the monitor follow these instructions :.
1. Remove the plastic cabinet.
2. Remove the upper part of the metal cabinet.
SECTION 4
PROCEDURE
D LV power supply board ( illustration 1 : item 1 ).

– Remove the screw supporting the plastic guide.
– Remove the connection with the input AC connector.
– Remove connector J2.
– Remove connector J1 from the video board.
– Remove the screw of the ground connection.
– Remove the board from its position and replace it.
– Carefully insert the new board in exactly the same position as the one removed.
– Install the screw of the ground connection without tightening it.
– Reinstall the plastic guide and tighten the appropriate screw.
– Replace all connectors in the right position.
– Reinsert the input AC connector.
– Tighten the ground screw.
D Deflection board ( illustration 1 : item 2 ).

– Unscrew the metal support and remove it from the cabinet.
– Unplug all the following connectors : J1 – J2 – J4 – J5 – J6 – J7 – W2.
– Unplug connector J2 from the BT power supply board.
– After removing the screws, remove the board from the metal support, then replace it.
– Secure the new board on the metal support with the screws.
– Plug the connectors on the deflection board and on the BT power supply board.
– Screw the board support to the side panel of the metal cabinet.
6 . 106

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
D HV power supply board ( illustration 1 : item 3 ).

– Remove the connector of the anode voltage from the CRT and the TB2
of the video board.
– Remove connector J6 from the deflection board.
– Remove the screw placed to the left of the container and then carefully remove
the HV power supply.
– Repace the HV power supply mounting it in the appropriate holding hole.
– Reinstall the screw placed on the left.
– Plug the power supply, anode voltage and TB2 connectors.
D Video board ( illustration 1 : item 4 ).

– Remove connectors J1 – J2 – J3 and TB2.
– Remove connector J5 and W2 from the deflection board.
– Remove the board from the CRT socket.
– Replace the board.
– Plug all connectors previously removed.
– Connect the central socket to the CRT.
D Selection board ( illustration 1 : item 5 ).

– Remove the rear metal part with the adjustment potentiometers.
– Remove connector J1.
– Remove the light sensor connector.
– Remove the two screws and replace the board.
– Install the new board paying attention to the position of the led and of the trimmers.
– Secure the metal plate to the frame.
D Light sensor board ( illustration 1 : item 6 ).

– Remove the connector placed along the wiring.
– Remove the mounting screw of the board from the plastic frame.
– Replace the board carefully placing the light sensor in the appropriate hole.
– Secure the board with screws and insert the connector.
6 . 107

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
D CRT and deflection Yoke ( illustration 1 : item 7 & 8 ).

– Remove the plastic rear part.
– Remove the upper part of the metal chassis.
– Remove the light sensor connector.
– Remove the plastic front frame.
– Disconnect the clip of the anode voltage from the CRT.
– Remove the video board.
– Remove the two yoke connectors from the deflection board.
– Remove the CRT from the metal chassis by unscrewing the four mounting nuts
placed in the corners.
– Remove the yoke from the CRT.
– Replace the CRT and reinstall the yoke previously removed.
– Execute all mounting procedures in the opposite order.
ix. 6 . 108
6 . 108

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
xi. 6 . 109
blank page
6 . 109

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
6–5 ADJUSTMENT SHEETS
6–5–1 GENERAL
The adjustment sheets given in this chapter comprise all possible preventive or corrective maintenance adjustments.
The first group consists of mechanical adjustments. The second group consists of electronic adjustments.
Before making any electronic adjustments, read the following instructions carefully.
CAUTION :
1) It is forbidden to remove or to replace a PWB when the unit is ON.
2) When a PWB is placed on an extender board, check the continuity of the earth connection with the extension
wire supplied. The omission of this earth connection causes malfunction of the unit.
NOTE : With the exception of the adjustments which are part of the replacement of the X–ray head, of the fila-
ment heating PWB 3A26, or of the timer PWB 3A5, all potentiometers have been calibrated in the factory and
do not have to be readjusted. A recalibration might be necessary in the case of the replacement of a component
on site. Before adjusting a potentiometer, check that the corresponding procedure is at hand.
In this case, follow the procedure described below for the respective adjustment.
THIS SIGN INDICATES THAT TO PERFORM ADJUSTMENTS, X–RAY ARE

TO BE PRODUCED AND THEREFORE CARES AGAINST RADIATION HAZARDS
ARE TO BE TAKEN.
6 . 110

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS
6–5–2 STENOSCOP R/G SHEETS ( MECHANICAL )
6 . 111

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 C.C.D. – M.D.A Job Card RG 101 1 of 2

Purpose: BACK WHEELS ALIGNMENT. Version No.: 00
Date: April 1995
Time: 1H. Manpower: 1
Illustration 1
2 1
3 4
Illustration 2 A
B
Illustration 3
1 1
6 . 112

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Job Card RG 101 2 of 2
– Metric wrenches
– If possible, this adjustment must be done on a flat floor.
3 – PROCEDURE
– Remove the front and the back covers.( see D/R 1 and D/R 2 ).
– Unscrew the screws holding the monitor cart cable support (ill.1/ item1).
– Unscrew the screws holding the footswitch cable support (ill.1/ item 2).
– Remove the 3 screws M4x 16 (see ill.1/ item3).
– Remove the chain cover (ill.1/ item4).
– Remove the internal wheel covers.
– Turn the wheels in longitudinal position.
– Measure the distance between the wheels in the front and back side.(see ill.2/ A –B)
– Turning the chain tighteners, adjust the wheels alignment in order to have A=B, +/– 2 mm.
– Adjust the alignment between the handle and the wheels. For this release the 4 screws (see ill.3/ item1) and
turn the shaft (ill.3/ item 2).
– Reinstall the covers carrying the previous operations in reverse order.
6 . 113

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

Purpose: HANDLE POSITION. Version No.: 00
Date: May 1993
Locked 130o
Locked 100o
Free
45o
Locked Free
45o 15o
6 . 114

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
– Screwdriver.
– Glue
NOTE : All the locking systems of the different movements, wiwag, C–arm rotation, etc. are equipped with
a mechanical system which compensates mechanical wear.
3 – PROCEDURE
– Tighten the handle until the movement is correctly locked.
– Remove cautiously the movement label glued on the center of the handel.
– Set the handel in correct position
– Tighten the screw
– Glue the movement label
This procedure is valid for the correct positionning of the handel.
If the movement label is damaged, see code number on figures page 9.
6 . 115

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

Purpose: “C ARM” ROTATION BRAKE. Version No.: 00
Date: May 1993
4 5
3
45 " 1 mm
1
2
6 . 116

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
– Screwdriver.
– Make sure C–arm is stable.
3 – PROCEDURE
– Remove the covers of the C–arm support.
– Unlock the C–arm.
– Unscrew the 4 attachment screws of the locking system (2).
– Do not completely unscrew them, to avoid dropping attachment plates (3).

– Move attachment the locking system slightly forward.
– Tighten the 4 attachment screws.
– Check operation.
If it is not possible to operate correctly, it will be necessary to modify the length of the threaded rod (4).
If locking device (rubber) is spoilt, replace threaded rod and rubber (code number : 861 205 P 015).
In this case, proceed as follows:
– Unscrew the 4 attachment screws of the locking system and remove it completely.
– Unlock the nut (5).
– Extend the threaded rod by unscrewing it or replace it.
– Tighten the lock nut (5).
– Reassemble the locking system on the C–arm (do not tighten the screws).
– Actuate the lock handle.
– Move the locking system to bring it into contact with the C–arm.
– Loosen the lock handle.
– Move the system slightly forward.
– Tighten the 4 attachment screws.
– Check operation.
– Install cover, handle and stop–gap.
6 . 117

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
xii. 6 . 118
Blank page
6 . 118

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
xii– 6 . 119
6–5–3 LASER R/G SHEETS
6 . 119

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

Purpose: EXTERNAL LASER AIMING. Version No.: 00
Date: May 1995
Illustration 1
Illustration 2
6 . 120

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
– Screwdriver.
WARNING: – THE AIMING USES A CLASS IIIA LASER LIGHT,
WARNING DO NOT LOOK THE BEAM!
– THE LASER CENTRING ADJUSTMENT IS
PERFORMED WITH X–RAYS
– Make sure C–arm is stable.
3 – PROCEDURE
Factory preadjustment or in case of replacement:

Preadjustment :
– unscrew lightly the 3 holding screws of the U shape support (ill.1–item 1)
– unscrew lightly the screw holding the laser on its U shape support (ill.2–item1)
– it must be possible To move with allowance the laser on the support
– precenter the laser on the support disk plate
Positioning on the I.I.:
– put the laser in place on the I.I.–see arrow

– push it against the I.I. surface
Laser alignment
– on the console select manual fluoro–40kV/0.4 mA

– set the C–arm with the I.I. upside
– close the blades under fluoro in order To have a 1 square cm on the screen.
– under X–ray, centre the cross included in the laser box inside the square centre. Set this cross in the
middle of the square moving the laser device in the 2 axis.
– when the device is well centred, remove carefully the laser assembly support.
– lock it on its support with the screw and then lock the support with the 3 screws (ill.1–item 1) taking
care of not moving the laser box.
6 . 121

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Reticule positioning:
– put the laser in place on the I.I.

– lay on the tube head a 1mm Al plate whith a 2 mm hole in the center
– in fluoro observe the hole image position and the laser cross image position
– under X–rays, centre the hole with the laser cross.
– once the hole is centred, with a pencil, sign the hole position on the housing top
taking care of not moving the Al. plate.
– place the circular reticule centre just on the mark and stick it.
Final adjustment on site :This adjustment has to be done before each utilisation
– set the C–arm in the forecasted working position.

– switch on the laser and adjust the beam turning the 3 screws ( ill.2–item 2) located on the laser surface.
6 . 122

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Blank page
6 . 123

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

Purpose: INTEGRATED LASER ALIGNMENT. Version No.: 00
Date: August 1996
1 2 3
5
4
6 . 124

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
– Inches Allen wrench (small size)..
WARNING: – THE AIMING USES A CLASS IIIA LASER LIGHT,
WARNING DO NOT LOOK THE BEAM!
– THE LASER CENTRING ADJUSTMENT IS
PERFORMED WITH X–RAYS
– Collimator must be perfectly adjusted.

– Remove the collimator cover.
3 – PROCEDURE
D Determine the centre of the II using the centring pattern if available inside the memory or by
measurement on the monitor sreen.
D Put a washer (for 4 mm screw) on the II cover, just in the centre.
D Switch the Stenoscop ON and set the laser in the x–ray field ( 2nd pushbutton of the X–ray handle ).
D Check the laser cross position (must be inside the washer) and correct it if necessary following the
instructions here after:
– Loosen the 2 screws (item 2 and 3) and move longitudinally the diode assembly (item 1).
– Check under fluoro and readjust until the correct position is reached.
– Play with the screw (item 5) to correct the end travelling limit. Make some <<return>>
movements and verify the position.
D When the cross is well centred, the beam of the diode beam must be adjusted to merge at the
same point (washer centre).
– Diode beam lateral movement is obtained by the rotation of the diode assembly on its axis.
For this, tight screw (item 2) and loose screw (item 3) for rotation in one direction and tight
screw (item 3) and loose screw (item 2) for the other direction.
– Diode beam longitudinal movement can be done in two ways.
By moving the diode assembly (item 1) or the assembly support (item 6) along the longitudinal
axis by tilting the assembly playing with the press–screws (item 4).
D When the correct adjustment is obtained, set the collimator cover back in place and check that the laser
moves freely inside the cover.
Note: When the C–arm is rotated the laser beam moves and leaves the central position due to the
mechanical flexibility. A tolerance of 5 mm is normal. However the laser beam still merges with
the cross position and that does not affect the aiming efficacy.
6 . 125

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
xiv. 6 . 126
Blank page
6 . 126

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
xv– 6 . 127
ELECTRONIC ADJUSTMENTS
6–5–4 STENOSCOP R/G SHEETS
6 . 127

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

Purpose: KV CIRCUIT (3A12 – R216) – DIAGRAM 23D Version No.: 00
MEASURE WITH WISCONSIN CASSETTE. Date: May 1993
3A12 kV mA 829 825 G025
6 . 128

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
– The use of Wisconsin test cassette is obligatory.
– This measure device is small, constant and accurate.
– This test cassette is also in current use by field servicemen.
– Ref. WISCONSIN X–ray test cassette. Model 101 or 015
– Manufacturer: RMI – PO BOX 44 MIDDLETON
WISCONSIN 53562
– A densitometer.
3 – PROCEDURE
– The specification of the maximum voltage for the HF unit is 110 kV +/-10 % : this corresponds to a
VHV value between 99 and 121 kV.
– In order to reduce dielectric stress and increase reliability, it is the usual practice to make sure that the
VHV is never higher than 114 kV.
– Verify, with Wisconsin test, cassette that the VHV is between 104 and 114 kV : take into account the
measurement error (relatively high) introduced by indirect measurement from the quality of the
X–ray radiation.
– Use the calibration curve of the test cassette for triphase generator.
Use a densitometer.
If the measurements are not consistent, measure the voltage VD as follows :
– Connect, to the ground (0 V of the PWB), pin 3 of 3A12 Op114.
– Connect a digital voltmeter (10 ME input impedance) between 3A12PL1.7 and 3A12PL1.10.
– Select DC mode.
– Switch ON the unit.
– Select MANUAL–FLUORO.
– Select 110 kV – 0.1 mA.
– Initiate fluoro and note the value VD displayed on the voltmeter.
– Remove the bridge between ground and Op114.3.
– VD value must be between 52.5 and 55.5 volts.
– If the results of the VD measure and Wisconsin test cassette are out of tolerances, the unit is faulty.
– If the PWBs are correct, read just 3A12–R216 in order to obtain 54.2 V. (VD).
– With the Wisconsin test cassette, verify that the kV value is now within the tolerances.
See CHAP. 4 for TESTS CDRH compliance
6 . 129

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

Purpose: KV CIRCUIT (3A12 – R216) – DIAGRAM 23D Version No.: 00
MEASURE WITH KEITHLEY 35080. Date: May 1993
3A12 kV mA 829 825 G025
TPE7
TPE8
PIN 3
6 . 130

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
xray tube head
– Keithley 35080 kVp Divider, (or equivalent)
– (32865C Filter Pack, 65 kV – 135 kV)
– Note : conversion factor for this pack : +.55V
keithley
– Digital multimeter
– Oscilloscope
keithley must be
perpendicular to
anode/cathode axis
– De–energize the mobile system
– The specification of the maximum voltage for the H.F. Generator is 110 kV +/-10 %, 99 kV to 121 kV.
– In order to reduce dielectric stress and increase reliability, it is the usual practice to make sure that 114 kV
is never exceeded! (Use Keithley to verify).
3 – PROCEDURE
3A12 AR114 pin3
– Temporarily place a jumper from 3A12 Op114 pin 3 to com. Nick C. usually skips this
– Connect a DVM between 3A12PL1.7 and 3A12PL1.10 (50–60 step
Vdc).Or use KV+ = TPE8 KV- =TEP7
– Turn unit on.
– Select manual – Fluoro, 110 kV, .1mA. 2 mA
– Initiate Fluoro and note voltage reading on DVM.
– A value of 54.2 Vdc on the DVM should correspond to 110 kV on the Keithley, with a range of
52.5 Vdc to 55.5 Vdc. 1v = 2kv across TP8 to TP7 (=kvp feedback from internal bleeder)
– Adjust 3A12 – R216 to achieve if necessary Adjust for 110 kvp if necessary
– Remove jumper from Op114.
See chapter 4 for CDRH TESTING REQUIREMENTS
6 . 131

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

Purpose: TRAVEL SAFETY (3A19 – R123) Version No.: 00
DIAGRAM 38B. Date: May 1993
Time: 30 min. Inverter SCR crossfire safety Manpower: 1
P
L1
PL
1
3A19 COMMANDE SCR 2 828 982 G035
30 micro second delay
6 . 132

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
– Dual channel oscilloscope.
3 – PROCEDURE
Connect an oscilloscope as follow :
Probe x10
Channel A 3A19.E125 TPE125 see previous page
Channel B 3A19.E172 TPE172 see previous page
Sweep 2 s/div, single shot 10 micro seconds/ division
V/div 0.2 V/div 5v/div
Trigger channel A, DC external +
– Energize the mobile system.
– Select 40 kV and 0.1 mA, manual fluoro mode.
– Adjust 3A19 R 123 to obtain a delay of 30 S by commanding a fluoro operation.
6 . 133

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

Purpose: FLUORO ADJUSTMENT (3A26 – R9) Version No.: 00
DIAGRAM 81E FILAMENT 4. Date: May 1993
Remove
W33 and
insert mA
meter
3A26 CHAUFFAGE FILAMENTS 4 829 357 G055
6 . 134

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
– DC milliammeter.
– Extender board.
3 – PROCEDURE
– Remove the cover of the X–Ray head – see sheet D/R 3
– Remove the jumper at the divider PWB 6A1 and connect a DC milliammeter (10 mA full scale)
to the current measuring circuit. Jumper = W33 on xray tube head (see previous page)
CAUTION : CHECK CONTINUITY OF THE CIRCUIT
– Position circuit 3A26 on the extender board. Not necessary
– Connect the PWB ground to the ground of the card rack.
– Select the fluoro manual mode.
– Display 40 kV and 6 mA.
– Initiate fluoro.
– Adjust 3A26 R 9 so that 6.1 mA is read on the milliammeter (0.1 mA consumed in the HV divider).
– Switch OFF the unit R9 = bottom pot see previous page
– Replace the jumper after adjustment.
– Reinstall the cover of the X–Ray head.
See CHAP. 4–2 for CDRH COMPLIANCE TEST.
6 . 135

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

Purpose: FLUORO PREHEATING (3A26 – R3) Version No.: 0
DIAGRAM 84D FILAMENT 4. Date:
Time: Filament boost Fluoro Manpower:
6 . 136

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
3 – PROCEDURE
– Connect an oscilloscope as follows:
Probe X10 3A26.23A 3A26 bd pin 23A
Sweep 20 ms/div 50mS/div
V/div 20 mV/div 200mV/div
Trigger external DC + to 3A26.24A
Ground rack ground
– Display 40 kV and 0.5 mA.
– Fluoro mode (manual).
– Command short fluoro sequences
– Adjust 3A26.R3 to obtain a minimum rise time of the scope mA current.
The signal is triggered on the leading edge of the 85% kV signal. illustrations A, B and C.
Adjust until the correct signal is obtained (B).
See chap. 4–2 TEST for CDRH compliancy
6 . 137

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

Purpose: FLUORO TIMER – DIAGRAM 103A. Version No.: 00
Date: May 1993
3A12 kV mA 829 825 G025
TPE3
6 . 138

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
3 – PROCEDURE
– Position the kV–mA PWB 3A12 on the extender.
– Connect the PWB ground to the ground of the board rack.
– Connect an oscilloscope as follows:
Probe X10 3A12.E3 3A12 TPE3 see previous page
Sweep 2 ms/div 5mS/div
20 mSec
V / div 0.5 V/div 2v/div period
Trigger Line
Ground board rack ground
– Apply voltage to the unit.
– Select the Fluoro mode.
– Display 40 kV – 0.1 mA.
– Initiate fluoro
– Adjust 3A12.R217 to obtain a time T = 20 ms.
– Reset Fluoro Timer 5 min.
– Initiate a continuous sequence of Fluoro during 5 minutes and verify with the chronometer that
the buzzer is energised after 4 min 26 sec +/–12 sec and that the X–Ray emission is stopped after
4 min 56 sec +/–13 sec.
– Readjust R217 if necessary and verify.
See chap. 4–2 TEST for CDRH compliancy.
6 . 139

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

Purpose: RAD SAFETY DIAGRAM 83D FILAMENT 4. Version No.: 00
Date: May 1993
Time: 15 min. Backup timer for 160 max. maS exceeded Manpower: 1
6 . 140

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
3 – PROCEDURE
A : 7 SECONDS SAFETY for 220 vac power
– Remove 5A1.PL2 connector (PB PUISSANCE CHAUFFAGE). disables filament drive (no xray)
– Select the RAD mode.
– Display 40 kV – 160 mAs.
– Adjust 3A26–R7 so that the exposure is stopped after 7 +/–0.2 seconds.
The adjustment is made by using the fluoro timer display as reference and adjusting 3A26.R7
so that the exposure is stopped as soon as the number 7 appears.
– Switch OFF the mobile
Remember: B : 15 SECONDS SAFETY for 120 vac power reduced power

remove 5A1.PL2 – Switch 3A3.S133.B into ON position will already be on for 120 vac systems
connector for 120
– Switch ON the unit
vac only systems
too. – Select RAD mode, 40 kV, 160 mAs actual mA = 24 mA
– Adjust 3A26.R8 so that the exposure is stopped after 15 +/–0.5 seconds ccw decreases time 2 turns/sec
The adjustment is performed by using the Fluoro timer display as reference and adjusting 3A26R8
so that the exposure is stopped as soon as the number ”11” appears. 15 appears
– Switch 3A3.S133.B into OFF position don't do if you have 120 vac system
– Connect 5A1.PL2 connector
6 . 141

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

Purpose: RAD MA – RAD PREHEATING (3A26 – R4) Version No.: 00
DIAGRAM 84B FILAMENT 4. Date: May 1993
Time: 1 H 30. filament boost Rad Manpower: 1
Only do if you have radiographic cassette option
A31
A32
solder
side
6 . 142

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
– Dual channel oscilloscope 50 MHz.
– Check that the ground connections of the PWB are connected to the earth of the board rack.
3 – PROCEDURE
– Position 3A26 on extender board.
– Connect an oscilloscope to A26.a32
–Vertical sensitivity 1 V/div.
–External trigger DC – at 3A26.a31 (schematics 81D – PRE signal)
–Time basis 20 ms/div. 50 mS/div
– Select radiography mode – 100 kV – 5 mAs. R4 ccw decreases adjust for waveform A on next page
– Make a few exposures and adjust A26–R4 to obtain a current of 20 mA (1V = 10mA) at the beginning
of the exposure. See oscillogram A to D. 20 mA for 220 vac (13 mA for 120 vac system)
NOTE : 20 mA Rad adjustment is performed with only 1 potentiometer and it is normal that tube current
is too low at the beginning of the exposure.
So, for 40 kV and 60 mA, the tube current at the beginning of the exposure is about 15 mA and
reaches 60 mA after about 40 msec.
This situation is correct.
In all ways, kV and mA values are correct, only the time of the exposure is a bit longer but without
influence on the quality of the exposure.
6 . 143

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
PRECHAUFFAGE – PREHEATING
6 . 144

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
VERIFICATION OF TUBE CURRENT IN RAD MODE

– Remove upper cover of X–Ray Head : see sheet D/R 3
– Remove mA jumper on 6A1 and connect a milliamperemeter DC in current measure circuit : see RG 204.
Jumper = W33 on xray tubehead
Caution : CHECK THE CONTINUITY OF THE CIRCUIT
kV Current
40 kV 60 +/–3 mA For 220 vac systems.
50 kV 54.5 +/–2.8 mA
60 kV 47.2 +/–2.4 mA
70 kV 40.9 +/–2.1 mA Fixed mA values Eprom driven based
80 kV 32.2 +/–1.7 mA on selected KVP.
100 kV 29.2 +/–1.3 mA
NOTE : mA will be measured after tube current stabilisation
For US model : 120 vac systems
– Switch 3A3 Sm133.B into ON position already on
– Perform the following measurements : 40 kV 25.7 +/–2 mA
100 kV 12.8 +/–1 mA
– Switch 3A3.Sm133 A into OFF position Leave on for 120 vac systems
– Remove 3A26 PWB from the extender board and reinstall it.
– Remove the milliamperemetre DC and reinstall the jumper on 6A1.Tb24
See CHAP. 4–2 TESTS for CDRH compliancy.
6 . 145

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

Purpose: RAD / FLUORO SWITCH CHECK. Version No.: 00
Date: May 1993
5A1 PUISSANCE CHAUFFAGE 4 829 355 G015
1.5 seconds is normal
6 . 146

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
– Dual channel oscilloscope 50 MHz.
– Rad Preheating adjustment must be correct (see sheet RG 208)
Use scope in differential mode
2 – PRELIMINARY PRECAUTIONS channel 1 CR5 anode
channel 2 CR5 cathode (select add mode)
– De–energize the mobile system. Gnd to chassis
3 – PROCEDURE Option remove AL filter in collimator & watch for filament switching
– The fluoroscopy/radiography switch must take place within a maximum of 1 second. 1.5 sec normal
– Check: connect an oscilloscope in differential mode to the terminals of 5A1–CR5 (see diagram 90D).
External trigger DC + at A26–36A
Sweep 0.5 sec/div
V/div 50 Vdc/div
– Check that switches occur correctly in the X–ray housing
– Remove the cover and examine the focal spots.
Looking at the apparatus from in front of the control panel, fluoroscopy focal spot is on the left.
– In fluoroscopy or radiography, only one focal spot must exist in stabilized conditions.
6 . 147

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

Purpose: MAS INTEGRATORS (3A26 – R6) Version No.: 00
DIAGRAM 82C FILAMENT 4. Date: May 1993
Time: 1H. Rad Function Manpower: 1
Only do if you have radiographic cassette option
6 . 148

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
– mAs meter.
– Wire grip.
3 – PROCEDURE
– Remove the X–ray head upper cover. See sheet D/R 3
– Remove the bridge of divider circuit 6A1. W33 mA jumper wire located on xray tube head
– Insert an mAs meter into the current measuring circuit (adjustment of Fluoro output) on the
divider PWB 6A1.
– CAUTION : CHECK THE CONTINUITY OF THE CIRCUIT
– Energize the unit.

– Select RAD mode.
– Command a RAD exposure and adjust 3A26.R5 (diagram 82C) to obtain a reading of 4 +/–0.05 mAs
at the control mAs meter. R5 = mAS intergrator adjustment
– Command a RAD exposure and adjust 3A26.R6 to obtain a reading of 80 +/–0.05 mAs on the control
mAs meter. Using mA meter alone 13.2 mA x 6 sec = 79.2 mAS
– Check the other positions of the mAs.
The tolerance on the mAs is 10% +/–0.1 mAs over the entire range.
– Disconnect the mAs meter from the measurement circuit and install the bridge on divider circuit 6A1.
– Replace the X–ray head upper cover.
6 . 149

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

Purpose: AUTOMATIC FLUORO SYSTEM Version No.: 00
ADJUSTMENT. Date: May 1993
Time: 2 H. ABC response Manpower: 1
3A5.A82 pin 6 can be checked easily by

clipping onto the top of R108
BA
PL
1
BA
PL2
3A5 MINUTERIE 832 501 G015
6 . 150

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
– Double beam Oscilloscope, double time base.
– 3 cm of plastic material (polyamide or polyethylene)
– 2 mm of Aluminium.
– 2 mm of copper.
– 0.8 mm of copper.
– 1 plastic tray.
2 – PRELIMINARY REMARK
– This procedure is valid for the 828 970 G 015 MINUTERIE board
3 – ADJUSTMENT PREREQUISITE
– The image system must be correctly and completely adjusted. (See RG 251) .
– The X–ray head cover must be in place.
4 – ADJUSTMENTS
4.1 X–RAY EMISSION REFERENCE

– Place a 2 mm copper absorption at the outlet of the X–ray head.
– Connect an oscilloscop on 3A5.b9 (cde ABD) DVM
– On the control console :
– select FLUORO MANUAL mode
– select HIGH DEFINITION FLUORO (HLC)
– if unit is equiped with a 22 cm imager, the ZOOM mode must not be selected.
– Select 75 kV
– Initiate Fluoro and select mA parameters in order to read on the measure device a value of 2.1+/–0.05 Volts
(control ABD value).
– Note – mA and kV values :
these 2 values determine the reference rate of X–ray emission.
4.2 DOSE REFERENCE

– Place a 2 mm copper absorption at the outlet of the X–Ray head.
– Connect an oscilloscop on 3A5.A82.6 operational amplifier See note on previous page for
– On the control console : easy scope placement
– select MANUAL FLUORO mode
– select HIGH DEFINITION FLUORO (HLC)
– select mA and kV values corresponding to the X–ray emission reference (see 4.1)
– Initiate FLUORO and adjust 3A5.R65 in order to read on the measure device an average value
of 0 +/–10 mV.
6 . 151

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
6 . 152

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
4.3 LOOP GAIN PREADJUSTMENT
– Preadjust the potentiometers :

– 3A5.R67 fully CCW (zero hysteresis)
– 3A5.R60 fully CW (min. phase adjustment)
– 3A5.R66 mid range
– Connect an oscilloscop
– Probe A 3A5.a7
– Trigger ext. DC + to 3A5b8
– Select Automatic Fluoro, standard Fluoro 108
– With an absorption requiring a VHV included between 105 and 110 kV; adjust 3A5.R66 in order to obtain
a rise time of VHV of 0.55 sec. KVP
Observe the analog kV signal at the A7 output of 3A5 by taking only VHV build–up time into consideration
and leaving stabilization problems to a later stage.
4.4 PHASE LEAD AND LOOP GAIN ADJUSTMENT
IMPORTANT remark concerning stability adjustments for the scope regulation loop :
– Water and plastic are ideal (polyamide or polyethylene) for phantom absorption.
The regulation loop is less stable when a copper phantom is used.
Variation in image signal output in response to a kV variation will be much ronger for copper than
for an organic tissue equivalent material.
– If regulation loop adjustment is carried out under very strict conditions, a weaker loop gain is chosen to
obtain a response with sufficient stability.
This adjustment using copper obtains a slower response speed than that obtained using an organic
substance.
6 . 153

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Good
filtration set for

108 kvp
550
msec
filtraion set for

60 kvp
6 . 154

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Goal: ABC stable within 1 second for digital to capture image Job Card RG 211 6 of 7
Adj. R60 (oscillation/damping) and R66 (rise time) to get balance between
PHASE ADJUSTMENT 108 kv ABC response and 60 kv ABC response. Want fastest rise time
without oscillation. May need to adjust section 4.5 (hysterisis) first. Image on
Connect an oscilloscop monitor should get to proper brightness without oscillating. A good test is to
select electronic radiography with zero FNR and see if the image is stable
– Probe 3A5.b9 before the image is captured via last image hold.
– Trigger ext. DC + to 3A5.b8 see waveforms previous page
With the same absorption determined in § 4.3, adjust 3A5.R60 in order to obtain image without overshoot
of the control ABD signal. Turning R60 too far CCW will cause oscillation
Select absorption in order to obtain a HV regulation of about 60 kV.
Observe control ABD signal on 3A5.b9 and correct if necessary gain adjustment (R66) and phase adjustment
(R60) in order to obtain an image without oscillation and with a maximum glare displayed by an overshoot
of 33% max.
Then check that high kV regulation takes place in a sufficiently short period : T2 = 1000 msec max.
Check that the value of control ABD signal is included between 95 and 105% of nominal value after
1000 msec of the beginning of the X–ray exposure with different absorptions, in FLUORO and
HIGH DEFINITION FLUORO mode and AUTOMATIC mode. 2.1 volts dc otherwise redo section 4.1
if necessary
Check that low kV regulation occurs without oscillation.
Only one positive overshoot of the ABD control signal corresponding to monitor glare is accepted. At 60 kv
Maximum acceptable glare is characterized by a 50% overshoot of the ABD control signal for a regulation
( 45 +/–1 KV ).
4.5 HYSTERESIS ADJUSTMENT
Purpose of the Hysteresis circuit

The automatic control finds the kV/mA pair to which the ABD control signal (C.C.D. camera output), equal
to the reference signal (i.e. zero signal error), corresponds.
The kV/mA variations are discrete and in order to avoid continuous flutter around the equilibrium value, a
hysteresis defining a zone without corrections of X–Rays intensity is needed.
Hysteresis values must be limited to those that are truly useful in order to obtain an easily duplicated
operating point.
The results of an automatic control mechanism correction are greater at low kV because the increments are
constant over kV, due to the kV/mA linkage principle.
Hysteresis value adjustment :

3A5 R67 will be adjusted to obtain a potential difference of 1.75 Volt at the potentiometer terminals.
6 . 155

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
4.6 OPERATION CHECK
Check the correct operation of the automatic control using different filters and varying amounts of water in
the tray, for different absorption values, characterized by :
– appearance of image without abnormal glare (see § 4.4) and without apparent oscillation,
– the constancy of radiologic stabilization date of the automatic control for successive scope operations
with identical absorption,
– modification of radiologic date due to automatic control, for small variations in absorption.
6 . 156

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Blank page
6 . 157

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

Purpose: 3A1 INTERFACE DSM PWB (201 – 210B). Version No.: 00
Date: May 1993
3A1 INTERFACE DSM 828 988 G035
T1 3A1 E123
Channel A R151
0.5 V/div
200 mS/div
T2
Channel B
3A1 E124
6 . 158

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
1. TOOLS REQUIRED
– Oscilloscope
– All the potentiometers are FACTORY CALIBRATED.
– This procedure will be performed only if accidental uncalibration occures.
3. CONDITIONS
The image system must be completely and correctely adjusted (see corresponding manual).
4. PROCEDURE
NOTE : The waveforms are given for your guidance.
The parameters of the oscilloscope adjustment are different of the parameters given in the procedure.
– Install 3A1 PB on extender card
– Connect ground of 3A1 to card rack ground
– Power ON the unit.
4.1 T1 DELAY ADJUSTMENT

Connect the scope as follows :
Probe x10 3A1.E123
V/div 0.5V/div
Sweep 200 mS/div
Trigger Int. DC–
Memory Memory ON
– On the control console, select E.R. (Electron Rad)
– Initiate Fluoro sequence
– Adjust 3A1R151 in order to obtain a delay of 1000 +/–20 ms.
4.2 T2 DELAY CHECK

channel A : Probe x10 3A1.E123
channel B : Probe x10 3A1.E124
V/div 0.5V/div
Sweep 200 mS/div
Trigger Int. DC– channel A
Memory Memory ON
– On 3A1 connector, jump 3A1.a8 to 3A1.a20 ( STOP DSM signal maintains to 1 )
– Initiate FLUORO
– Verify that the delay, triggered on the rising edge of T1, is 880 +/–100 ms.
6 . 159

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Channel A
0.5 V/div
T3
10 mS/div
Channel A
0.5 V/div T4
100 mS/div
Channel A
0.5 V/div T5
200 mS/div
6 . 160

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
4.3 T3 DELAY CHECK

Probe x10 3A1.E122
V/div 0.5V/div
Sweep 10 msec/div
Trigger Ext. DC– on 3A1.a17 (OX)
– On 3A1 connector, jump 3A1.a8 to 3A1.a20
– Select NORMAL FLUORO MODE
– Initiate FLUORO and release RX control
T3 Delay is triggered by the falling edge of the RX control.
– Verify that the delay is 62 +/-8 ms
4.4 T4 DELAY ADJUSTMENT

Probe x10 3A1.E126
V/div 0.5V/div
Sweep 100 msec/div
Trigger Int. DC– (channel A)
– Select PULSED FLUORO on the control console.
Delay T4 is generated after the first RX pulse.
– Adjust 3A1.R152 in order to obtain a delay of 500 +/–10 ms.
4.5 T5 MINIMUM DELAY CHECK

Probe x10 3A1.E127
V/div 0.5V/div
Sweep 200 msec/div
Trigger Int. DC– (channel A)
– On 3A1 connector, jump 3A1.a8 to 3A1.a20.
– Select PULSED FLUORO mode.
– Verify that T5 delay is 880 +/–100 ms.
6 . 161

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Channel A
3A1 E121
0.5 V/div
200 mS/div R150
6 . 162

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
4.6 T6 PULSED FLUORO RATE ADJUSTMENT

Probe x10 3A1.E121
V/div 0.5V/div
Sweep 200 msec/div
Trigger Int. DC+ (channel A)
– Select PULSED FLUORO MODE
– Initiate FLUORO sequence
– Adjust 3A1.R150 in order to obtain a delay T6 of 1000 +/–50 ms.
With T4 = 500 ms, the pulse rate is 1 X–ray pulse / 1.5 second.
– Remove connection between 3A1.a8.a20.
4.7. ANODE COOLING PAUSE SAFETY ADJUSTMENT (not used)
This adjusment is valid only for the PWB INTERFACE DSM.

Code number 828 988 G 035
Connect the probe to 3A1.E608
– Sweep 0.5 Sec/Div
– Trigger DC–internal
– Position SW 602.2 (B) to ON
– Select ER mode (Election Radiography)
– Initiate exposure
– Adjust 3A1.R604 in order to obtain a delay of 2 sec +/–0.4 sec.
– Position SW 602.2 (B) to OFF
6 . 163

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Blank page
6 . 164

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

Purpose: PWB SWITCHES PROGRAMMATION. Version No.: 00
Date: May 1993
Time: Manpower:
No et Nom du CI Switch No Switch Position FONCTION
EUR. USA
2A1 S58 1–4 (A) ON ON The 3 switches determine the function of BP 2A1 Sm 35
PUPITRE MODULE G2 2–3 (B) ON ON Stenoscop 2 (D6/D9)
S59 1–4 (A) ON ON HIGH QUALITY or STANDARD FLUORO mode
828 986 G015 2–3 (B) OFF OFF selection
S60 1–4 (A) OFF OFF Stenoscop LE
2–3 (B) OFF OFF BLOCKING OF MEMORIZATION ( DR )
2A2 S528 1–4 (A) OFF OFF ON = Possibility of camera sweeps inversions
PUPITRE MODULE D2 2–3 (B) OFF OFF OFF = No possibility of camera sweeps inversions
828 984 G025

3A1 S502 1–4 (A) ON ON ON = RX Hold in SP and ER mode ( SN )
INTERFACE DSM OFF = No RX Hold in SP and ER mode ( SN )
2–3 (B) OFF ON ON = No RX Hold in SN mode
828 988 G035 OFF = RX Hold in SN mode
S602 1–4 (A) OFF OFF ON = RX Hold in SN mode during T1+T2 (if S502 B OFF)
OFF = RX Hold in SN mode during T1 (if S502 B OFF)
2–3 (B) OFF OFF ON = ACP delay activated
OFF = ACP delay not activated
3A3 S133 1–8 (A) OFF OFF ON = AGC Camera ON
DIAPHRAGMES 2 2–7 (B) ON ON ON = Reduced power
3–6 (C) ON ON OFF = Beam standby mode
832 502 G015 4–5 (D) OFF OFF OFF = Go to black function inactive
S501 1–4 (A) ON ON ON = Stenoccop 2 9” – 22cm

OFF = Stenoscop 2 6” – 16cm
2–3 (B) ON ON OFF = Led PB II mode OFF
3A9 S140 1–4 (A) ON ON ON = 2A1 Sm35 bistable function
CONSIGNE kV / mA 2 2–3 (B) OFF = 2A1 Sm35 instable funcntion
ON ON ON = Iris TV camera disconnected
828 980 G035 (D6/D9)
OR S246 1–4 (A) OFF OFF ON = Buzzer ON in HIGHT QUALITY FL mode
828 980 G045 (LE) 2–3 (B) OFF OFF ON = Buzzer ON in HIGHT QUALITY FL and ER mode
3A19 S76 1–8 (A) OFF OFF ON = Unit without memory
COMMANDE SCR 2 2–7 (B) OFF OFF ON = RAD Exposure not autorised from Footswitch
3–6 (C) OFF OFF ON = RAD Exposure autorised from RAD?FL handswitch
828 982 G025 4–5 (D) OFF OFF ON = RAD Exposure not autorised from consol PB
3A26 S528 1–4 (A) OFF OFF ON = RAD Exposure at reduced power
CHAUFFAGE FILA- 2–3 (B) OFF OFF ON = Used only in calibration procedure (reduced ma)
MENTS 4 829357G035
X = position indifférente
6 . 165

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
xvi. 6 . 166
Blank page
6 . 166

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
xvi. 6 . 167
6–5–5 DAP R/G SHEET
6 . 167

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

Purpose: CALIBRATION DOSE AREA PRODUCT Version No.: 00
METER. Date: September 1996
Time: Manpower:
SECTION 1
PROCEDURE.
1.1 Calibration
The principle of Model 841–SO calibration is shown in Illustration 1 . A and 1 . C show the importance
of correct offset adjustment prior to calibration.
This can be confirmed after the warm up period by ensuring the display remains at zero for 30 minutes
following pressing the reset button. If this is not the case please refer to the positive offset adjustment
procedure in the service section of this manual. The test for negative drift requires the test button to be
pressed and the result noted. The display can then be reset. After 30 minutes press the test button again, the
reading should be no lower than 5 digits compared with the recorded reading. If it is, refer to the negative
offset adjustment procedure in the service section of this manual.
The process of calibration is illustrated in diagrams 1 . E and 1 . F. The transfer function between the
reference measurement and the indication on the Model 841–SO will be a straight line as the instrument is
inherently linear over a 400,000:1 dynamic range. Assuming the offset adjustment is correct, calibration
involves adjustment of a scaling factor within the Model 841–SO to obtain correspondence between the
reference instrument and the DAP display. Therefore a single dose rate measurement is all that is required to
achieve the correct calibration as indicated in diagram 1 . F.
1.1.1 Some Useful Information Related to Calibration.
Energy Response.
Inspection of the specification will confirm the Model 841–SO chamber has a flat energy response from
50kVp to l50kVp to within 3 %. Calibration can therefore be carried out at any energy and 80kVp has been
selected. However, this is not the case when the energy response is modified by absorbing or scattering
material within the beam path. In these circumstances it is recommended that calibration is carried out at the
most frequently used energy or the average energy used. After completing a calibration it is wise to repeat
the measurement at several energies to ensure variation of DAP readings are within expected tolerances.
Dose Rate Used.
It has been stated that the Model 841–SO chamber has a linear response with dose rate, nevertheless it is
advisable to use a total dose and dose rate towards the upper limit of expected values for the calibration.
6 . 168

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Units.
This model displays mGycm2 only.

cGycm2 can be obtained by10 dividing by 10. This is also the factor used for Rcm2
ILLUSTRATION 1
calibration and offset graphs.
ILLUSTRATION 1 . A ILLUSTRATION 1 . B
Display Display
Positive offset
Error due to corrected following
positive adjustment
offset procedure
Actual Actual
ILLUSTRATION 1 . C ILLUSTRATION 1 . D
Display Display
Positive offset
positive adjustment
offset procedure
Actual Actual
6 . 169

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
ILLUSTRATION 1 . E ILLUSTRATION 1 . F
Display Display
Positive offset
positive adjustment
offset procedure
Actual Actual
1.2 Calibration Procedure.
The aim of calibration is to equalize the displayed DAP reading to that of a reference instrument located at a
typical patient examination distance as illustrated in Illustration 2. The Model 841–SO is mounted on the
face of the X–ray tube collimator unit. If a couch top or other radiation absorbing obstruction is normally
between the collimator and patient, it should remain in situ during calibration.
A reference chamber must be placed in such a position that it is totally within the radiation beam. To evaluate
this, follow the procedure listed below:
Place a film cassette on the reference dosemeter as shown in Illustration 2. Expose with radiation and process
the film. An image similar to that in Illustration 3 should be visible. From this, confirmation can be obtained
that the reference chamber is now within the radiation beam and the total field size may be measured from the
image on the film.
The collimator is set to give a defined field size at the patient plane (i.e. at the reference dosemeter). If the
field size is for example, 100 cm2) and the reference dosemeter gives a point source reading, (i.e. 1 cm2), the
Model 841–SO DAP reading should be 100 times the reference dosemeter reading. That is to say; the Model
841–SO should display the reference dosemeter reading multiplied by the field area. (Field size is 100 cm2).
Many reference dosemeters present the results in Roentgens (R). To convert to mGycm2 multiply by 8.7.
i.e. DOSE AREA PRODUCT = Reading on reference meter * field area * 8.7.
6 . 170

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
ILLUSTRATION 2
Ref. dose meter with Chamber.

Optional phantom to apply
Backscatter correction (see text).
Casssette with Film to establish

size correction factor.
Couch top or other in

beam absorber (see text).
Set Field size

Typical patient / smaller than DAP
examination distance. Chamber, larger
than Ref. dose
Chamber.
DAP
Chamber
Collimator
All measurement equipment

symmetric to central axis.
X–Ray Tube
6 . 171

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
ILLUSTRATION 3
Field
y Image
Chamber
Image
X–Ray Film
1.3 Calibration Adjustment.
1. Set the X–ray machine to 80 kVp and the field size to 100 cm2 at the reference chamber.
2. Access to the calibration control is gained via hole A of the electronic enclosure cover,
(see below).Illustration 4
6 . 172

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
ILLUSTRATION 4
B A
3. Reset the reference dosemeter and the Model 841–SO, then take an X–ray exposure. Record the result of
the reference dosemeter and the Model 841–SO.
4. Calculate and record the DOSE AREA PRODUCT.
5. Compare the calculated dose area product with the displayed value on the Model 841–SO. Reset the
Model 841–SO. Adjust calibration control using the precision screwdriver provided, anticlockwise to
increase or clockwise to decrease the displayed value. This change will be apparent after the next X–ray
exposure.
6. Repeat sections C & D again until the displayed value on Model 841–SO is equal to, or within, 5 % of the
calculated value. The unit is now calibrated.
7. The unit is now ready for use.
8. Press the ’TEST’ button.
Record the new test number on the TEST RECORD sheet round in Appendix B.
RESET
TEST
6 . 173

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
xvii. 6 . 174
Blank page
6 . 174

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
xvii. 6 . 175
6–5–6 IMAGER R/G SHEETS
6 . 175

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

Purpose: INTERFACE CONTROLS ALIGNMENT Version No.: 00
CHECK. ( IMAGER ) Date: April 1995
Time: Manpower:
SECTION 1
NECESSARY REPLACEMENT
None.
SECTION 2
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

2. Read the safety precautions concerning x–ray systems.

INSTALLED.

PROTECT AGAINST ELECTRONIC DISCHARGES).
SECTION 4
1. Remove the II assembly rear cover.

2. Remove the rack cover.
3. Put the CCD Interface Board on an extension board.
6 . 176

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
Check that the interface signals coming from the Stenoscop reach the II assembly.
5.1 X–Ray ON
1. Connect the multimeter between TP7 (B X–RAY ON) and TP1 (ground).
2. Restore power to the Stenoscop.
3. Check the TP7 voltage: 0 V ±50 mV.
4. Run a fluoroscopy sequence. The voltage in TP7 should shift to +5 V ±50 mV, and the image should
be visible on the monitor.
5.2 CLTV ON
1. Connect the multimeter between TP8 (B CLTV) and TP1 (ground).

2. Check voltages:
– In Manual Mode: 0 V ±50 mV
– In Automatic Mode: +5 V ±50 mV
5.3 PG
1. Connect the multimeter between TP9 (B PG1) and TP1 (ground).

2. Check voltages:
– When idle, or during a fluoroscopy sequence: 0 V ±50 mV
– Rad button pressed: +5 V ±50 mV
5.4
1. Remove power from the II assembly (S1/CCD power supply in OFF position)
2. Replace the CCD Interface Board in the rack.
3. Reset the S1/CCD power supply to the ON position.
SECTION 6
IMAGEUR ALIGNMENT
1. The optical centering adjustments are preset at the factory. Any readjustment should be done only in
case of abnormal functioning. If necessary see ASM Job Card RG 351.
2. Alignment of the Imageur with the longitudinal axis is preset at the factory. In case of a problem, see
Job Card RG 254 of this document.
6 . 177

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
SECTION 7
OPERATIONAL CHECK
7.1 Check of the Imageur Functional Features
1. Check the Dose 1/Dose 2 commutation on the CCD Interface Board by pressing the HLC pushbotton
on the Stenoscop Control Console.
– Dose 1 = DS2 ON,
– Dose 2 = DS3 ON.
2. Check the field controls.
a. Normal.
b. Magnifier 1 (22 cm only).
3. Check the ABD window adjustment: 40% of the usable diameter of the image.
6 . 178

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Blank page
6 . 179

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

Purpose: DOSE ADJUSTMENT. Version No.: 00
Date: April 1995
Time: Manpower:
SECTION 1
NECESSARY REPLACEMENT
None.
SECTION 2
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
D Electronics tool kit + miniature screwdriver (in Emergency Kit).

D Digital multimeter.
D RADCAL Dosimeter 2025AC.
D Ionization chamber 20 x 5 – 60.
D Two copper plates, 175 mm x 175 mm, 1 mm thickness.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Read the safety precautions concerning x–ray systems.

INSTALLED.

SECTION 4
Set Jumper X5 on CCD Interface Board to the Q position.
6 . 180

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1 ABD Signal Offset Adjustment
1. Switch the Stenoscop to Normal Mode.

2. Connect the multimeter between TP1 and TP7, on the CCD Video Board.
3. Check the displayed voltage, without x–rays: 0 V +20/–20 mV.
4. If necessary, adjust to required value using R13/CCD Video Board.
5.2 Dose Adjustment
5.2.1 Preliminary Observations
D The Imageur 16/22 Stenoscop CCD can operate at two different dose rates (Dose 1 and Dose 2),
corresponding to the two positions of the Iris (Iris 1 and Iris 2, respectively).
D The Imageur CCD is preset in the factory for the following dose rates:
TABLE 1
ÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
II input dose
ÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
In front of the grid
ÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Nominal FOV 22 cm 16 cm
Image
ÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑ ÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
1.8 3.4 +/– 10 % mR/mn Intensifier
ÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑ ÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Dose 1
ÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
15.4 29.3 +/– 10 % micro Gy/mn
Behind the grid
ÑÑÑÑÑ
“ low “
ÑÑÑÑÑÑ
29.6
ÑÑÑÑÑÑ
56.3
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
+/– 10 % micro R/s
Grid
ÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
0.3 0.5 +/– 10 % micro Gy/s
In front of the grid
ÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
3.5 6.8 +/– 10 % mR/mn
ÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Dose 2
ÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
“ high “
30.5
58.5
58.7
112.5
+/– 10 % micro Gy/mn
+/– 10 % micro R/s
ÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ 0.5 1.0 +/– 10 % micro Gy/s
5.2.2 Dose 2 Adjustment (high dose)
This adjustment is made by adjusting the aperture of Iris 2.
1. Select Dose 2 (high dose) on the Stenoscop.
6 . 181

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
2. Place a 2 mm copper attenuation filter on the diaphragm.

3. Place the dosimeter ionization chamber on the Imageur entry window.
4. In Automatic Fluoroscopy, check the voltage between TP1 and TP7 on the CCD Video Board. This
voltage must be equal to 2.1 V. If necessary, readjust it. See Job Card RG 211 .
5. In Manual Fluoroscopy, adjust the fluoroscopy constants so as to obtain the specified Dose 2 dose
rate at the Imageur entry. The kV value must be as close to 75 kV as possible.
6. Check the voltage between TP1 and TP7 on the CCD Video Board. When the desired
Dose 2 value has been reached, this voltage should be equal to 2.1 V ±50 mV.
If not, Iris 2 (corresponding to Dose 2) must be readjusted.
7. Run a fluoroscopy sequence under conditions to obtain the specified Dose 2 dose rate.
8. Adjust the R11/CCD Interface Board so that the voltage between TP1 and TP7, on the CCD Video
Board, is equal to 2.1 V ±50 mV.
5.2.3 Dose 1 Adjustment (low dose)
Select Dose 1 (low dose) on the Stenoscop.
1. In manual fluoroscopy, adjust the fluoroscopy constants so as to obtain the specified Dose 1 dose rate
at the Imageur entry. The kV value must be as close to 75 kV as possible.
2. Check the voltage between TP1 and TP7 on the CCD Video Board. When the desired
Dose 1 value has been reached, this voltage should be 2.1 V ±50 mV. If not, Iris 1 (corresponding to
Dose 1) must be readjusted.
3. Run a fluoroscopy sequence under conditions to obtain the specified Dose 1 dose rate.
4. Adjust the R10/CCD Interface Board so that the voltage between TP1 and TP7, on the CCD Video
Board, is 2.1 V ±50 mV.
Note: Regardless of the values of the doses adjusted, the following must always be true:
Dose 1 < Dose 2 (low dose < high dose).
5.2.4 Check
1. Select Dose 2 (high dose) on the Stenoscop.

2. Check the adjustment of Paragraph 5.2.2. (The Iris must make at least one round trip for the iris to be
precisely adjusted.)
Note: On the Imageur 16/22 CCD the third position of the Iris, for Graphic Mode, is never used.
6 . 182

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Blank page
6 . 183

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

Purpose: “X–RAY ON “ DELAY ADJUSTMENT. Version No.: 00
Date: April 1995
Time: Manpower:
SECTION 1
REPLACEMENT
None.
SECTION 2
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED

D Oscilloscope.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

INSTALLED.

SECTION 4
None.
6 . 184

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
Note: In order to avoid oscillations when starting the fluoroscopy sequence, the automatic mode begins
only after an adjustable time delay has elapsed.
This delay is preset in the factory at 750 ms.
TP7/CCD Interface Board
X–RAY ON
X–RAY ON DELAY (Adjusted by R12 / CCD Video Board ).
AGC VALID
TP10/CCD Video Interface Board
6 . 185

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

Purpose: BLACK LEVEL THRESHOLD ADJUSTMENT. Version No.: 00
Date: April 1995
Time: Manpower:
SECTION 1
REPLACEMENT
None.
SECTION 2
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

INSTALLED.

SECTION 4
None.
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
1. Switch the Stenoscop to Automatic Mode.

2. Place a 2–mm copper attenuation filter on the diaphragm.
3. Switch on the ABD window display by setting X8 to S on the CCD Video Board.
4. Run a fluoroscopy sequence in Automatic Mode (with a kV value as close to 75 kV as possible).
5. Close the collimator opaque blades to obtain the image in Illustration 1.
6 . 186

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
ILLUSTRATION 1
ABD Window
Opaque shutters
6. Adjust R11, on the CCD Video Board, to blank the shutters on the image.
The image should become:
ILLUSTRATION 2
This adjustment must be made with great care: R11 must be set so that the
CAUTION shutters are on the limit of disappearing.
This adjustment must be made with the opaque blades.
7. Set X8 back to R on the CCD Video Board.

Note: Shutter correction is only active in Automatic Mode.
If the shutters do not disappear, check that the CLTV ON signal is correctly transmitted to the
Imageur (Job Card RG 250 Section 5).
6 . 187

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Blank page
6 . 188

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Purpose: II ASSEMBLY ALIGNMENT WITH Version No.: 00

LONGITUDINAL AXIS. Date: April 1995
Time: Manpower:
SECTION 1
REPLACEMENT
None.
SECTION 2
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
D Electronics tool kit.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SECTION 4
None.
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
Note: This operation is normally done at the factory and should be redone only if an abnormallity is
detected.
1. Remove the cover from the optical unit.
2. Loosen the three attachment screws securing the lens support to the II tube.
3. Adjust the direction of the image by turning the lens support. At the same time, check that the image
is correctly centered in the circular blanking window.
4. Retighten the three attachment screws of the lens support.
5. Put the the cover back in place on the optical unit.
6 . 189

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Purpose: VIDEO SIGNAL LEVEL CHECK. Version No.: 00

Date: April 1995
Time: Manpower:
SECTION 1
REPLACEMENT
None.
SECTION 2
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED

D Oscilloscope, 20 MHz minimum bandwidth.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

INSTALLED.

SECTION 4
None.
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
1. Connect an oscilloscope probe to TP3, on the CCD Video Board (video output).
2. Place a 2–mm copper attenuation filter on the diaphragm.
3. Run a fluoroscopy sequence in Automatic Mode under nominal conditions. Check the appearance of
the video signal at TP3/CCD Video Board, in Automatic Mode and Manual Mode (see Ill. 1).
6 . 190

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
ILLUSTRATION 1
A = 300 ±20 mV
B = 50 ±5 mV
C = 250 ±20 mV
C
TP3
CCD Video Board Black level
B
Blanking level
Under nominal conditions, the average video levels at various points in the Imageur are (see Ill. 2):
D TP2/CCD Video Board CCD module output D = 100 mV ±5 mV

D TP7/CCD Video Board ABD output = +2.1 V ±50 mV
ILLUSTRATION 2
TP2
CCD Video Board D
Controls with test signal
5.1 The Imageur Steno CCD is equipped with a video test signal generator, which, if necessary, provides
a standard signal that can be used to make all video adjustments.
6 . 191

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
ILLUSTRATION 3
TP3 C = 250 mV
CCD Video Board C
B = 50 mV
B
A = 300 mV
A
To use the test signal generator:
1. Disconnect the plug at J2/CCD Video Board (video input).

2. On the CCD Video Board, set X1 in the B position.
– The test signal is injected at the CCD Video Board input. Test signal intensity
can be adjusted with R10/CCD Video Board (100 mV nominal).
– Remember to reset X1 to A on CCD Video Board once the checks are completed
and to reconnect the plug at J2/CCD Video Board.
5.2 Do not readjust the video settings (gain, offset, black level, gamma, etc.), except if there is a fault.
These adjustments are made at the factory with specialized tooling.
5.3 The operating conditions which enable the gamma correction adjustments are:
Video in at TP2/CCD Video Board: 1 V ±20 mV (D according to Ill. 2)
Video out at TP3/CCD Video Board: 640 mV ±10 mV (C according to Ill. 1)
6 . 192

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

Purpose: PERIODIC DOSE CHECK. Version No.: 00
Date: April 1995
Time: Manpower:
SECTION 1
REPLACEMENT
None.
SECTION 2
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
D Standard Field Engineers toolcase.

D Two copper plates 175 x 175 mm, 1 mm thick.
D Dosimeter, Radcal 2025 AC.
D Ionization chamber 20 x 5 – 60.
D Digital multimeter.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Observe the safety precautions concerning x–ray systems.

INSTALLED.

SECTION 4
None.
6 . 193

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1 Dose Check
Measure the dose in Automatic Mode under norminal conditions (75 kV, 2 mm copper).
If the dose measured is within the allowable tolerence (nominal dose +20%/–0%), the procedure is complete.
If the dose has increased to above 20%, the II tube conversion factor has decreased significantly since the
previous check. Modify the iris aperture as described below.
5.2 Procedure
Preliminary: Check the offset and the ABD gain, with the test signal:
1. On the CCD Video board, disconnect the plug at J2.

2. Check the offset between TPI and TP7 on the CCD Video board: 0 "20 mv. If not repeat the offset
adjustment (refer to job Card RG 250, para 5.1)
3. On the CCD Video board, set X1 in the B position check the level of the input test signal:
Connect a probe of oscilloscope between TP1 and TP2/CCD VIDEO. The level A must be:
A = 100 "5 mv
If necessary, use R10/CCD VIDEO to adjust.
4. Check the ABD level between TPI and TP7 on the CCD Video board : 2.1 v "20 mv. If not repeat the
gain adjustement using R6/CCD Video board, so as to obtain the required value.
5. Set X1/CCD Video in the A position and reconnect the plug at J2/CCD Video.
6. Connect a multimeter between TP1 and TP7 on the CCD Video Board.
7. Select Manual Mode on the generator.
8. Open Iris 2 to maximum by rotating R11 on the CCD Interface Board fully cw.
9. Without making an exposure, check that the voltage between TP1 and TP7 on the CCD Video Board
is 0 V "20 mv. If not repeat the offset adjustment (refer to Job Card RG 250, Para 5.1).
10. Under nominal conditions (75 kV, 2–mm copper), adjust the mA value to obtain nominal Dose 2.
6 . 194

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
11. Read the voltage between TP1 and TP7 on the CCD Video Board under these conditions. Three
situations may arise:
a. Voltage exceeds 4.2 V
The value read shows by how much the conversion factor is above the minimum value (2.1 V) to
provide nominal illumination for the CCD sensor when the iris is open.
The value represents the iris aperture margin. For example, a voltage of 6.3 V indicates that the
conversion factor could still decrease by a factor of 3 before the iris must be opened.
Adjust Iris 2 followed by Iris 1 (refer to Job Card RG 250).
b. Voltage between 2.1 V and 4.2 V

Remove the cover of the CCD lens assembly (see illustration 1)
Remove the label glued on the printed board IC 301 (PLCC 64 pins) of the Sony module and note
the reference written on this circuit.
Depending of the CCD module reference (label glued on the copper side), make the following
operations:
CCD Module
Reference 2105601 2105601–2
IC 301 Reference 2105603 2105601–3
The imager can work in Dose 2 (High
Dose), but not in Dose 1 (Low Dose).
Adjust R11 on CCD INTERFACE board
to get .1V between TP1 and TP7 on CCD
Video board.
CXD 1261 R Turn R12 fully CW on CCD INTER- N.A.
FACE board.
Iris 1 (low dose) will be completely
opened.
II tube exchange can be displayed but
must be forecasted.
Replace the CCD Tandem (Compact The imager can work in Dose 2 (High
Optics). Dose), but not in Dose 1 (Low Dose).
See ASM 2124131–100 DR004 Adjust R11 on CCD INTERFACE board
(*) to get 2.1V between TP1 and TP7 on
CCD Video board.
CXD 1261 AR Turn R12 fully CW on CCD INTER-
FACE board.
Iris 1 (low dose) will be completely
opened.
II tube exchange can be displayed but
must be forecasted.
(*) This CCD tandem exchange allows to retrieve a x2 factor on the light sensitivity as the spare
parts are equipped with CCD module having a sensibility twice higher.
6 . 195

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
c. Voltage less than 2.1 V

Remove the cover of the CCD lens assembly (see illustration 1)
Remove the label glued on the printed board IC 301 (PLCC 64 pins) of the Sony module and note
and record the reference written on this circuit.
Depending of the CCD module reference (label glued on the copper side), make the following
operations:
CCD Module
Reference 2105603 2105601–2
IC 301 Reference 2105601 2105601–3
Change II tube.
CXD 1261 R See ASM 2124131–100 DR 002 N.A.
– If the voltage is lower than 1.01V:

Chanhe II tube (See ASM
2124131–100 DR002) and the CCD
Tandem (Compact Optics – See ASM
DR004)
– If the voltage is comprised between Change II tube.
CXD 1261 AR
1.05V and 2.1V: See ASM 2124131–100 DR 002
Change the CCD Tandem (Compact
OPtics – See ASM DR004) and forcast
the II replacement Status is like w b
when the CCD Tandem has been
replaced.
(*)
(*) This CCD tandem exchange allows to retrieve a x2 factor on the light sensitivity as the spare
parts are equipped with CCD module having a sensibility twice higher.
6 . 196

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
ILLUSTRATION 1
CCD Tandem Module CCD
NOTE: The module CCD reference IC 301

(label glued copper side). NOTE: IC 301 reference
removing the label from the chip.
6 . 197

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
xx. 6 . 198
Blank page
6 . 198

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
xviii– 6 . 199
6–5–7 MONITOR R/G SHEETS
6 . 199

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

Purpose: MONITOR ADJUSTMENT IN 100 HZ. Version No.: 00
Date: June 1996
ILLUSTRATION 1
CARDS LOCATION

4 : Video board
5 : Selection board
ILLUSTRATION 2
PARTIAL REAR VIEW OF MONITOR WITH ADJUSTMENT AND
CONNECTED
6 . 200

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
SECTION 1
TOOLS REQUIRED
Standard tool kit.
Oscilloscope – Multimeter.
SECTION 2
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS



Phisical handling.
6 . 201

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
ILLUSTRATION 3
DEFLECTION BOARD IN PLACE FOR THE
ADJUSTMENTS
6 . 202

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
SECTION 3
PRELIMINARY PRECAUTIONS
Turn the unit off before removing the cover.
SECTION 4
PROCEDURE
D Remove the plastic cover: two screws on the monitor back side.
D Unscrew and remove the metallic top cover (ten screws).
D Remove the screw holding the scanning board and put it in place as showed in illustration 3 for
the adjustment.
D Use a cross–hatch image.
D Set the selector placed on the rear part of the monitor to position 100 Hz. (See ill.2)
D Set the contrast and brightness controls to middle position.
D Darken the light sensor placed on the front part of the monitor.
D Switch on the monitor.
D Drive the monitor with a 100 Hz signal.
6 . 203

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
DEFLECTION BOARD
Location of regulations, Connectors and Test points
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ ÏÏÏÏÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÏÏÏÏ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÏÏÏÏ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Description of the regulations
L4 : Horizontal linearity
R24 : C Vertical linearity 100Hz
R36 : Vertical shift
R41 : Vertical focus
R42 : Vertical frequency 100Hz
R43 : Vertical linearity 100Hz
R60 : Horizontal frequency
R62 : Vertical amplitude 100Hz
R72 : Brightness
R73 : Horizontal focus
R76 : Master focus
R81 : Horizontal phase
R156 : Horizontal blank
6 . 204

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
3.1 Vertical Frequency Adjustment.
Connect a scope to TP9 and adjust trimmer R42

to obtain a sawtooth of 4V amplitude.
3.2 Horizontal Frequency Adjustment.
Connect a multimeter betwen TP19 and TP20 of the

integrated circuit U2 on the deflection board and adjust
R60 to measure 0mV +/-5 mV.
3.3 Vertical Size Adjustment 100 Hz.
Adjust trimmer R62 so that the vertical size measures 270 mm +/–1.5 mm.
3.4 Horizontal Size Adjustment.
Adjust R59 on the Power Supply Board so that the horizontal size measures 337 mm +/–1.5 mm.
3.5 Vertical Linearity Adjustment (100Hz).
Adjust R43 so that the height of the top half of the image equals the height of the bottom
half of the image ( +/– 1.5 mm ).
Adjust R24 so that the size of the rectangles in the center equals the size of the rectangles
in the top and bottom parts of the image.
If necessary set the vertical size to 270 mm with trimmer R62.
Correct the vertical linearity by adjusting trimmer R42.
Repeat the procedure for vertical linearity adjustment.
3.6 HORIZONTAL LINEARITY
With a non–magnetic tool adjust L4 so that the width of the right half of the image equals the width of the left
half of the image ( +/– 2 mm); if necessary set the horizontal size to 337 mm with R59 on the B.T.
power supply board.
3.7 VERTICAL CENTERING
Adjust R36 so that the image is centered vertically inside the monitor bezel.
3.8 HORIZONTAL CENTERING
Adjust R81 so that the image is centered horizontally inside the monitor bezel.
6 . 205

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

Purpose: MONITOR ADJUSTMENT IN 120 HZ. Version No.: 00
Date: June 1996
ILLUSTRATION 1
CARDS LOCATION
Position and cards description

4 : Video board
5 : Selection board
ILLUSTRATION 2
PARTIAL REAR VIEW OF MONITOR WITH ADJUSTMENT AND
CONNECTED
6 . 206

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
SECTION 1
TOOLS REQUIRED
Standard tool kit.
SECTION 2
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS



Phisical handling.
6 . 207

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
ILLUSTRATION 3
DEFLECTION BOARD IN PLACE FOR THE
ADJUSTMENTS
6 . 208

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
SECTION 3
PROCEDURE
D Remove the plastic cover: two screws on the monitor back side.
D Unscrew and remove the metallic top cover (ten screws).
D Remove the screw holding the scanning board and put it in place as showed in illustration 2
for the adjustment.
D Use a cross–hatch image.
D Set the selector placed on the rear part of the monitor to position 120 Hz. (See ill.3)
D Set the contrast and brightness controls to middle position.
D Darken the light sensor placed on the front part of the monitor.
D Switch on the monitor.
D Drive the monitor with a 120 Hz signal.
6 . 209

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
DEFLECTION BOARD
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ ÏÏÏÏÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÏÏÏÏ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÏÏÏÏ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Description of the regulations
L4 : Horizontal linearity
R36 : Vertical shift
R41 : Vertical focus
R60 : Horizontal frequency
R72 : Brightness
R73 : Horizontal focus
R76 : Master focus
R81 : Horizontal phase
6 . 210

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
3.1 Vertical Frequency Adjustment.
Connect a scope to TP9 and adjust R167 to obtain a sawtooth of 4V amplitude.
3.2 Vertical Size Adjustment.
Adjust trimmer R82 so that the vertical size measures 270 mm +/–1.5 mm.
3.3 Vertical Linearity Adjustment (120 Hz).
Adjust R64 so that the height of the top half of the image equals the height of the bottom
half of the image ( +/– 1.5 mm ).
If necessary, use R82 to adjust the vertical size to 270 mm.
Correct the vertical linearity by adjusting trimmer R167.
Repeat the procedure for vertical linearity adjustment.
6 . 211

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

Purpose: MONITOR BRIGHTNESS AND BLANKINK Version No.: 00
ADJUSTMENT. Date: June 1996
TOP VIEW SIDE VIEW
1 : B.T. Power supply 4 : Video board

2 : Deflection board 5 : Selection board
3 : A.T. Power supply 6 : Light sensor board
DEFLECTION BOARD
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÏÏÏÏÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÏÏÏÏ
Î ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
6 . 212

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
SECTION 1
TOOLS REQUIRED
Standard tool kit.
SECTION 2
PRELIMINARY PRECAUTIONS
None.
SECTION 3
PROCEDURE
3.1 BLANKING
Use a cross–hatch image and make sure that the light sensor is not active. Connect a probe to TP109
of the video board and adjust R54 to obtain a square wave with an ON time of about 30 s.
Adjust R156 on the Deflection Board to obtain the correct blanking on the left side of the monitor.
Use R54 to adjust blanking on the right side if necessary.
R19 : Clamp
VIDEO BOARD R29 : Cont.
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
6 . 213

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
DEFLECTION BOARD
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ ÏÏÏÏ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÏÏÏÏ
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
VIDEO BOARD
R19 : Clamp
R29 : Cont.
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
6 . 214

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
3.2 BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST
The BRIGHTNESS and CONTRAST controls are located under a door, on the back of the Monitor.
The controls have been preset when the monitor was installed and should not need to be changed : a light
sensor located on the front of the monitor adjusts the brightness and contrast of the image automatically,
according to the ambient light.
Use a white image with an input level of 250 mV of video signal.

Connect a probe to TP107 of the video board and adjust R19 so that the clamp pulse is 50 mV as the black
level of the video signal.
Connect a probe to TP102 and use R19 to adjust the signal variation to 30 V.
Verify that, when adjusting contrast, the black level does not change, otherwise use R19.
Eliminate the white image and leave only the black level.
Adjust R72 on the deflection board to obtain 9Cd/sqm in darkroom conditions with maximum external
adjustments.
3.3 FOCUS
Display an alphanumeric image with a video signal of 0.7 V and adjust the black part of the image to 0.3 Cd
with the external brightness adjustment; use the contrast control to adjust the white part of the image to about
120 Cd/sqm.
Use R76 to adjust the focus in the center of the image, R41 to adjust the vertical focus and R73 to adjust the
horizontal focus.
Use these three adjustment controls to obtain the best possible focus.
6 . 215

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
xxii. 6 . 216
Blank page
6 . 216

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
xxiii. 6 . 217
6–6 LIST OF USED MEASURING EQUIPMENT.
NOTE : The hereunder given list is only for information.

Measurement devices with equivalent caracteristics can be used.
6–6–1 RADIATION MEASUREMENTS
Manufacturer: Capintec Model 192

Type: Dosimeter
Ionization chamber: PM 30
Perform calibration before each measurement, by using the standard provided with the instrument.
6–6–2 ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS
Type: milliamperemeter
Mfr: Glossen
Mod: PQM3
Scale: 10 mA
Precision: 1.5%
Annual calibration in comparison with a DVM.
Type: Digital voltmeter

Mfr: Norma
Mod: D1216
Scale: 1 kV and 20 V
Precision: 0.2% + 1 digit
Oscilloscope
Mfr: Tektronix
Mod: 564
Precision: 3%
Chronometer
Mfr: Huer
Scale: 30 min.
Precision: 0.2 s
mAs meter
Mfr: Fluke
Mod: 8000A
Scale: 2 – 20 – 200 mAs
Precision: 1%
Annual calibration by the supplier.
Multimeter
Mfr: AVO
Mod: 9 MK11
Scale: 1 mA and 10 mA
Precision: 1%
6 . 217

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Blank page
6 . 218

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
CHAPTER 7 – SCHEMATICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
7–1 IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
7–2 SCHOTTKY DIODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
7–3 LIST OF SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
7–3–1 DESIGNATION OF THE COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
7–4 LIST OF THE ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THE SCHEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7–5 USING THE SCHEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8
7.i

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Blank page
7 . ii

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
7 SCHEMATICS
7.
7.1

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Module 8
Module 2
Module 7 Module 3
Module 6
Module 4
Module 5
Module 1
Module 9
9TR1
7.2

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
7–1 IDENTIFICATION
– The electronic circuits in the mobile intraoperative radiology system are grouped together in the modules identi-
fied as follows:
. module 1 : block (item 1),
. module 2 : control console (item 2),
. module 3 : card rack assembly (item 3),
. module 4 : inverter (item 4),
. module 5 : power supply (item 5),
. module 6 : X–ray head (item 6),
. module 7 : X–ray head, collimator (item 7),
. module 8 : image intensifier and TV camera (item 8),
. module 9 : interface installed on the rear side of the monitor cart (item 9).
Examples:
– the ”kV/ma reference” board in module 3, position 9, is marked 3A9,
– the HV divider board in module 6 is marked 6A1.
– the supply transformer in module 5 is marked 5TR1.
7–2 SCHOTTKY DIODES
Schottky diodes (1N6263), commonly used in the mobile system electronic circuits, are in fact used as ordinary
diodes.
7–3 LIST OF SYMBOLS
7–3–1 DESIGNATION OF THE COMPONENTS
Examples :
. 3A1 :– 3 is module number (give a location information),
– A means PCB (PL for plug, a and b for PCB connector).
– 1 is order number.
. 3A1 R58 : – number 58 resistor which is on 3A1 PCB.
. 4R29 : – number 29 resistor which is in module 4 (not on a PCB).
BP = Pushbutton
C = Capacitor
D = CR = Diode, thyristor or rectifier bridge
DS = Light
E = Test point
F = Fuse
G = Logic circuit
K = Relay
L = Coil
M = Motor
A = OP = Operational amplifier, FET switch voltage regulator
Q = Transistor
R = Resistor
S = SW = Switch
B = TB = Terminal board
T = TR = Transformer
W = Jumper
PL = Plug
7.3

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
7–4 LIST OF THE ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THE SCHEMATICS
ABBREVIATIONS PWB NAME COMMENTS

LOCALISATION
AUTO 3A7–51A Automatic FLUORO mode selection

BP01 3A13–112B Upper blades of collimator : opening control
BP02 3A13–112B Lower blades of collimator : opening control
BPF1 3A13–112B Upper blades of collimator : closing control
BPF2 3A13–112C Lower blades of collimator : closing control
BPmA(s) Up 3A17–66C mA or mAs selection : increase control
BPmA(s) Down 3A7–66C mA or mAs selection : diminution control
BP OFF 3A3–116D Unit switching OFF Push–button
BPCL 2A1–102B Request of X–Ray emission – Fluoro and RAD
2A3–102C
BUS kV/20 3A7–60C 8 bits coded information of kV/20 value
CAG ON/OFF 3A3–119A Gain automatic control switching
CAPA PREPO 3A19–35C Prepositioning of converter capacitors (C3/C4 discharge control)
Consigne mAs 3A7–78E Analog signal of mAs reference for RAD exposure
(mAs integration).
Consigne mA SC 3A9–78B Analog signal of mA reference for the regulation of Fluoro
filament heating.
Consigne kV/20 3A9–97A Analog signal of kV reference for kV regulation
CLIGN 3A12–106A Square wave signal for display lights and intermittent
operation of the buzzer.
CLOCK 3A19–31E Pulse generated by the control oscillator of the mains
thyristors
DEM X 3A12–28D Signal of kV regulation obtained by comparison of
composite kV (actual kV and kV/20 reference)
DETECTION I 3A19–36B Detection of the presence of current through main thyristors.
ER 3A7–66B ELECTRONIC RADIOGRAPHY mode selection
FC01 3A9–76C Minimum value of mA : 0,1 mA
FC0 3A9–76C Minimum value of mAs (RAD mode) : 0,16 mAs
FCGR 3A9–76C Maximum value of mAs (RAD mode) : 160 mAs
FCGR1 3A3–114B Upper collimator blades limit switch : RAD size
FCGR2 3A3–114B Lower collimator blades limit switch : RAD size
FCSC1 3A3–114B Upper collimator blades limit switch : FLUORO size
7.4

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
FCSC2 3A3–114C Lower collimator blades limit switch : FLUORO size

FC40 3A9–91A Minimum kV value (40 kV)
FC110 3A9–91A Maximum kV value
FL 3A7–66C FLUORO mode selection
Fmax 3A19–31D Maximum frequence operation of the converter. Not used
FS 31B X–Ray request from foot switch
GR 3A7–66B RAD mode selection
HLC 2A1–71A High definition fluoro selectionHLC does not refer to ”Hi level
control” operation above 5 or 10 R/min. In both Hi definition
and low dose operation, the entrance exposure rate remains
below 10R/min.
Hold kV 3A1–201E Latching of the kV regulation loop after T1 delay (delay of
automatism kV stabilization)
INT 4 CLQ 3A12–28B Exposure interruption after 4 VHV leakages
kV C0 3A7–57C Counter locking when kV bus is at ”0”
kV 85% 3A12–28C Signal generated when kV reach 85% of selected kV value.
kV 120 3A12–28C Safety : stops the converter if kV value is 120 kV
kV/20 Auto 3A5–45D kV reference in automatic Fluoro mode
kV composite 3A12–23D Actual kV value (VA + VC)
Mesure mA Sc 3A12–20C FLUORO mA measure (1 mA = 1V)
Mesure mA GR 3A12–20C RAD mA measure (10 mA = 1V)
OX 3A19–31A Control the X–RAY emission bistable (through 3A1 PWB when
a memory is used)
OX.HLC 3A3–119F Hold of HLC selection during pulsed Fluoro mode operation.
PRE 3A19–35A Control of mA reference in RAD mode (delayed signal)
PRI 3A19–40B Signal present when current is detected in one of main thyristors.
PRX 3A12–24A Signal present when X–Ray are emitted
PRX.CP 3A12–106B Synchronous signal (50 Hz) with X–Ray emission
RAD 3A19–40A RAD mode selection signal
RP 3A26–81A Reduced power signal in RAD mode when unit is used with the
100, 108 or 120V mains
RX req. 3A12–28C Not used
Sa Th2 MOD 6–16E X–Ray head temperature detection (68[C)Switch ON thermal
overload display
SC 3A17–63A Signal (SC or SC) generated by the RAD or RAD selection.
SEC BELLOW MOD 6 – 16E Safety of X–Ray head temperature
(6Sa1) Bellow compensation switch : inhibition of exposure
7.5

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
SEXP 3A19–35B Control signal of main thyristors oscillator

SP 3A7–66B PULSED FLUORO mode selection
STOP mAs 3A26–85D RAD exposure end signal (elapsed mAs = selected mAs)
SX 3A19–33A X–Ray emission safety (BPCL + PWB presence)
SYX SC 3A19–35A Control signal of heating in FLUORO
Release Fluoro mA reference
SYX GR 3A19–35B Control signal in RAD mode : not used
TROU CLQ 3A12–28A Momentary stop of the control oscillator of the main thyristor
when a VHV leakage occurs
Va 6A1–20C Actual anodic volts value
Vc 6A1–20C Actual cathodic volts value
Z(ZOOM) 3A3–111E ZOOM selection with II 22 cm (2 fields)
0 logic from 3A9–78C mas integrator selection : low or High mAs
0,16 to 5 mAs mAs integrator
4’26” 3A12–103B Warning signal of 4’26” X–Ray emission time
4’57” 3A12–106B Stop signal of X–Ray emission after 4’ 57” of Fluoro sequence
12V CI 15F–18F Detection of the PWB presence Permit the operation of main
thyristors
7.6

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
INTERFACE DSM 3A1 828988 G 035
ACP 201C Anode Cooling Pause : generate a delay between exposures in

ER mode selection if SW602.B is in ON position
HYST 45C not used
MCH 202B Mode change : signal generated during the switching of an
operating mode to an other
ON REST + MCH 203B Reset of the monostable when the unit is switching ON or
during an operating mode switching
OX* 204C RX emission order generated through the adaptation operating
logic network
OX* R1 204D Signal delayed according to the rising edge of the OX* signal but
synchronous with the falling edge of OX*
OX* R2 204D Signal synchronous with the rising edge of the OX* signal but
delayed according to the falling edge of OX*
RAZ ROTATION 206D Rotation to the start position of the monitor rotation coils
when mode A/B is selected in the memory
SN 203F NORMAL FLUORO MODE selection generated by default of
other mode selections
STOP DSM 208D Signal generated by X PERM from the memory
T 114F Signal generated during the field change with a 22 cm (9”)
imager
T1 to T5 Control delays of RX emission sequence in the different
operating mode
T6 202A Control of RX pulses emission in PULSED FLUORO mode.
X PERM 207E Signal from memo unit : availability of the memory or end
of the image processing
7.7

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
7–5 USING THE SCHEMATICS
– The schematics are in flow chart form.

– As much as possible, the relation between control and action has been respected.
– Each signal is indexed and adressed in the schematics.
Example : SEXP signal
The SEXP signal is generated on PCB 3A19 commande SCR2 – output a18 – schematic reference 35B.
The signal is used onPCB 3A12 – input a14
3A5 – input b8
3A3 – input a17
The index of the signal is marked in front of the use terminal
3A12.a14 – 21B
In front of 3A12.a14 terminal, SEXP signal has the index of the terminal where the signal is generated :
3A19.a18–35B
– The wiring between terminal is respected and so permits an easier localization of interconnection default.
7.8

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
SCHEMATICS
SEE AT THE END OF THIS MANUAL
7.9

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Blank page
7 . 10

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
CHAPTER 9 – SPARE PARTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
9–1 STENOSCOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1

CASSETTE HOLDER (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3
STENOSCOP BASE ASM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5
WIRED FRAME ASM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7
6000 / 9000 KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.9

MECHANICAL FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 11
FRAME + C ARM ADAPTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 17
MOUNTED FRAME ASM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 19
CONTROL CONSOLE SUPPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 23
MOBILE COLUMN ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 25
HORIZONTAL ARM ASM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 27
CONTROL CONSOLE ASM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 29
CONTROL PANEL MODULE 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 31
1A1 : ”C ARM” MOTOR PWB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 33
PRINTED WIRED BOARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 35
CARD RACK MODULE #3–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 37
L.V. POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 39
INVERTER – MODULE #4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 41
POWER MODULE #5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 43
6” CCD IMAGER KIT+ COLLIMATOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 45
”C ARM” SUPPORT ASM. ( 6” ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 47
6” COLLIMATOR ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 47
9” CCD IMAGER KIT + COLLIMATOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 49
”C ARM” SUPPORT. ( 9” ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 51
9” COLLIMATOR ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 51
MONITOR CART ASSEMBLY / Basic version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 53
MONITOR CART WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 57

STENO 2 INTERFACE MODULE 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 59
X – RAY HAND SWITCH KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 61
STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 CCD–MDA COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 62
MONITOR CART COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 63
DR4 or MD10 CABLES INTERCONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 64
MDA CABLES INTERCONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 65
M Serie” PLUGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 66
PLUG 62 POSITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 67
O.E.M. REFERENCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 68
9.i

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
9–2 LASER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 70
EXTERNAL LASER AIMING SPARE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 70
INTEGRATED LASER AIMING SPARE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 71
9–3 DOSE AREA PRODUCT METER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 72
DOSE AREA PRODUCT METER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 72
9–4 IMAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 74
IMAGEUR 16/22 FOR STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 CCD–MDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 75
IMAGEUR 16 CCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 77
IMAGEUR 22 CCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 79
BOARD CAGE, CCD STENO, EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 81
EMERGENCY MAINTENANCE KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 83
9–5 MEMORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 86
MDA MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 87
DR4 MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 88
MD10 MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 89
9–6 MONITORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 90
9–7 KITS (MONITOR CART) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 92
MDA MEMORY KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 92
VCR SONY KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 93
FILM REPRO KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 94
PAPER REPRO KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 95
CCM 620 VISIPLEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 96
VISIPLEX SPARE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 97
9 . ii

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
8.8
9.
9 SPARE PARTS
9–1 STENOSCOP
9.1

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
BASE 6000/9000
KIT 6000/9000 CCD
CHASSIS
SERIES 6000 SERIES 9000

KIT IMAGER 16 cm (6”) KIT IMAGER 22 cm (9”)
COLLIMATOR 16 cm (6”) COLLIMATOR 22 cm (9”)
IMAGER 16 cm (6”) IMAGER 22 cm (9”)

50 Hz 50 Hz
IMAGER 16 cm (6”) IMAGER 22 cm (9”)

60 Hz 60 Hz
See chapter 2 § 2–1 BASIC CONFIGURATION – OPTIONS
CASSETTE HOLDER :
24x30 or 9.5”x9.5” or 10”x12” MONITORS CART
OPTIONS
FFD MONITORS
SDR4
SMD10
SMD10 with option key board
Rot. 00 with DR4 or MD10 No rot. with MDA SMDA 200 images storage
options : S2000 images
S4 FPS MEMORIES
S5000 images + 8 FPS
SSoft Measure
SSoft Vascular 1
SSoft Vascular 2
CCM620 Multiformat Camera

60 Hz / 525 L or 50 Hz / 625 L FILM REPRO KIT
1 , 2 or 4 + 1 format
PRINTER SONY UP910

CEI / 220V or UL / 110V
HARD COPY KIT

PRINTER SONY UP890
CEI / 220V
or
PRINTER SONY UP880
UL / 110V
VCR S–VHS SONY

50Hz–625L–220V–CEI–RS232
or VCR KIT
60Hz–525L–110V–UL–RS232
9.2

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : CASSETTE HOLDER ( OPTION )
3 to 8
F
Component Code See also
Description R
number number page
U
001 828 968 P015 Retaining rubber shoe 2
002 823 993 P015 Spring blade 2
003 830 534 G015 24 x 30 Cassette holder – D6 2
004 830 535 G015 9.5” x 9.5” Cassette holder – D6 2
005 830 539 G015 10” x 12” Cassette holder – D6 2
006 830 536 G015 24 x 30 Cassette holder – D9 2
007 830 537 G015 9.5” x 9.5” Cassette holder – D9 2
008 830 540 G015 10” x 12” Cassette holder – D9 2
Valid from serial : AVT :
9.3

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
6
Transportation
lock bar (rod)
9.4

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : STENOSCOP BASE ASM 828 490 G045

Range : 0
Component Code See also F

number number Description R
page
U
002 828 703 G015 WIRED FRAME ASM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 7
004 828 705 G025 COVERS KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 62
006 823 697 P015 TRANSPORT LOCKING ROD 1
013 818 770 P243 FACTORY NAME LABEL
014 818 770 P253 WARNING EXPLOSION LABEL
015 829 540 P015 GUIDING POSITION LABEL
021 828 554 P095 FR / ENG. CLASSIFICATION LABEL
022 828 554 P135 FR / ENG. UNIT TRAVEL LABEL
030 829 431 P015 FUSES LABEL
032 828 554 P115 FR / ENG. MAINS LABEL
033 828 554 P125 ”I /O” LABEL
034 818 770 P213 WARNING EXPLOSION LABEL
042 854 030 P115 EQUIPOTENTIAL WIRE ( L= 5 m )
045 828 794 P015 ” C ARM ”ROTATION STOPS LABEL
047 828 795 P015 CAUTION ( VOLTS ) LABEL
048 853 575 P035 FERRITE 40 X 34
054 830 904 P025 WARNING LABEL
059 818 779 P683 CE LABEL
9.5

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
828 794 P015
32 42
31
818 770 P213
41 33
52
29
22 30
3
19
9
18 B
21
9.6

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : WIRED FRAME ASM 828 703 G015

Range : 1
See also F
Component Code Description R
number number page
U
002 828 702 G015 FRAME+C–ARM ADAPTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 17

003 828 520 G515 X–RAY HEAD ASSEMBLY
004 851 212 P495 HSHC SCREW M 6X30 AC
005 012 851 390 P125 LOCK WASHER M6
006 011 851 380 P125 WASHER M6 AC
007 851 258 P345 MSCPS SCREW M 6X12 AC ( DIN 913 )

008 828 957 P014 PANEL 2 ST2 LABEL
009 828 730 G025 CONTROL PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 31
010 851 212 P475 HSHC SCREW M 6X20 AC
018 824 307 G125 FLAT CABLE 50 PINS 1

019 824 305 G125 FLAT CABLE 34 PINS 1
021 854 038 P095 FEMALE–FEMALE BNC PLUG 1
022 825 374 G035 STENOSCOP 2 FLUORO FOOTSWITCH 1
023 853 052 P225 CABLE CLAMP
024 853 063 P625 NUT PG 9 POLYAMIDE

025 824 241 P024 TERMINAL PROTECTION
028 850 703 P185 FLEXIBLE 4610026 PROTECTION
029 828 964 P013 COLUMN HIGHT SCALE 2
030 828 966 P015 LOCKING INDICATOR 2
031 828 966 P025 WIG–WAG MVT. INDICATOR 2

032 828 966 P035 C–ARM ROTATION INDICATOR 2
033 828 966 P045 FRONT–REAR MVT. INDICATOR 2
035 828 965 P013 C–ARM ANGULATION SCALE 2
036 820 357 P015 BRAKE INDICATOR
037 853 152 P025 ”RED POINT” STICKER

041 829 380 P024 C–ARM HORIZONTAL MVT. INDICATOR 2
042 829 380 P034 C–ARM HORIZONTAL MVT. INDICATOR 2
043 853 062 P675 REUSABLE SELF–LOCKING COLLAR
045 829 381 P015 HORIZONTAL C–ARM MVT. POINTER (GRAY) 2
046 829 381 P025 HORIZONTAL C–ARM MVT. POINTER (RED) 2

048 851 230 P655 SELF TAPPING SCREW M 4X15 AC
049 851 390 P105 LOCK WASHER M 4
050 818 770 P413 ”ELECTRICAL HAZARD” LABEL
051 818 770 P523 ”WARNING” LABEL

052 860 207 P015 MECHANICAL STOP JENATZY 719.11 1
055 851 201 P865 SELF BLOCKING SCREW HH M 6X20
xxiii. 9.7
9.7

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
51
MODULE 3
3 58
60 6
80
101
72
77 99
( 3 versions )
A
A
41
9.8

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : 6000 / 9000 KIT 830 045 G055

Range : 0
F
Component Code See also
Description R
number number page
U
03 see page 9 . 35 INTERFACE DSM PWB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 35

006 see page 9 . 35 kV / mA 2 REFERENCE PWB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 35
018 827 908 G065 MONITOR CART ASM / Basic version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 53
033 831 003 GO15 ANTI GRADIENT ASSEMBLY

041 832 548 P013 BRAKE SHOE 1
046 831 235 P014 LOGO STENO
049 830 942 P023 CONSOLE OVERLAY FR (option) 2
050 830 942 P033 CONSOLE OVERLAY D (option) 2
051 830 942 P043 CONSOLE OVERLAY GB 2

052 830 942 P053 CONSOLE OVERLAY SP (option) 2
053 830 942 P063 CONSOLE OVERLAY IT (option) 2
058 see page 9 . 35 CCD TIMER PWB 3A5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 35
060 see page 9 . 35 CCD COLLIMATOR 2 PWB 3A3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 35

061 831 037 P025 LABEL
062 826 921 P615 STENO 2 6000/9000 CCD. – MDA SERVICE MANUAL GB
063 826 931 P735 STENO OPERATOR MANUAL GB
067 828 701 G025 FRAME ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 19
068 see page 9 . 62 PANEL COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 62

069 830 998 G025 COVERS 6000/9000 CCD MDA KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 62
072 832 226 P023 DRIVING HANDEL 1
073 832 227 P014 LEFT HANDEL FITTING
074 832 283 P014 RIGHT HANDEL FITTING

075 832 284 P015 HANDEL PLATE FITTING
077 832 405 P023 BACK WHEELS TEERING HANDEL 1

078 851 256 P235 MSCPS SCREW M8x8 AC
080 828 626 P033 HANDEL 1
081 851 222 P295 CSH SCREW M10x30 AC
082 851 212 P535 HSHC SCREW M6x50 AC
083 851 212 P475 HSHC SCREW M6x20 AC

084 851 390 P125 LOCK WASHER M6
085 832 333 P015 STEERING HANDEL SPACER
086 851 539 P445 STOPGAP Ø 15/20
098 829 585 P015 COLLIMATOR COVER RING WITH THREAD 2
099 827 082 P015 SPACER WITHOUT LASER AND DAP 1

2 185 090 SPACER FOR DAP AND INTEGRATED LASER (SHORT) 1
2 185 091 SPACER WITH INTEGRATED LASER WITHOUT DAP (LONG) 1
101 828 750 G035 CCD CONSOLE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 29 1

102 832 414 G015 COLUMN COVER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 62 2
103 832 478 G015 COUNTERWEIGHT KIT
104 828 955 G615 MONITOR CART CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 62 1
107 832 137 P021 MONITOR CART REAR COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 63 2
9.9

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
32 – 33 37 2 39 – 40 38 32 – 33
39 – 40
29 – 30
32 – 33
26
25
20
24
20 23
21
75 –76
71 71 70
9 . 10

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : MECHANICAL FRAME 828 710 G035

Range : 2
F
Component Code R
Description
number number U
002 828 719 G045 WELDED FRAME
004 832 182 G025 REAR WHEEL FORK
005 023 851 784 P275 BEARING 2B 47/20x20.6
006 024 851 835 P205 RETAINING RING 47 MM
007 832 193 P015 LINKING FRAME SHAFT
008 027 851 830 P165 RETAINING RING 20 MM

009 832 194 P015 PUSHING ROD 2
010 800 555 P144 SPRING 15x22
011 851 835 P075 RETAINING RING 19 MM
012 052 93 851 390 P105 LOCK WASHER FOR Ø 4 SCREW
013 102 851 213 P065 HSHC SCREW M8 x 16
014 851 389 P135 WASHER Ø 8 DIN 6798

017 861 376 P014 WHEEL NERVIANI Ø 125 x 30 1
018 832 336 P015 BUSHING
019 832 204 P015 WHEEL SHAFT
021 832 566 G515 BACK PUSH CABLES 1
022 832 508 P015 CAPLUG

025 832 017 P015 REAR SPROCKET
026 832 554 G015 REAR SPROCKET SHAFT ASSEMBLY
073 081 851 256 P045 MSCPS SCREW M 6X10 AC
029 861 368 P015 RETURN SPROCKET 15 TEETH

032 832 243 P025 CHAIN GUIDE
033 851 212 P265 COUNTERSUNK SCREW M5 x 16 AC
037 832 337 P015 CHAIN 3 / 8 ” 69 LINKS 2
038 832 337 P025 CHAIN 3 / 8 ” 195 LINKS 2
039 832 338 P015 COUPLING LINK 3/8“ 2

040 832 314 G015 CHAIN TIGHTENER ASM 1
041 860 825 P015 SPRING STOP A303–12 NLM 1
042 851 350 P555 M12 LOCK NUT
045 831 081 G045 RIGHT SHAFT ASM
046 831 081 G035 LEFT SHAFT ASM

047 831 015 P015 BUSHING 2
048 861 379 P015 BRAKE CAM 2
049 851 212 P045 MSCPS SCREW M 4X10 AC
050 832 497 P015 WHEEL SHAFT BEARING
051 851 212 P065 HSHC SCREW M4 x 16

052 93 851 390 P105 LOCK WASHER FOR Ø 4 SCREW
053 94 851 380 P105 WASHER FOR M4 SCREW
054 851 390 P125 LOCK WASHER FOR Ø 6 SCREW
055 851 383 P315 WASHER Ø 6.4 / 18
056 851 212 P445 HSHC SCREW M6 x 10 AC
Valid from serial : AVT 8102:
9 . 11

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
55–56 47 47 50–51–52–53
46 45
57–58–59 57–58–59
60
61
83–84 81–82 80 79 62–63–64 83–84
49
48
9–10 11
41– 42 6
5
8
91–92–93–94
19
20
18
17
102–103
97
100–101
Front push cables ASM
832 565 G015
9 . 12

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

Range : 2
F
Component Code R
number number Description
U
057 831 014 P015 SHAFT 2

058 063 068 851 352 P245 M8 SAFETY NUT
059 064 069

076 851 380 P135 WASHER FOR M8 SCREW
060 831 083 G025 WELDED PUSHING ROD
061 831 009 P044 PUSHING ROD

062 831 016 P025 BRACKET
067 831 006 G015 FOOT BRAKE WELDED PUSHING ROD 2
070 832 351 G025 FOOT BRAKE PEDAL 2
071 831 015 P015 BUSHING
072 080 851 650 P475 PARALLEL KEY 4X4X18

074 082 851 256 P025 MSCPS SCREW M6X6 AC
075 101 851 352 P035 M8 SAFETY NUT
079 831 011 P014 SHAFT 2
083 831 012 P015 COVER
084 851 221 P045 COUNTERSUNK SCREW M4 x 10 AC

087 851 201 P515 HH SCREW M8X40 AC
088 851 350 P535 M8 LOCK NUT
091 861 369 P014 REAR WHEEL BRAKE 1
092 851 212 P045 HSHC SCREW M4 x 10
097 832 563 G015 FREE WHEEL 1

100 851 201 P575 HH SCREW M8X75 AC
103 851 390 P135 LOCK WASHER M8
109 811 512 P084 SHAFT 1
110 851 380 P155 WASHER M12
111 851 830 P105 RETAINING RING FOR 12MM SHAFT

113 828 612 P014 DRIVING SHAFT 1
114 828 614 P015 ROLLER SHAFT 1
115 851 726 P055 BEARING RAT 17 1
116 851 201 P265 HH SCREW M6X16 AC
117 125 142 851 390 P125 LOCK WASHER M6

118 143 851 380 P125 WASHER M6
119 851 350 P125 SCREW M6 AC
120 824 002 P015 PULLEY 14 TEETH 1
121 851 650 P255 PARALLEL KEY 3X3X14
122 135 851 255 P235 MSCPS SCREW M4X6 AC

123 861 381 P013 GEARMOTOR DOGA Ø 60 1
124 851 201 P245 HH SCREW M6X10 AC
126 829 564 P015 MOTOR FIXING PLATE
127 851 367 P075 CAPTIVE NUT C–4844C
128 851 212 P065 HSHC SCREW M4X16 AC
xxiv. 9 . 13
Valid from serial : AVT 8102 :
9 . 13

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
115–116–117
133
113
134
135
136
114
114
115–116–117
110 115–116–117
111
125
1411
120 421
121 431
122 441
132 45
ÎÎ
ÏÏ
Ï Î
ÏÏ
ÎÎ
ÏÏ ÏÏ
131
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÏÏ ÏÏ 127–128–129–130
123–124–125 87–88
127–128–129–130
68–69
67 72–73–74
9 . 14

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

Range : 2
F
number number U
130 851 383 P295 WASHER 4,3X12X1

131 832 020 P013 MOTOR SUPPORT
132 832 437 P015 DOGA MOTOR BUSHING
133 824 002 P025 PULLEY 16 TEETH 1
134 851 655 P045 DISK KEY 3X3,7
136 851 677 P085 TIMING BELT 450H050 1

140 853 152 P075 GROUND LABEL
141 854 030 P125 EQUIPOTENTIAL WIRING PLUG
144 851 355 P125 SCREW M6 LT
145 829 378 G015 GROUNDING WIRE
9 . 15

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
16,22
11
5
9 . 16

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : FRAME + C ARM ADAPTATION 828702 G015

Range : 2
F
number number U
003 828 720 G055 BEARING SUPPORT 1

004 828 720 G065 BEARING SUPPORT 1
005 851 444 P025 SPRING PIN 5X12 AC
006 851 213 P065 HSHC SCREW M8X16 AC
007 851 213 P085 HSHC SCREW M8X25 AC

008 851 380 P135 WASHER M8
009 033 851 390 P135 LOCK WASHER M8
011 828 953 G585 X–RAY HEAD CONTROL CABLE
014 825 369 G035 DIVIDER CABLE UL 1
016 828 439 G025 C–ARM CABLE CLAMP KIT 1

018 851 212 P475 HSHC SCREW M6X20 AC
019 851 390 P125 LOCK WASHER M6
020 851 212 P055 HSHC SCREW M4X12 AC
021 851 390 P105 LOCK WASHER M4
022 828 453 P013 C–ARM JOINT 1

023 829 872 P013 COLLIMATOR COVER JOINT 1
026 829 367 G015 C–ARM GROUND WIRE
028 854 006 P245 CONNECTOR ASM
030 829 578 P015 SHAFT 2
034 851 213 P105 HSHC SCREW M8X35 AC

038 851 255 P445 MSCPS SCREW M5X8 AC
039 850 696 P015 POLYURETHANE FOAM 500X100X15
044 829 988 G015 EARTH BRAID

046 831 020 P015 C–ARM ROTATION SCALE 2
047 830 988 P014 C–ARM ROTATION DISK
048 851 255 P235 MSCPS SCREW M4X6 AC
xxv. 9 . 17
9 . 17

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
075
072
093 073
094 074
095 075
096
097
05 098
041
006
007
008
009
036
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
055
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
062
025
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
034
033
019 Î 035
036
020
021
022
023
018 Safety device detail

017
060 059 059 057 056 060
9 . 18

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : MOUNTED FRAME ASM 828 701 G025

Range : 3
See also F
Component Code R
number number Description page
U
002 828 710 G035 MECHANICAL FRAME ASM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 13

005 828 713 G025 FRAME ASM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 23
006 851 213 P095 HSHC SCREW M8X30 AC
007 051 851 380 P135 WASHER M8
008 046 851 390 P135 LOCK WASHER M8
009 851 367 P285 CAPTIVE NUT C4808–B–M8
017 851 440 P505 SPRING PIN Ø 3 x 36 AC 1

018 832 287 P014 LOWER UNIVERSAL JOINT
019 832 286 P015 UPPER UNIVERSAL JOINT
020 832 290 P015 MALE PART
021 832 291 P015 FEMALE PART
022 851 212 P455 HSHC SCREW M 6X12 AC

023 851 390 P115 LOCK WASHER M5
025 851 847 P145 STOP RING 12
033 823 514 P015 ECCENTRIC SHAFT
034 851 815 P015 ROLLER DIAM. 10/32X9
035 851 830 P085 CIRCLIP DIN 471 for 10 MM SHAFT

036 851 255 P445 MSCPS CREW M5X8 AC
041 832 524 G015 MOBILE COLUMN ASM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 25 2
042 823 876 P015 VERTICAL BUMPER SUPPORT 2
043 831 528 P015 COLUMN MECHANICAL STOP
045 851 213 P065 HSHC SCREW M8X16 AC

049 823 870 P014 SAFETY DEVICE LEVER 2
050 811 512 P164 SHAFT DIAM. 8H9 1
052 851 830 P065 SPRING CIRCLIP DIN 471 for 8 MM SHAFT
055 823 872 P015 SAFETY DEVICE 1

056 811 512 P084 SHAFT DIAM.12 1
057 851 848 P575 STOP WASHER DIAM. 12 MM
058 851 380 P155 WASHER M12
059 851 382 P445 CALIBRATED SPRING WASHER 12,5/16/1
060 851 830 P105 CIRCLIP DIN 471 for 12 MM SHAFT

061 811 502 P085 THREADED ROD M4
062 851 370 P065 WELL NUT B832 M4
063 817 170 P015 SPRING 1
064 817 181 P016 FASTENER
065 851 350 P135 NUT M8 AC
xxvi. 9 . 19
9 . 19

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
064
061
069
086
070–071 087
088
089
049 090
063
050–051–052
062
Î
ÏÏ
ÏÎ ÏÏÏ
Î
Ï ÏÏÏ
ÏÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÏÏÏ
Ï ÏÏÏ
042
087
043 088
089
044–045–046
9 . 20

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : MOUNTED FRAME ASM 828701 G025

Range : 3
See also F
Component Code R
number number Description page
U
069 860 953 P014 GAS SPRING 1

070 811 512 P164 SHAFT DIAM. 8H9 1
071 851 830 P065 SPRING CIRCLIP DIN 471 for 8 MM SHAFT
072 851 201 P525 HH SCREW M8X45 AC
073 851 380 P135 WASHER M8
074 851 390 P135 LOCK WASHER M8

075 851 352 P035 SAFETY NUT M8 AC
081 832 423 G015 HORIZONTAL ARM ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 27 1
082 851 212 P325 HSHC SCREW M5X45 AC
083 851 390 P115 LOCK WASHER M5
084 829 741 P015 HORIZONTAL ARM BUMPER 1

085 832 238 P012 CHAIN COVER
086 851 367 P045 CAPTIVE NUT C4844–M8
087 851 390 P105 LOCK WASHER M4
088 851 383 P305 WASHER Ø 5,3/15/1,5
089 851 212 P045 HSHC SCREW M4X10 AC

090 829 376 P014 CABLES FITTING
093 851 212 P475 HSHC SCREW M6X20 AC
094 851 383 P065 WASHER Ø 6,5/27 AC
095 851 380 P125 WASHER M6
096 851 350 P135 NUT M8 AC

097 851 390 P125 LOCK WASHER M6
098 851 350 P125 NUT M6 AC
9 . 21

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
017
018
004
View AB
009
007
Respect the pin 008

orientation. 005
006
9 . 22

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : CONTROL CONSOLE SUPPORT 828 713 G025

Range : 4
F
Component Code R
number number Description
U
004 824 260 P051 CONSOLE SUPPORT

005 832 015 P014 STEERING HANDLE SHAFT
006 832 288 P015 STEERING HANDLE BUSHING
007 851 444 P165 SPRING PIN 6X28 AC
008 851 444 P585 PIN 4X24 AC
009 851 256 P075 HSHC SCREW M6X20 AC

017 851 258 P365 HSHC SCREW M6X35 AC
018 851 350 P125 NUT M6 AC
xxvii. 9 . 23
9 . 23

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
16
19 24
9
12
13
11
29 20 22
17
23
2
4
9 . 24

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : MOBILE COLUMN ASSEMBLY 832 524 G015

Range : 4
See also F
number number page
U
002 828 718 G025 WELDED MOBILE COLUMN 2
004 828 529 P014 SAFETY DEVICE PLATE
008 823 701 G035 WELDED WIG–WAG SHAFT 2
009 851 595 P325 BUSHING GLACIER 1
011 832 028 P013 COLLAR 2
012 832 040 P015 SETTING SCREW 1
013 851 350 P155 M12 NUT
016 823 515 P043 BEARING SUPPORT
017 851 222 P085 HSFH SCREW M8X25 AC
019 823 512 P015 HORIZONTAL ARM SHAFT 1
020 823 514 P015 ECCENTRIC SHAFT 1
022 851 815 P015 ROLLER DIAM.10/32X9 1
023 851 830 P085 SPRING CIRCLIP DIN 471 / 10 MM 1
024 851 255 P445 HSH SCREW M5X8 AC
029 828 739 P015 SHAFT
xxviii. 9 . 25
9 . 25

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
11–12
14 2
9
13
18
17 21
4 3–5
7
16
8
19
10 20
15
9 . 26

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : HORIZONTAL ARM ASM 832 423 G515

Range : 4
Component Code See also F

number number Description page R
U
002 832 420 P012 HORIZONTAL ARM
003 851 222 P115 HSHC SCREW M 5X45 AC
004 829 741 P015 HORIZONTAL ARM BUMPER
005 851 390 P115 LOCK WASHER M5
006 832 028 P013 C–ARM LOCKING COLLAR
007 832 418 P015 ANGLE–IRON FOR COLLAR FIXATION
008 851 213 P065 HSHC SCREW M 8X16 AC
009 828 313 P035 STOP
010 832 424 G015 C–ARM SUPPORT SHAFT
011 851 211 P345 HSHC SCREW M6X10 AC
012 851 390 P125 LOCK WASHER M6
013 829 635 P015 STOP SCREW
014 851 830 P225 CIRCLIP DIN 471 / 50 MM RE
015 832 040 P015 THREADED ROD FOR COLLAR
016 851 448 P185 GROOVED PIN DIAM. 4X12 AC
017 828 422 P015 SPACER RING
018 828 423 G025 HORIZONTAL ARM LOCKING ROD
019 851 350 P155 M12 NUT
020 828 426 P022 COVER
021 851 448 P355 GROOVED PIN 5X16 AC
xxix. 9 . 27
9 . 27

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
2 3
25 24
(2A1) (2A3)
4 4
9 . 28

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : CONTROL CONSOLE ASM. 828 750 G035

Range : 2
F
Component Code See also R
number number Description page U
002 829 583 P021 THERMO CONTROL CONSOLE 2
003 828 952 P012 CONTROL DESK INTERMEDIATE PLATE 2
004 824 485 P015 PANEL FIXING BRACKET
005 851 216 P075 CS SCREW M4X20 AC
006 851 384 P055 MACHINED WASHER 4,3X12X1 AC
007 016 851 390 P105 LOCKWASHER M4
008 851 350 P105 NUT M4 AC
009 851 350 P505 COUNTERNUT M4 AC
010 851 380 P105 WASHER M4 AC
011 851 352 P215 SAFETY NUT M4 AC TYPE BAS
012 832 463 P012 EMC METAL SHEET FOR CONSOLE
013 851 216 P045 CS SCREW M4X10 AC
014 851 214 P215 PHILLIPS SCREW M4X8 AC
015 851 383 P295 WASHER 4,3X12X1 AC
019 851 212 P485 HSHC SCREW M6X25 AC
020 851 214 P445 PHILLIPS SCREW M6X25
024 832 440 G015 RIGHT CONTROL DESK PWB ( 2A3 ) 1
025 832 439 G015 LEFT CONTROL DESK PWB ( 2A1 ) 1
027 851 393 P045 SPRINGWASHER 8/4,2X0,4 ZINC–COATED
028 851 381 P105 INSULATING WASHER M4
9 . 29xxx.
Valid from serial : AVT : 8058
9 . 29

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
20 21 23 24 25 26
MODULE 1
E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E7 E10 E11 E13
ALIM.
B.T.
A
PL1 L.V.
PL2 P. SUP
A
A PL3
30 75
A PL4
A PL5
29 A PL6
MODULE 3
43 59 to 63
10
2
39
1 81
R1
1 81
R2
1C1 103
38
Tb1
90 1 1 81
MODULE 4
R3 R4
4
53
MODULE 5
9 . 30

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : CONTROL PANEL MODULE 1 828 730 G025

Range : 2
See also F
number number page
U
002 824 833 P032 DALLE 3MM
004 829 360 P024 C–ARM CABLE CLAMP
010 825 026 P014 GROUND STRIP
018 824 918 G025 SCR CONTROL CABLE ( UL+CSA ) 2

019 817 596 G015 EXTENDER CARD 1
020 See page 9 . 35 3A3 COLLIMATOR PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 35 1
021 See page 9 . 35 3A5 TIMER PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 35 1

023 See page 9 . 35 3A7 AD KV PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 35 1
See page 9 . 35 3A9 KV/mA REFERENCE PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 35 1
024 See page 9 . 35 3A12 KV/mA –2 REF. PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 35 1

025 See page 9 . 35 3A19 SCR CONTROL PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 35 1
026 See page 9 . 35 3A26 FIL. HEATING PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 35 1
029 828 733 G015 CARDRACK MODULE 3/2 ASM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 37 1
038 828 734 G015 PANEL 4 : POWER MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 41 1

053 832 361 G015 PANEL 5: POWERMODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 43
059 832 359 G015 1A1 C–ARM MOTOR PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 33 1

060 853 064 P405 GROMMET NUT PLSTC 212 /80402 29 101
061 851 236 P495 SELFTAPPING SCREW 4,2X19 AC
063 829 720 P015 C–ARM DRIVE PWB SAFETY

067 828 731 G015 SPARE FUSES BAG
068 828 943 G015 CABLE BUNDLE CONTROL PANEL 2
070 850 703 P185 RUBBER 4610026
071 853 062 P015 SELF–LOCKING COLLAR 99X2,5

074 826 980 G025 GROUND EXTENDER CARD UL
075 832 360 G015 UL LOW VOLTAGE P.S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 39
080 853 062 P675 RE–USABLE SELF–LOCKING COLLAR

081 853 465 P065 RESISTOR ALU 0E68 50W
090 853 464 P225 ALU RESISTOR 50W 4K7 N.I.
095 853 054 P305 FLAT CABLE CLAMP

096 851 352 P035 SAFETY NUT M8 AC
098 860 799 P014 ANTISTATIC BRAID
103 853 219 P225 CAPACITOR 470 KPF 630V
xxxi. 9 . 31
Valid from serial :
9 . 31

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
18
25 – 30
52
9 . 32

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : 1A1 : ”C ARM” MOTOR PWB. 832 359 G015

Range : 3
F
Component Code Description See also R
number number page U
832 359 G015 C–ARM MOTOR PWB ( 1A1 ) 1
018 854 352 P425 SLO–BLO FUSE 3A 1
025 030 853 702 P085 OPTOCOUPLER H11A5100 1
052 854 251 P065 RELAY KUHNKE UA3 24VDC 1
xxxii. 9 . 33
9 . 33

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
PANEL 1
E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E7 E10 E11 E13
A
PL1 L.V.
PL2 P. SUP.
A
A PL3
A PL4
A PL5
A PL6
PANEL 3
9 . 34

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : PWB.

Range :
F
PWB Code Description R
number number U
3A1 828 988 G035 DSM INTERFACE PWB 1
3A3 832 502 G015 COLLIMATOR #2 PWB 1
3A5 832 501 G015 TIMER PWB 1
3A7 826 853 G045 AD / KV PWB 1
828 980 G035 kV / mA REFERENCE PWB

3A9 828 980 G535 PART NUMBER to be ORDERED for AFTER SALES SERVICE ( SAS ) 1
3A12 829 825 G025 kV / mA #2 PWB 1
3A19 828 982 G035 SCR CONTROL PWB #2 1
3A26 829 357 G055 FILAMENT HEATING PWB. #4 1
xxxiii. 9 . 35
9 . 35

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E7 E10 E11 E13
PL1
A
PL2
A
A PL3
A PL4
A PL5
A PL6
MODULE 3
9 . 36

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name CARD RACK MODULE #3–2 828 733 G015

Range : 3
See also F
number number page
U
002 818 225 G025 PWB GUIDE ASSEMBLY

003 825 119 P012 CARDRACK ASSEMBLY
004 851 207 P065 SHC SCREW M4X15 AC
005 021 025 851 390 P105 LOCK WASHER M4
006 024 851 380 P105 WASHER M4 AC
010 854 024 P505 PWB GUIDE 1

011 854 024 P035 PWB CONNECTOR 36 POS. 1
012 854 024 P045 DS PWB CONNECTOR 36 POS. 1
013 854 024 P025 PWB KEYING LUG.
014 851 206 P455 SHC SCREW M3X12 AC
015 851 380 P085 WASHER M3 AC

016 030 851 390 P085 LOCK WASHER M3
017 851 350 P085 NUT M3 AC
018 817 860 P014 SHIELD
019 854 011 P055 FAST ON 90–90 TERMINAL
020 023 851 207 P045 SHC SCREW M4X10 AC

022 825 114 P014 M–SERIE BRACKET 1
026 851 350 P105 NUT M4 AC
027 854 039 P055 26 POS WW MALE M–SERIE PLUG 1
028 854 037 P215 SCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 66
029 854 037 P225 NUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 66

031 854 037 P245 NUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 66
032 854 039 P155 26 POS WW FEMALE M–SERIE PLUG 1
033 854 008 P215 SHORT RING TERMINAL 2,6X4 SHORT
034 853 319 P035 WIRE 0,56 MM UL+CSA AWG20/300V #Yellow
035 853 305 P035 TINNED CU WIRE DIAM 0,5MM 0,0018 KG/M
038 853 319 P425 WIRE UL+CSA AWG 26 TEFZ #Red
039 853 319 P445 WIRE UL + CSA AWG 22 TEFZ #Yellow
043 853 054 P305 FLAT CABLE CLAMP
044 851 246 P275 HI–LO BHM SCREW 4,2X9,5
045 826 862 P014 CARD RACK SAFETY PASTEBOARD

046 851 216 P045 CS SCREW M4X10 AC
047 851 400 P275 SKIFFY WASHER 10 MM
049 850 703 P185 PROTECTION
xxxiv. 9 . 37
9 . 37

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
3
5, 6, 7, 8
9 . 38

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : L.V. POWER SUPPLY 832 360 G015

Range : 3
F
Component Code R
Description
number number U
002 831 912 P013 L.V. POWER SUPPLY SUPPORT
003 861 371 P015 PSU 90W – 5/+12/–12/24V 1
004 851 224 P155 CSFHM SCREW M4X5 AC
005 851 200 P465 HH SCREW M4X15 AC
006 851 380 P305 WASHER M4
007 851 380 P105 WASHER M4 AC
008 851 355 P105 M4 SCREW LT
010 832 325 G015 LP SUPPLY HARNESS
xxxv. 9 . 39
9 . 39

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Tb1
9 . 40

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : INVERTER – MODULE #4 828 734 G015

Range : 3
See also F
number number page
U
002 829 236 P012 POWER MODULE FRAME

003 853 210 P065 CAPACITOR 4000MF / 450V 2
004 853 210 P615 CAPACITOR COLLAR 77 2
005 012 017 851 207 P045 SHC SCREW M4X10 AC
008 854 501 P015 PASTEBOARD INSULATOR Th.0,25 mm

009 853 219 P195 CAPACITOR 2MF 800VDC PP 2
010 853 219 P205 CAPACITOR 5MF 800VDC 2
011 853 210 P635 CAPACITOR COLLAR 49X74
015 853 456 P095 RESISTOR 50W 4E7 1
016 853 454 P035 RESISTOR MOUNTING CLIP 4A 26
020 031 851 367 P075 CAGED NUT C4844C
021 853 757 P315 RECTIFIER BRIDGE SKB 60/08 1
026 854 004 P025 8 POS. TERMINAL STRIP

027 808 200 P034 8 POS. T.S. NUMBERING PLATE
032 854 405 P145 220 VAC INDICATOR LIGHT 1
033 853 410 P195 RESISTOR 1PC 0,25W / 237K

034 853 001 P055 THERMOSHRINK SLEEVE dia 4.8mm #Yellow
035 829 233 G015 SWITCHING CHOKE ASSEMBLY 1
040 828 735 G015 SANDWICH RECTIFIERS (WITH A1 AND A2) 1
041 851 350 P135 NUT M8 AC
042 851 380 P135 WASHER M8

043 851 390 P135 LOCKWASHER M8
044 853 219 P115 CAPACITOR PA 220KPF / 630VAC
045 825 021 P015 CONNECTION BAR 170X15X1

048 825 024 P015 CONNECTION BAR
049 853 001 P085 THERMOSHRINK SLEEVE dia 12.7mm #Red
053 853 402 P575 RESISTOR 470 KOHM / 1W / 10%

055 870 115 P511 SUP.ACTI SOLDER TIN 60.18 SWG
056 828 997 G015 INVERTER CABLE BUNDLE
057 829 235 G015 ANTI–SATURATION TRANSFORMER 1

064 853 058 P185 RUBBER GROMMET HV2335A
066 853 575 P055 FERRITE Ø 25 x 30
067 832 285 P015 CONNECTION BAR
068 853 001 P095 THERMOSHRINK SLEEVE dia 19mm #BLUE
xxxvi. 9 . 41
9 . 41

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
2 3 4,
5,
6,
7
10,
o
11,12,13,14
59
47
o 9
40,
42, 10
43
58
38,39
38,39
58 42,
43,
41,
COSSE 37
31
41,
32,33,34,35 26 25
42,
43
21,
22,
62
23,
24,
62
36 27,28,29,30
37
48,49,50,51
9 . 42

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : POWER MODULE #5 832 361 G015

Range : 3
See also F
number number page
U
002 829 261 P012 POWER MODULE SUPPORT

003 860 921 P054 P.S. TRANSFORMER 1
004 851 212 P465 HSHC SCREW M6X16 AC
005 851 380 P125 WASHER M6
007 047 851 367 P215 CAPTIVE NUT 4806–B

009 853 210 P075 ELCO CAPACITOR 470MF / 250VDC
010 853 210 P515 CAP BRACKET 4322 043 04270 D35P
011 851 212 P045 HSHC SCREW M4X10 AC
012 028 033
041 049 851 380 P105 WASHER M4
013 029 034

042 050 851 390 P105 LOCKWASHER M4
014 851 367 P075 CAPTIVE NUT C4844C
021 854 352 P045 FUSE SLO–BLO 3A 1
022 024 854 351 P055 FUSE HOLDER 1
023 854 352 P075 FUSE SLO–BLO 8A 1

025 854 004 P025 8 POS. FASTON TERMINAL STRIP
026 808 200 P034 8 POS. NUMBERING PLATE
027 851 212 P065 HSHC SCREW M4X16 AC
030 035 043
051 851 350 P105 M4 NUT
031 853 757 P045 RECTIFIER BRIDGE 300V / 25A 1

032 851 212 P075 HSHC SCREW M4X20 AC
036 853 058 P065 PVC GROMMET dia 22,2mm
037 829 355 G015 HEATING POWER PWB. 5A1 1
038 818 365 P016 BAKELITE SPACER dia 12X6
039 818 364 P016 BAKELITE SPACER dia 6X12

040 851 207 P115 SHC SCREW M4X40 AC
046 829 263 G015 P.S. MODULE CABLE BUNDLE
048 851 207 P095 SHC SCREW M4X30 AC
058 851 383 P295 WASHER 4,3/12X1 AC
059 853 402 P455 RESISTOR 47K/1W

060 854 008 P635 AMP 34148 TAP CABLE–SHOE 1,6X4
062 854 351 P065 FUSE HOLDER HEAD 1
xxxvii. 9 . 43
9 . 43

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
9 . 44

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : 6” CCD IMAGER KIT+ COLLIMATOR. 832 406 G015

Range : 1
See also F
number number page
U
002 828 723 G015 6” IMAGER COMPLETE ”C ARM” ASSEMBLY
003 828 725 G015 6” IMAGER ”C ARM” SUPPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 47 2
004 828 751 G 025 6” WIRED COLLIMATOR ASSEMBLY 9 . 47 1
006 021 851 212 P465 HSHC SCREW M6X16 AC
010 851 224 P695 CSFHM SELFBLOCKING M4X30 AC
011 851 542 P015 SKIFFY WASHER FOR NYLON CAP
012 851 542 P025 NYLON CAP 06–6–5
013 832 395 P013 MOULDED COUNTERWEIGHT
014 851 212 P515 HSHC SCREW M6X40 AC
015 851 380 P125 WASHER M6
016 024 851 390 P125 LOCKWASHER M6
017 851 224 P665 CSFHM SELFBLOCKING SCREW M4X15 AC
018 851 367 P075 CAGED NUT C4844C
022 851 383 P315 WASHER 6,4/18X1,5 AC
023 851 383 P335 WASHER 8,4/25X2 AC
025 832 410 P013 16B CONTROL DESK SCREEN PLATE 1
027 830 997G035 COVERS KIT (Column right and left covers + Collimator cover + Wig–Wag . . . . . . . . . 9 . 62
covers kit + C Arm support left and right covers + Horizontal arm cover.)
9 . 45

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
828 725 G015
861 205 P015
828 751 G025 84

88
26
32
39,67
9 . 46

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : ”C ARM” SUPPORT ASM. ( 6” ) 828 725 G015

Range : 2
F
number number U
002 832 630 G015 WELDED ”C ARM” SUPPORT. ( 6” version)
003 851 256 P245 HSCPS SCREW M8X10 AC
004 828 488 G035 6” MODIFIED BRAKE ASSEMBLY 1
005 828 696 P015 CLAMP 45X5X6
006 851 212 P265 HSHC SCREW M5X16 AC
007 851 383 P305 WASHER 5,3/15X1,5 AC
009 851 630 P325 TRACTION SPRING DIN 17223C 10,9/60,8
010 851 847 P085 RETAINING WASHER DIA 6–8 MM 1
xxxviii.xxxix. 9 . 47
Assembly Name : 6” COLLIMATOR ASSEMBLY 828 751 G025

Range : 2
F
number number U
026 861 400 P014 GEARMOTOR 1
032 851 674 P075 DRIVING–BELT 2
039 067 854 306 P215 SUB MSW 1
084 860 927 P014 GEARMOTOR 1
088 829 797 G035 MICROMOTOR ASSEMBLY 1
9 . 47

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
9 . 48

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : 9” CCD IMAGER KIT + COLLIMATOR. 832 407 G015

Range : 1
F
Component Code See also R
Description
002 828 724 G015 9” IMAGER COMPLETE ”C ARM” ASSEMBLY
003 828 726 G015 9” IMAGER ”C ARM” SUPPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 51 2
004 828 752 G025 9” WIRED COLLIMATOR ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 51 1
006 021 851 212 P465 HSHC SCREW M6X16 AC
007 017 024 851 390 P125 LOCKWASHER M6
010 851 224 P095 CSFHM SELFBLOCKING SCREW M4X30 AC
011 851 542 P015 SKIFFY WASHER FOR NYLON CAP
012 851 542 P025 NYLON CAP TYPE 06–6–5
018 851 350 P115 NUT M5 AC
019 851 383 P305 WASHER 5,3/15X1,5 AC
022 851 383 P315 WASHER 6,4/18X1,5 AC
023 851 383 P335 WASHER 8,4/25X2 AC
025 832 411 P013 CONTROL DESK SCREEN PLATE /9”B 1
027 830 997 G045 COVERS KIT. (Column right and left covers + Collimator cover + Wig–Wag . . . . . . . . 9 . 62
covers kit + C Arm support left and right covers + Horizontal arm cover.)
9 . 49

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
828 726 G015
861 205 P015
828 752 G025 113
84
26
32
39,67
9 . 50

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : ”C ARM” SUPPORT. ( 9” ) 828 726 G015

Range : 2
F
number number U
002 832 630 G025 WELDED ”C ARM” SUPPORT. ( 9” version)
003 851 256 P245 HSCPS SCREW M8X10 AC
004 828 488 G045 9” MODIFIED BRAKE ASM 1
005 828 696 P015 CLAMP 45X5X6
006 851 212 P265 HSHC SCREW M5X16 AC
007 851 383 P305 WASHER 5,3/15X1,5 AC
009 851 630 P325 TRACTION SPRING DIN 17223C 10,9/60,8
010 851 847 P085 RETAINING WASHER dia 6–8 mm 1
9 . 51 xl.
Assembly Name : 9” COLLIMATOR ASSEMBLY 828 752 G025

Range : 2
F
number number U
026 861 400 P014 GEARMOTOR 1
032 851 674 P075 DRIVING–BELT 2
039 067 854 306 P215 SUB MSW 1
084 860 927 P014 GEARMOTOR 1
113 829 797 G035 MICROMOTOR ASSEMBLY 1
9 . 51

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
29
27, 28
A
24
23
19
22
9 . 52

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : MONITOR CART ASSEMBLY / Basic version 827 908 G065
Range : 1
See also F
number number page
U
002 827 944 G035 WELDED FRAME ASM (Modular Monitor Cart)
003 832 402 P012 FRONT UPPER SHELF
004 830 763 P012 SEPARATION PLATE ( Mod.Mon.Cart )
005 831 220 P013 WELDED LEFT FOOT ( Mod.Mon.Cart )
006 831 220 P023 WELDED RIGHT FOOT (Mod.Mon.Cart )
007 830 781 G015 WELDED LOWER BIN (Mod.Mon.Cart )

008 076 851 213 P055 HSHC SCREW M8X12 AC
009 832 403 P012 REAR UPPER SHELF
010 077 127 851 380 P135 WASHER M8
011 078 128 851 390 P135 LOCKWASHER M8
012 118 851 212 P455 HSHC SCREW M6X12 AC

013 031 119
134 143 851 380 P125 WASHER M6
014 032 120
135 144 851 390 P125 LOCKWASHER M6
015 851 350 P125 NUT M6 AC

017 830 871 P012 DOOR 3 OEM ( Mod.Mon.Cart )
019 861 323 P014 IDLE WHEEL WITH INDEX 1
020 851 443 P705 PIN Ø 4 x 8 AC
022 860 893 P044 IDLE WHEEL ( Mod.Mon.Cart ) 1
023 830 853 P015 M.C. WHEEL FIXING NUT PLATE 2

024 851 350 P555 COUNTER–NUT M12 AC 2
026 827 922 P034 SHAFT SUPPORT 2
027 827 919 P015 CENTERING RING 1
028 827 921 P015 ROTATION SHAFT 2
029 827 920 P015 BRAKE WASHER 1

030 851 212 P475 HSHC SCREW M6X20 AC
034 851 221 P515 HSFH SCREW M6X40 AC
035 851 221 P565 HSFH SCREW M6X70 AC
036 851 256 P315 HSHS SCREW M8X40 AC NON GALVANIZED
037 851 350 P135 NUT M8 AC

041 851 221 P065 HSFH SCREW M4X16 AC
042 137 851 380 P105 WASHER M4
043 104 110

116 131 138 851 390 P105 LOCKWASHER M4
044 105 117 851 350 P105 NUT M4 AC
053 107 851 367 P065 CAGED NUT C4844B
xli. 9 . 53
9 . 53

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
75
A 58
57
9 . 54

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : MONITOR CART ASSEMBLY / Basic version 827 908 G065
Range : 1
See also F
number number page
U

057 851 870 P115 FOOT STOPGAP 1
058 850 703 P185 RUBBER SAFETY 4610026 1
059 851 350 P145 NUT M10 AC
061 851 400 P275 SKIFFY WASHER 10MM

074 121 851 367 P215 CAGED NUT C4806–B
075 832 523 P014 LATERAL HANDLE 2
097 851 501 P075 RAPID TYE C4402.6.32
102 851 214 P235 PHILLIPS SCREW M4X16 AC
103 109 115 851 383 P295 WASHER 4,3/12X1 AC

108 851 212 P045 HSHC SCREW M4X10 AC
111 851 541 P065 STOPGAP Dia 12,7 1
113 830 807 P014 STANDARD COVER ( Modular Monitor Cart ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 63 1
114 830 873 P014 GRND PLATE ( Mod.Mon.Cart )
125 851 367 P285 CAGED NUT M8 C4808–B

126 851 213 P065 HSHC SCREW M8X16 AC
129 851 367 P075 CAGED NUT C4844C
130 136 851 212 P055 HSHC SCREW M4X12 AC
133 142 851 212 P465 HSHC SCREW M6X16 AC
141 830 761 P013 INTERMEDIATE PLATE ( Mod.Mon.Cart )
9 . 55

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
42 , 45
43
A
A
37 36
29
9TR1
9Tb3
9 . 56

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : MONITOR CART WIRING 828 804 G055

Range : 1
See also F
number number page
U
004 012 038 851 212 P055 HSHC SCREW M4X12 AC

005 013 040 851 383 P295 WASHER 4,3 x12
014 026 039 851 390 P105 LOCKWASHER M4
007 851 212 P465 HSHC SCREW M6X16 AC
008 041 851 383 P315 WASHER 6,4/18X1,5 AC

009 017 851 390 P125 LOCKWASHER M6
010 833 040 G015 MDA MEMORY KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 92
011 828 950 P045 MONITOR CART LABEL

015 851 212 P455 HSHC SCREW M6X12 AC
016 851 380 P125 WASHER M6
020 854 026 P135 DIN SUPPORT 35X50

021 854 026 P335 WEIDMULLER TERMINAL 16 MM2
022 854 026 P345 WEIDMULLER TERMINAL 16 MM2
023 854 026 P375 TERMINAL END PLATE
024 851 201 P045 HH SCREW M5X10 AC
025 851 380 P105 WASHER M4

027 851 350 P115 NUT M5 AC
028 818 770 P413 WARNING LABEL ”ELECTRIC DANGER”
029 860 920 P024 ISOLATION TRANSFORMER 2
030 851 213 P065 HSHC SCREW M8X16 AC
031 851 380 P135 WASHER M8

033 851 367 P275 RAPID CAGED NUT C4808A
034 853 152 P075 Green/Yellow LABEL ”UL GRND”
036 831 256 G025 MAINS CABLE (MONITOR) 2
037 853 313 P075 ” BNC–BNC” CABLE L=1,5M (MONITOR)
042 854 414 P045 X–RAY WARNING LIGHT 1

043 832 434 P015 WARNING LIGHT SUPPORT 1
045 854 405 P045 BULB 40V 10W 1

046 854 414 P055 SOCKET FOR BULB BA15D
047 853 575 P045 FERRITE CLIP DIA 10 MM
048 828 756 G035 MONITOR CART INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 59
9 . 57

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
MODULE 9 5
46
8 or 49 2 39 38
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
37 36 35
9 . 58

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : STENO 2 INTERFACE MODULE 9 828 756 G035

Range : 2
F
number number U
002 832 918 P012 INTERFACE PANEL ( Modular Monitor Cart )

003 832 944 G015 WELDED SUPPORT
004 851 367 P065 CAGED NUT C4844B
005 827 932 P015 KEY 1
006 832 848 G015 PANEL 9 HARNESS
008 2 172 555 9A1 TRANSPANEL for MDA memory 1

( see schematics A3 p.A–38 )
009 851 206 P455 SHC M3X12 AC SCREW
010, 014 851 207 P045 SHC M4X10 AC SCREW
011 851 207 P065 SHC M4X15 AC SCREW
013 851 207 P095 SHC M4X30 AC SCREW
015 851 207 P065 SHC M4X16 AC SCREW

016 851 212 P445 SHC M6X10 AC SCREW
017 851 249 P055 SHC N* 6–32 UNC AC SCREW
018 851 350 P085 M3 AC NUT
019 851 350 P105 M4 AC NUT
020 851 355 P105 M4 LT NUT

021 851 380 P085 WASHER M3 AC
022 851 390 P105 WASHER M4 AC
025 851 383 P275 WASHER 32/9X08
026 851 383 P295 WASHER 43/12X1A
027 851 390 P085 SCHNORR WASHER VIS M3

030 851 400 P275 SKIFFY WASHER 10MM
031 853 062 P015 SELF LOCKING COLLAR1
032 853 152 P075 UL GROUND LABEL

033 853 219 P225 COND 470K 630V
034 853 454 P015 RESISTOR FIXING CLIP–2A 15
035 853 455 P015 1E 25W RESISTOR
036 853 455 P055 2E2 25W RESISTOR 1
037 854 004 P115 FASTON 12X6 TERRMINAL STRIP 2

038 854 273 P225 AUX. RELAY 3NO–3NF 105V 1
039 854 273 P645 TIMER 01SEC–3SEC 2
040 854 351 P015 FUSE HOLDER
041 854 351 P045 FUSE HOLDER 103X349 2
042 854 351 P065 FUSE HOLDER HEAD 1

043 854 352 P025 LONG FUSE 1A 1
044 854 352 P055 LONG FUSE 5A 1
045 854 362 P315 FUSE 500V 1A 10KA 1
046 854 365 P045 CIRCUIT BREAKER 30A 250V 1
047 853 065 P025 METAL COLLAR DIA 4.8
049 2 172 563 9A1 TRANSPANEL for DR4 / MD10 memories 1

( see schematics A3 p.A–38 )
xlii. 9 . 59
Valid from serial : AVT : 8063
9 . 59

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
2 5
6
4
9 . 60

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : X – RAY HAND SWITCH KIT 829 866 G015

Range : 1
F
002 46–270 800 G5 HAND SWITCH 1
003 46–279 005 P1 HANGER 1
004 46–315 241 P1 COIL CORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
005 829 827 P015 X–RAY HAND SWITCH PWB. SUPPORT 2
006 829 785 G015 X–RAY HANDSWITCH PWB. 2A4 2
007 851 215 P415 CS SCREW M3X5 AC
008 851 380 P085 WASHER M3
010 851 350 P055 NUT M2
011 851 200 P465 HH SCREW M4X15 AC
012 851 383 P295 WASHER 4,3/12X1 AC
014 851 350 P105 NUT M4 AC
015 829 867 G025 X–RAY HANDSWITCH CABLE
018 851 202 P295 HH SCREW M12X30 AC
019 829 871 P015 X–RAY HS. PWB SUPPORT TEMPLATE
9 . 61

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 CCD–MDA COVERS ( FRU )
xliii. 9 . 62 IR Remote control

832 466 G045 (MDA)(1)
832 466 G025 (DR4)(1)
832 466 G035 (MD10)(1)
Column cover ( left + right )
831 227 G515 (2)
Wig–Wag cover kit

826 955 G035 (1)
“C Arm” support thermo cover (Left + right )
Horizontal arm cover 831 229 G525 (2) û 6”

831 230 G525 (2) û 9”
832 457 P011 (2)
Collimator cover
829 562 P042 (1) (without DAP and Laser)
829 562 P052 (1) (with display for DAP)
829 562 P062 (1) (for Laser without display)
Laser cap
Panel cover
2 185 094 (2) (without IC *)
829 285 P042 (2) 2 185 092 (2) (with IC *)
2 185 093 (2) (white model
with IC *)
* IC : Ion Chamber
Column cover
Sealant
832 414 G015 (2)
Back wheel cover
2 172 793 (2)
830 964 P023 (1)
Front wheel cover
830 963 P013 (1)
Power supply cable drum
830 966 G015
Monitor cart cable
828 955 G615 (1)
9 . 62

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
MONITOR CART COVERS ( FRU ).
xliv. 9 . 63
Rear cover (all versions)
832 137 P021 (2)
2 Monitors support kit – ( 1 Monitor support kit )
829 334 G025 (N) – ( 832 442 G015 (N) )
Sony 9500 MDP Monitor Cart Cover
830 804 P013 (2)
Film repro kit (Visiplex) Monitor Cart Cover
830 806 P013 (2)
Sony UP910 Monitor Cart Cover
830 805 P013 (2)
Standard Cover ( use two parts for Visiplex if this option is not used )
830 807 P014 (2)
Sony UP890 Monitor Cart Cover
833 128 P014 (2)
9 . 63

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
DR4 or MD10 CABLES INTERCONNECTIONS (FRU : 1 ).
DR4 / MD10 DR4 / MD10

FRONT PANEL REAR PANEL
R.X. CONTROL R.X. CONTROL HARD COPY SCREEN A SCREEN B CAMERA HARD COPY
POWER I.R. REMOTE
DSM DR VIDEO OUT OUT IN CONTROL
DB 15 Male DB 15 Female BNC BNC BNC BNC DB 9 Male BNC DB 9 Male
Only in DR
(EMULATION)
853 313 P065
Monitors
ÉÉÉÉ
C or D
ÉÉÉÉ
A or B 853 313 P075
ÉÉÉÉ MD10 Option
829 971 G025

C A B D
830 062 G015
or
9 . 64

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
MDA CABLES INTERCONNECTIONS (FRU : 1 ).
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
RS232 IR receiver cable
833 050 P015
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
RS232 Interface cable
861 435 P015
833 055 P015
IR – PC cable
833 065 P015 833 137 P015
ÉÉÉÉÉ
833 012 P015
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉ 833 054 P015
853 313 P015
833 053 P015
853 313 P015
830 062 G015
9 . 65

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
M Serie” PLUGS FRONT BACK

view view
Female 14 pos. Male 14 pos.
46 854 037 P335
46 854 037 P345
46 854 037 P355

FEMALE
46 854 037 P135 14 pos.
46 854 037 P155 26pos.
46 854 037 P165 34pos. Female 26 pos. Male 26 pos.
ÉÉ
46 854 037 P325
ÉÉ
ÉÉ 46 854 037 P315
É
46 854 037 P215
É
Ç ÇÇ 46 854 037 P225
Ç ÇÇ
ÇÇ 46 854 037 P035 14 pos.
46 854 037 P055 26pos.
Female 34 pos. Male 34 pos.
46 854 037 P065 34pos.
46 854 037 P235

MALE
46 854 037 P245
Ç GUIDE SOCKET
Ç GUIDE PIN
Ç 46 854 037 P845
PIN AMP Ç 46 854 037 P855
”M SERIE”
MALE for wire

Section mm2 ø ext. mm Gold Tinned
0,2 à 0,56 1,1 à 1,8 854 037 P615 854 037 P685
0,2 à 0,56 2 á 2,5 854 037 P635
0,75 á 1,5 2 á 2,5 854 037 P655 854 037 P705
SOCKET ”M SERIE”
FEMALE for wire

Section mm2 ø ext. mm Gold Tinned
0,2 à 0,56 1,1 à 1,8 854 037 P625 854 037 P675
0,2 à 0,56 2 á 2,5 854 037 P645 854 037 P695
0,75 á 1,5 2 á 2,5 854 037 P665 854 037 P715
xlv. 9 . 66
9 . 66

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
PLUG 62 POSITIONS
MALE
KIT 829 732 G 015
854 039 P495
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
824 024 P016
ÇÇÇÇÇ
FEMALE
854 039 P955
829 734 P015
KIT
829 733 G 015
9 . 67

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
O.E.M. REFERENCE.
O.E.M. REFERENCE MODEL PART NUMBER

VCR S–VHS SONY SVO–9500MPD 45 067 461
625L/220V/CEI
VCR S–VHS SONY SVO–9500MD 45 067 462

525L/110V/UL
PAPER PRINTER N / B SONY UP 910–EK4 861 190 P 015

CEI/220V
PAPER PRINTER N / B SONY UP 910–U / C 861 190 P 025

UL/110V
PAPER PRINTER SONY UP 890 CE 861 190 P 035

CEI/220V
PAPER PRINTER SONY UP 880 UL 861 190 P 045

UL/110V
REPRO VISIPLEX CCM 620 45 067 445

625L/220V/50/60Hz A2V 521
REPRO VISIPLEX CCM 620 45 067 444

525L/220V/50/60Hz A2VS 522
MONITEUR DISTAR FFD–ROT 36 004 047

525L/625L/50/60Hz
9 . 68

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Blank page
9 . 69

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
9–2 LASER
Assembly Name : EXTERNAL LASER AIMING SPARE PARTS

Range :
See also F
number number page
U
832 343 G015 LASER SUPPORT ASM IMAGER 22CM 2
832 346 G015 LASER SUPPORT ASM IMAGER 16CM 2
861 365 P055 TARGET RETICULE 2
861 365 P025 LASER (external) 2
861 365 P035 LASER SUPPORT 2
9 . 70

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : INTEGRATED LASER AIMING SPARE PARTS

Range :
F
Component Code Description See also
R
number number page
U
005 861 438 P015 LASER DIODE (ASM)
006 861 438 P025 LASER DIODE + CARBON FIBRE ARM ASM 2
007 861 438 P035 ROTATION AND MOTOR BLOCK 2
008 861 438 P045 LASER DIODE CONTROL MODULE 2
009 2 170 728 RED OUTPUT WINDOW 1
9 . 71

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
9–3 DOSE AREA PRODUCT METER
Assembly Name : DOSE AREA PRODUCT METER

Range :
See also F
number number page
U
861 370 P025 ION CHAMBER ASM 2
861 370 P055 ELECTRONICS MODULE * 2
861 370 P065 DISPLAY MODULE * 2
861 370 P075 OVERLAY * 2
861 370 P085 SET CABLES AND CONNECTORS 2
861 370 P095 SPACER 2
* : with DR4 and MD10 memories.
861 439 P025 ELECTRONIC MODULE 2
861 439 P035 SINGLE CHANNEL BOARD 2
833 137 P015 DAP–TRANSPANEL CABLE 2
833 054 P015 PC–DAP CABLE 2
861 370 P135 SGNL COAX CABLE 2
861 370 P145 H.T. COAX CABLE 2
861 370 P155 SGNL FLAT CABLE 2
861 370 P165 P.S. FLAT CABLE 2
9 . 72

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Blank page
9 . 73

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
9–4 IMAGER
IMAGEUR 16/22 FOR STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000

9 . 74

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : IMAGEUR 16/22 FOR STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 CCD–MDA
See also F
number number page
U
001 2 123 013 IMAGEUR 16 CCD STENO 525–LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 77
002 2 123 012 – 2 IMAGEUR 16 CCD STENO 625–LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 77
003 2 122 357 – 2 IMAGEUR 22 CCD STENO 525–LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 79
004 2 111 958 IMAGEUR 22 CCD STENO 625–LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 79
9 . 75

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
IMAGEUR 16 CCD STENO 525–LINE 2 123 013

IMAGEUR 16 CCD STENO 625–LINE 2 123 012 – 2

A

9 . 76

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : IMAGEUR 16 CCD 525 LINE 2 123 013

IMAGEUR 16 CCD 625 LINE 2 123 012 – 2 Range :
See also F
number number page
U
001 2 120 442 II TUBE TH9449 HP H506 1
002 45 312 902 COVER, CENTER, PAINTED 2
003 2 134 681 – 2 CCD COMPACT CAMERA 525–LINE 16 CM EQUIPPED 1
005 58 079 229 POWER SUPPLY, II SYSTEM, STENO/RF TUBE HP 1
006 2 111 966 BOARD CAGE, CCD STENO, EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 81 2
007 45 312 654 UPPER COVER EQUIPPED 2
– 45 066 738 ANTISCATING GRID 1
008 91 694 905 BLANKING CAP, WHITE, D=10.5 H=4 2
009 45 312 903 COVER PAINTED LOWER 2
010 2 124 242 EMERGENCY MAINTENANCE KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 83 1

xlvi. 9 . 77
9 . 77

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
IMAGEUR 22 CCD STENO 525–LINE 2 122 357 – 2

IMAGEUR 22 CCD STENO 625–LINE 2 111 958
3 4
5
6
A
8 8
9 . 78

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : IMAGEUR 22 CCD 525 LINE 2 122 357 – 2

IMAGEUR 22 CCD 625 LINE 2 111 958 Range :
See also F
Component Code Description page R
number number
U
001 2 105 607 II TUBE 1
002 58079229 POWER SUPPLY, II SYSTEM, STENO/RF TUBE HP 1
003 2 193 568 COVER, LOWER, EQUIPPED 2
– 45 067 387 ANTISCATING GRID 1
004 2 111 966 BOARD CAGE, CCD STENO, EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 81 2
007 2 122 713 COVER, UPPER, WITH SEAL 2
008 91633383 BLANKING CAP, WHITE, D=20/15 H=4 2
009 2 112 048 EMERGENCY MAINTENANCE KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 85 1
xlvii. 9 . 79
9 . 79

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
BOARD CAGE, CCD STENO, EQUIPPED 2111966
4
A3
IMAGEUR 16
2
A1
3
A2
IMAGEUR 22
5
2107144
A3 J2 HV
W30
2119075
A6 J8 J1
W31
2119077
C191987
2119076
9 . 80

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : BOARD CAGE, CCD STENO, EQUIPPED 2111966

Range :
F
R
number number page
U
001 2111964 BOARD CAGE, CCD STENO, ASSEMBLY 1
002 36003627 POWER SUPPLY BOARD, CCD (A1) 1
003 2103697–2 VIDEO BOARD, CCD (A2) 1
004 2120439 INTERFACE BOARD, CCD (A3) 1
005 2111967 SET OF CABLES, BOARD CAGE, CCD 1
– 2107144 CABLE W30
– 2119075 CABLE W31
– 2119077 VIDEO CABLE
– C191987 PROTECTIVE CONNECTION
– 2119076 GROUND CABLE

xlviii. 9 . 81
9 . 81

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
EMERGENCY MAINTENANCE KIT 2124242

(IMAGEUR 16 CCD STENO)
9 . 82

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : EMERGENCY MAINTENANCE KIT 2124242

(IMAGEUR 16 CCD STENO) Range :
F
R
number number page
U
– 91694905 BLANKING CAP, WHITE, D=10.5 H=4
– 58079540 SLOW–BLOW FUSE, 5X20 2.0A 250V V 100A ULL
– 99052109 SCREW, HEX SKT HD CAP, M3X8/8, PASS SST
– 91455241 WASHER, M3, STL
– 2109925 SCREWDRIVER, MICRO–TECH
– 45559962 BAG OF LANGUAGE STICK–ON LABELS
– 45474344 IDENTIFICATION LABEL, GERMAN PRODUCT
– 45474343 IDENTIFICATION LABEL, ITALIAN PRODUCT
– 45474041 IDENTIFICATION LABEL, SPANISH PRODUCT
– 45474039 IDENTIFICATION LABEL, FRENCH PRODUCT
– 45474346 SPECIFICATION LABEL, GERMAN PRODUCT
– 45474345 SPECIFICATION LABEL, ITALIAN PRODUCT
– 45474040 SPECIFICATION LABEL, SPANISH PRODUCT
– 45474038 SPECIFICATION LABEL, FRENCH PRODUCT
– 45474336 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
– 2106275 EXTENDER BOARD 1
xlix. 9 . 83
9 . 83

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
EMERGENCY MAINTENANCE KIT 2112048

(IMAGEUR 22 CCD STENO)
9 . 84

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : EMERGENCY MAINTENANCE KIT 2112048

( IMAGEUR 22 CCD STENO ) Range :
See also F
number number page
U
– 91633383 BLANKING CAP, WHITE, D=10.5 H=4
– 58079540 SLOW–BLOW FUSE, 5X20 2.0A 250V V 100A ULL
– 99052109 SCREW, HEX SKT HD CAP, M3X8/8, PASS SST
– 91455241 WASHER, M3, STL
– 2109925 SCREWDRIVER, MICRO–TECH
– 45559962 BAG OF LANGUAGE STICK–ON LABELS
– 45474344 IDENTIFICATION LABEL, GERMAN PRODUCT
– 45474343 IDENTIFICATION LABEL, ITALIAN PRODUCT
– 45474041 IDENTIFICATION LABEL, SPANISH PRODUCT
– 45474039 IDENTIFICATION LABEL, FRENCH PRODUCT
– 45474346 SPECIFICATION LABEL, GERMAN PRODUCT
– 45474345 SPECIFICATION LABEL, ITALIAN PRODUCT
– 45474040 SPECIFICATION LABEL, SPANISH PRODUCT
– 45474038 SPECIFICATION LABEL, FRENCH PRODUCT
– 45474336 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
– 2106275 EXTENDER BOARD 1
l. 9 . 85
9 . 85

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
9–5 MEMORIES
3 7
MDA MEMORY
5
SCSI Controler
board + cable
Loaded SCSI disk

2
8
Infrared receiver
board
9 . 86

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : MDA MEMORY 832 983 G015

Range : 0
F
002 861 420 P015 EQUIPED PC 1
003 861 424 P015 RS 232 BOARD 1
005 861 426 P015 AVIAS BOARD 1
006 861 427 P015 MIDAS BOARD 1
007 861 429 P015 VGA BOARD 1
008 833 049 G015 TOUCH SCREEN FRONT ASM 1

833 076 G515 TOUCH SCREEN + ELECTROLUMINESCENT ASM 1
833 074 G515 LOADED IDE DISK 1
833 075 G515 LOADED SCSI DISK (ILLUSTRATED) 1
861 423 P015 SCSI CONTROLER BOARD + CABLE 2
832 466 G045 IR REMOTE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 62 1
861 440 P015 INFRARED RECEIVER BOARD 1
9 . 87

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : DR4 MEMORY

Range :
See also F
number number
U
861 360 P025 BOXED DR4 MOTHER BOARD SERIAL 1
861 360 P035 INFRA RED RECEIVER SERIAL 2
2175577 DR4 / MD10 REMOTE CONTROL CABLE 2
832 466 G025 I.R. REMOTE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 62 1
832 455 G015 POWER SUPPLY CABLE 2
2175685 BOXED DR4 MOTHER BOARD PARALLEL 1
2175687 INFRA RED RECEIVER PARALLEL 2
9 . 88

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : MD10 MEMORY

Range :
See also F
number number
U
861 361 P065 MD10 MEMORY SERIAL 1
861 361 P035 INFRA RED RECEIVER SERIAL 2
2 175 577 DR4 / MD10 REMOTE CONTROL CABLE 2
832 466 G035 I.R. REMOTE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 62 1
832 455 G015 POWER SUPPLY CABLE 2
2 175 688 BOXED MD10 MOTHER BOARD PARALLEL 1
2 175 690 INFRA RED RECEIVER KP ( KEYBOARD PARALLEL ) 2
2 169 586 FLAT KEYBOARD MD10 2
9 . 89

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
9–6 MONITORS
Assembly Name : MAGNETEK MONITOR

Range :
See also F
number number page
U
2 153 979 TV MONITOR NOT ROT. 1
2 153 980 TV MONITOR ROT. 1
9 . 90

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Blank page
9 . 91

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
9–7 KITS (MONITOR CART)
Assembly Name : MDA MEMORY KIT 833 040 G015

Range : 2
See also F
number number page
U
003 827 681 G015 CEI MAIN CABLED 1
004 833 012 P015 TRANSPANEL–AVIAS CABLE 1
005 853 313 P035 COAX CABLE 75 OHM LG = 2M 2
006 851 212 P045 HSHC SCREW M4X10QC
007 851 383 P295 WASHER 43/12X1A
008 851 390 P105 SCHNORR WASHER M4
009 851 367 P075 CAGED NUT C4844C
010 833 031 P014 PC CLAMPING RAIL
012 018 853 313 P065 BNC COAX CABLE
013 017 829 736 P015 FLEXIBLE MAGNET
019 851 250 P115 UNC Nb 10 SCREW
020 851 400 P285 SKIFFY WASHER FOR M 12MM SCREW 1
021 833 136 P014 SUPPORT
022 833 135 P014 CONNECTOR SUPPORT
023 851 350 P085 NUT M3 AC
024 851 380 P085 WASHER M3 AC
025 851 383 P275 WASHER 32/9X08
026 851 390 P085 SCHNORR WASHER M3
027 851 206 P435 HSHC SCREW M3X8 AC
029 2 192 808 PC IRON SHEET SUPPORT

li.lii.liii. 9 . 92
9 . 92

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : VCR SONY KIT 830 117 G025

Range : 0
See also F
number number page
U
002 853 313 P015 ”BNC–BNC” CABLE L=1.5M 1
003 827 681 G015 MAIN VOLTAGE SUPPLY CABLE CEI
004 830 952 G015 MAGNETO SONY REMOTE CONTROL CABLE
005 830 770 G015 WELDED SHELF ( Mod.Mon.Cart )
006 851 212 P055 HSHC SCREW M4X12 AC
007 851 380 P105 WASHER M4
008 019 851 390 P105 LOCKWASHER M4
010 851 206 P445 SHC SCREW M3X10 AC
012 851 383 P275 WASHER 3,2/9X0,8 AC
013 830 933 P015 SHELF SUPPORT ROD (Modular Monitor Cart)
014 851 374 P085 RIVET TUBTARA M6 SHEET 3–5,5 AC
015 851 350 P125 NUT M6 AC
017 830 804 P013 SONY 9500 MDP COVER ( Mod.Mon.Cart ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 63 2
018 851 383 P295 WASHER 4,3/12X1 AC
020 851 355 P105 BRASS NUT M4
025 830 883 P013 VCR REMOTE CONTROL BIN (Mod.Mon.Cart)
026 850 750 P335 TAPE *RUBAN TESALIX 4970
9 . 93

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : FILM REPRO KIT 830 043 G075

Range : 0
See also F
number number page
U
006 851 212 P055 HSHC SCREW M4X12 AC
007 029 851 380 P105 WASHER M4
008 017 028 851 390 P105 LOCKWASHER M4
016 851 383 P295 WASHER 4,3/12X1 AC
018 851 355 P105 BRASS NUT M4
021 830 766 P013 MATRIX SHELF
023 830 777 P013 REPRO FILM CASSETTE BIN
024 851 367 P075 CAGED NUT
025 851 221 P065 HSFHM SCREW M4X16 AC
026 830 046 P015 REPRO CASSETTE BIN SKATE
027 851 350 P105 NUT M4 AC
030 851 212 P045 HSHC SCREW M4X10
031 823 993 P015 SPRING BLADE
032 830 806 P013 MATRIX COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 63 2
9 . 94

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : PAPER REPRO KIT 830 043 G065

Range : 0
F
002 853 313 P015 ” BNC–BNC ” CABLE L=1.5M
003 827 681 G015 MAIN VOLTAGE P.S. CABLE CEI
004 830 062 G015 REPRO REMOTE CONTROL CABLE
005 830 770 G015 WELDED SHELF ( Mod.Mon.Cart )
006 851 212 P055 HSHC SCREW M4X12 AC
007 851 380 P105 WASHER M4
008 017 851 390 P105 LOCKWASHER M4
009 851 206 P445 SHC SCREW M3X10 AC
011 851 383 P275 WASHER 3,2/9X0,8 AC
012 830 933 P015 SHELF SUPPORT ROD (Mod.Mon.Cart )
013 851 374 P085 RIVET TUBTARA M6 SHEET 3–5,5 AC
014 851 350 P125 NUT M6 AC
015 830 805 P013 SONY UP910 COVER (Mod.Mon.Cart ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 63 2
016 851 383 P295 WASHER 4,3/12X1 AC
018 851 355 P105 BRASS NUT M4
9 . 95

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : CCM 620 VISIPLEX
F
Component GEMS- Description R
number number U
861 227 P055 VISIPLEX CCM620 – 1 HARDCOPY IMAG. 50 HZ
861 227 P095 VISIPLEX CCM620 – 1 & 4 HARDCOPY IMAG. 50 HZ
861 227 P105 VISIPLEX CCM620 – 1 & 4 HARDCOPY IMAG. 60 HZ
9 . 96

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Assembly Name : VISIPLEX SPARE LIST

Range : 0
F
Component GEMS- Description Visiplex R
number number reference U
861 372 P015 HIGH VOLTAGE Board 22–20–3799–01

861 372 P025 REGULATOR Board 22–29–10118–01 1
861 372 P035 RECTIFIER BOARD 22–29–10125 1
861 372 P045 COMPUTER INTERCONNECT Bd 22–29–11383 2

861 372 P055 COMPUTER INTERCONNECT (SPS) 22–29–11686 2
861 372 P065 MAIN Board (SPS) 22–29–11680 2
861 372 P075 MAIN Board SINGLE FORMAT 22–29–9791–01 2
861 372 P085 MAIN Board 1+4 ,OLD MOTOR 22–29–9791–03 2
861 372 P095 MAIN Board 1+4 ,NEW MOTOR 22–29–9791–05 2
861 372 P105 HV POWER SUPPLY 34–29–10271 1

861 372 P115 HV POWER SUPPLY (SPS) 15–01–11654 1
861 372 P125 TOROIDAL TRANSFORMER 34–29–10781 2
861 372 P135 LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY 34–29–10978 2
861 372 P145 LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY(SPS) 15–01–059 1
861 372 P155 POWER CORD–220V 01–04–017 2

861 372 P165 POWER CORD–120V 01–04–018 2
861 372 P175 POWER SWITCH 08–04–061 2
861 372 P185 SHUTTER SOLENOID RIGH HAND 10–04–001
861 372 P195 SHUTTER SOLENOID LEFT HAND 10–04–003 2
861 372 P205 KEY BOARD INTERCONNECT ASSBLY 32–29–11212 2
861 372 P215 DARK SLIDE SENSOR ASSBLY 32–29–11326 1

861 372 P225 CRT ASSBLY 32–29–10153–07 2
861 372 P235 BEEPER ASSBLY 34–29–10782 2
861 372 P245 MOTOR 34–29–10788 2

861 372 P255 MOTOR SUPPORT ASSBLY 34–29–11346 2
861 372 P265 FRONT PANEL MEMBRANE SWITCH 34–29–11426 2
861 372 P275 HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION BOARD (LLR) 22–12–0840–5

861 372 P285 OUTPUT BOARD 22–12–1531–1 1
861 372 P295 VERTICAL DEFLECTION BOARD 22–15–11006–2 1
861 372 P305 VIDEO AMPLIFIER 22–15–3636–1 1
861 372 P315 VIDEO AMPLIFIER 22–15–4047 1
861 372 P325 CRT BOARD (LLR) 22–15–4406–1 1
861 372 P335 LINE SMOOTHING BOARD (LLR) 22–15–7433–1 2
861 372 P345 MONITOR MOTHER BOARD 22–29–11314 2
9 . 97

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615
Blank page
9 . 98
Schematics TABLE OF CONTENTS
,$%&)"
$!# '$(&$!# &+
$!# +12V, -12V, +5V power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
$!#
%)"%$ &+
% *#!
Converter - % *#! X Ray head - Divider
Presence safety - Bellows & Thermal safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
&+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VHV regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

&+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Imager 16 STENO CCD 625l (Mis Cables)

SCR Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
&+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Imager 22 STENO CCD 625l (Mis Cables)

I Detection - RAD signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface CCD pwb

&+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface CCD 50 or 60 Hz

Fluoro timer display - ABC hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCD Power Supply pwb
&+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CCD Power Supply

FLUORO kV selection - RAD kV selection . . . . . . . . . . . . .
&+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCD Interface pwb
Mode operation selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCD Interface ( 1/3 )
&+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCD Interface ( 2/3 )
FLUORO HIGHT QUALITY selection CCD Interface ( 3/3 )

FLUORO mA reference generation
Video CCD pwb
mAs reference generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . &
&+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video CCD ( 1/7 )
Filaments heating reference generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video CCD ( 2/7 )
mAs integrator Video CCD ( 3/7 )
&+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Video CCD ( 4/7 )
Filaments heating servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video CCD ( 5/7 )
Filaments heating supply
&+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video CCD( 6/7 )
kV/20 reference generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video CCD ( 7/7 )
kV display CCD Stenoscop Interconnect pwb
mA/mAs display CCD Stenoscop Interconnect ( 1/2 )

&+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CCD Stenoscop Interconnect ( 2/2 )
Exposure PB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0 - 5 minutes Fluoro timer
&+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Collimator control - Collimator logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deflection pwb
Collimator Deflection ( 1/2 )
&+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deflection ( 2/2 )
Imager control - Elapsed time counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching OFF PB Video pwb
&+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video
C Arm UP/DOWN motorisation A. T. Power supply pwb
% *#! - % *#! - % *#! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.T. Power supply

&+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B. T. Power supply pwb
Sweep inversion - Monitor coil rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
$!# Card rack - $!# Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.T. Power supply
&+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Memories Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Edition June 1997 A–
A–i
Blank page Schematic Symbols/Abbreviations
A–ii
SYNOPTIC MODULE 8
IMAGER
D.A.P.
TV MONITOR Electronic Module fixed MODULE 7 MODULE 6
grid COLLIMATOR
MDA Monitor cart
ÇÇ
Iris
Memory 9A1
ÇÇ
A2TP3 250mV
System Transpanel Flat field
ÇÇ
IMAGE
TV CAMERA
ÇÇ
INTENSIFIER X Ray Head
REPROGRAPH
(Option)
A2TP2
100mV flat Ion
Chamber
3A19 Minuterie A2TP7 = field video 2mm copper
-2.1vdc 2.1vdc preamp = 3/32"
6 mA
Pin 6 =ov when ratemeter
Hysteresis ABC
Measure mA
KV
Analogic / Digital G90
Conversion
110 kv Limit ADC Magnitude comparator

3A9 CONSIGNE KV / mA Select
Digital / Analogic capa
FC 110 120KV aux
Lim. 110
Conversion 3A12 3A19 capa Converter
KV / mA Dem x SCR prepo
G20 G68 Main
G21 Reference voltage KV / 20 1v =20kvp Int4Clk CONTROL Scr MODULE 4
Foot switch, exp Main
4585 DAC Trou Clk switch, and Scr
40 kv Limit 2A1 interlocks half
way test points
FC 40
BCD to 7 Segments Decoder MODULE G
Lim. 40
G18
U Stop mAs
G138
A G19 EPROM G172 terminates
Magnitude comparator D Stop mAs Sec. GR
A>B G108 exposure when
G126 4585 G67 7447 actual mAs =
A<B selected mAs
4585 B Dis. KV
BCD to Decimal Decoder mA 3A26 5A1
C
KV Measure
mA Filaments Heating
G22 Selected Heating Power
2 x 4 Bit latch
Counter Rad Reference voltage mA
G69 4028 + pulse for Rad
G48
Logic BP G31 4508 - pulse for Fluoro
+ KV Digital / Analogic
4516 Conversion
G94 Fluoro Reference voltage mA
mA Demand
KV manual
– Clock DAC
SC
Counter
2A1
G138 G97 Kv Demand
UP / Down
G125 4508 EPROM MODULE G
mA manual BUS KV/20 Code C0 – C7
4516 G120
G137
G136
HOLD KV SC
7447
Maintains kvp in pulsed fluoro so 2 x 4 Bit latch EPROM mA / mAs
it doesn't start each pulse at 40 G66 Counter BCD to 7 Segments
kvp demand G89 EPROM
Decoder MODULE 5 MODULE 9
3A7 AD / KV G90
mA – mAs
4516 G121
Selected not actual
F KV/mA
Alimentation
FC0
FC1
Interface Mains
ER HLC TH
Bin. Dec. Power supply
FCGR
FC0 FC1 FCGR

5TR1 9TR1
mA(S) UP
+ Logic BP
A= B EPROM
– mA–mAs
2 x 4 Bit latch 2 x 4 Bit latch G132
G118 G119 G133
EPROM
G65 4508 4508 DAC Reference voltage mAs
2A1 G87
G88
MODULE G 5R SC SC
500W 4585
Cons. mAs
B A
mA(S) UP G134
Magnitude comparator G135
ER HLC TH
Clock 4516
Counter mA – mAs
A–1
MODULE 5
9PL1
MODULE 91 MALE FEMELLE – FEMALE
1PS1
LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY
PL1
D.A.P.
Interface
F2 C1
F4 F3
See configuration page A–38

LV SUPPLY
9Tb1
9K1
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ o
9R1 – 2E2
9R2 – 1E
9Tb3
9TR1
A–2
150
MAINS AND LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLIES
MODULE 9 – INTERFACE
See chapter 3,
§ 3.2.1.1
9R1,9R2 surge
9R2
1E 25W resistors
9PL1 Carm plug or jumper plug for monitor
stand alone
1
9R1 33
2E2 25W 9F2 32
A 9Sm1
2 1
1A
2
MODULE 4 – CONVERTER
9Tb3
1 9TR1 58 20
13 14 8 12 9Tb1.6
59 21
4E10
Stenoscop 2 Series 6000 / 9000
2 LINE1 LOAD1 43 44 7 275V
60 22 C.C.D. – M.D.A.
A 6 11 Rev. Date Serial No Avt. Mod
C1 A 15/07/96 .
0MF47 5 155V 4CR7
MAINS C 275V 011B
0 10/10/96
228V 4
10 1 09/01/97
JumĆ to inverter
per 3 4Tb1. 2 20/06/97
55V
2 7 8
D 53 17 c
LINE2 a a
LOAD2 B 1 9 54 18 b
3 9K1 0V 9Tb1.5 55 19 d
2 M Time delay 1
d
AUX. COIL A1 A2 remove jumper for "demo mode"
9Tb1. 9F3 1
trip coil 2 1 5A
4 2 9F4 4Tb1.5 1–5
3C 1A
21 22 Monitor 1 3 2
120V 220V
MODULE 3 – CARDS RACK
3B 541A 2 K1 61 4Tb1.6
33 34 9
23
031B
Monitor 33 34
3PL1.H 017A
B Monitor 2 10
and 3PL5.B
3PL3.X
121B
541A 11
accesories 1A1.PL1.1 3A1.a3 3A7.b35 3PL1.B 016D
8
9E3 48 24
1E8
DALLE 1 004C
Gnd 1 49 25
LOW VOLTAGE PS 122A 3PL3 201B
50 26
1
5Tb1. J 3A5 3A9 3A12 3A26
0V 7 OUT 2 X 902 +12 V
7 1 3A3. a1 a1 3A7 a1 a1 a1 a1
DR4 12,1V/2A + 12,1V 3A19a1
12 1–1 b1 b1 b1 b1
DR7 13
27V SENSE +
3PL1.M
0V 3
017A
5TR1 SENSE – W
8 0V
1 4 + 12V 3PL5 2 7 0V 9PL1–24 3PL1.S
PL4 E2 004C
PL11 27 40 B +12V 230V 1E2 1E1 5 3A1.a35
1 3 X 901 201B
007B
K27 D24 3 3PL1.F
A 3A3. 275V 9
E2
114F
26 39 230 v + 12V
7
5
Yellow/ 2 a36 1 OUT 3 L 3A5 3A7 3A9 3A12 3A19 3A26
Blue green 5F2 1E1 1 12V/1A 0V
10 1–4 4 0V
9Tb1.7 24 37 119D 3A 3A3. a3 a3 a3 a3 a3 a3 a3
Brown 5Tb1.3 6 b3 b3 b3 b3
0V 007B
R29
PL4 MODULE 3 1 2 1A1.PL1.2
C R28
100E 15K4 D25
9Tb1.12 29 36
OUT 1
122A
3A1.a13
27V Emergency off 10 5,05V/10A 1 1–2 2
R30 F31 5 + 5,05V
+ 2 3A5 3A7 3A9 3A12 3A19 3A26
K26 C32 1A K1
buttons on 5E20 + 5,05V 1–2 M
470MF 1K5 4 15 –12 V
5 console SENSE 3A3. a4 a4 a4 a4 a4 a4 a4
2 16 b4 b4 b4 b4
21 22 6 SENSE
102D 150 16 127V 5
9A1 TRANSPANEL 002B 0V E2 1E2
140 210 CHAUFFAGE FILAMENTS
FILAMENTS HEATING 12
Keeps k26 from energizing Opens after time delay. If cable plug 9PL1 is 0V
E2 K 3A3. 3A5 3A7 3A9 3A12 3A19 3A26
+5 V
OUT 4 2
090D
until time delay is reached disconnected it closes and trips breaker by energizing 17 24V/2A + 24V
11
1
1A1.Tb3 a2 a2 a2 a2 a2 a2 a2
and K1 opens 3–1 122C b2 b2 b2
K26 21 27V
1
ALIM. 90W
861371P015
240V 228V 220V 208V 200V 120V 108V 100V 22
122C Tb2.
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 CARD RACK GROUND
23 5E20 2–2
2
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 1A1 1E5
50Hz MOTEUR
A 50Hz 6 A 6 A 50Hz 6 A 50Hz 6 A 50Hz 6 A 50Hz 6 A 50Hz 6 A 50Hz 6
19 21V ARCEAU
60Hz 560Hz 5 60Hz 5 60Hz 5 60Hz 5 60Hz 5 60Hz 5 60Hz 5 1
121/130
D C C C C C C D C D C D
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Tb3.
20
3 3 3 B 3 B 3 3 3 B 3 2 MODULE 5
2 2 2 2 2 2 B 2 2
D D D D D
B 1 B 1 B 1 1 1 B 1 1 1
001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 / 010

A–3
TOC Preinstallation Installation Functional Check Service Procedures Renewal Parts Schematics
. TOC Theory
ÇÇÇÇÇ
PANELS 1 – 3 – 4 – 5
MODULE 1
E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E7 E10 E11 E13
ALIM.
B.T.
A
PL1 L.V.
PL2 P. SUP
A
A PL3
A PL4
A PL5
A PL6
MODULE 3
1
R1
1
R2 C3 C4
1C1
Tb1
1 MODULE 4 1
R3 R4 R5
R6
R8 R10
R9 R11
C3 C4
MODULE 5
R5
R6
R7
R8
A–4
3PL1
PL1 PL3
Y 1
3A19 3PL3 LASER P.B. 3PL3 7A2

H 2
a17 C X +12V LASER
036B X RAY
008B CONTROL
1R3 a16 B Hand Switch
1 2
A Stepped down inverter 031B
2A4
+12V 0V M
4K7
50W current for scr safety 007B 007C
1 2
Caution MODULE 4 4Tb1
6PL1 MODULE 6
measure ONDULEUR – CONVERTER CUVE RX – X RAY HEAD
1C1 0MF47
voltage 1 L
before 4TR2 3 A
servicing 5 C voltage doubler caps
2
4DS1 4A1 4CR1
2 x 22K 7 E CR1
4C1 G
PL1 C365N
5Tb2–1 9 C35 1K 3A12
5MF
4C2 5 4x
1R4 6PL1 E5 E3 kV/mA
2MF 6
470E VA C28 2K2
VA
4R2 4CR2 7W
2500pF 2x100M IN
PL1 OUT PL2 PL1
237K 1 1R2 C16
005A L1 4A1 P IN
130–450pF
OUT
4CR3 1R1 2 B 2500pF FA
4E10 4TR1 R18
3x 4 D R 2
4C6 ~
1 + mesure kv
4C7 + 0E68
F CR2 10K AA
220K 4CR7 3/5 E1 50W 6 R15
220K 380v 4C5 3 100K E1 9 7 VA
275v 4000MF R14
4CR4
4 8 H 7
C19 200K
3 8
~2 – 2200pF
4Tb1–8 8 4 9 021D
L3 C11
005B 4R4 CR3 2200pF R13
B 470K
4C3
4CR5 PL1
1
CR7
SKT12F 7
5
R12 E4
R17
200K 8 10
VC
AC
2MF
2 10DS 4A2 4x
S 4
100K
4C4 4R3 4CR6
5MF 4E7
PL2 470E
7W 2500pF
FC 10K
C365N C9
50W 1
PL2 R10 R11 2x100M
6 5 2 130–450pF
22E 22E 2 x 22K
4A2 6
2500pF
VC VC
4A2 IN C27 2K2
OUT
CR4 Tb24 E6 E2
4A1 2 C34 1K
Insert mA meter here W33
N 1 10 4 6
1
R4 R7 R8 R10 mesure
PL1 3K65 3K65 3K65 3K65
6
mA SC
1 C6 021E
SELECT. CAPA R5
100K
AUX. 100E0 5
2 M 6 7 4
Adds 4C4 for Rad
3
16 mesure
6A1 5 1
mA Gr
CAPA PREPO 15
PL2 3X
CI DIVISEUR
dicharges 4C3 and 1 K 30S6 021F
4C4 1.8 9 2 2
C 7
5A1 0.5 10 1 5
MAIN SCR 4CR1 6
PUISSANCE
11
CHAUFFAGE HD281
MAIN SCR 4CR6 10 081–090 2 J
3PL1–S 3PL3–W
3A19 035B–E
COMMANDE SCR
3PL1 3A19 Inhibits exposure
3 A a22 SEC. BELLOWS 031C
Bellows switch
>70degrees C. 6Sa1
1E4
2 B + 12 V 008B
Stenoscop 2 Series 6000 / 9000 Thermal switch G166.B
>50 degrees C. 6SaTh2 b15 b16
3A9.b7 R507 R509 3 R504 3A7.a16
C.C.D. – M.D.A. 11 V 4
47K 2K2 470E

054F
Rev. Date Serial No Avt. Mod TH 071A C505 TH a29 a28
C508
. R506 10K 832 502 G015 10K Lights warning light and
A 15/07/96 100K
0 10/10/96
3A3 DIAPHRAGMES 2 disables High Dose Fluoro
1 09/01/97
3A26.a1
D 2 20/06/97 + 12 V a11 a12 a22 a23 b17 b18 a21 a22
MODULE 8 008C
3A3 3A5 3A7 3A9
IMAGEUR IMAGER
All boards plugged in before HV inverter can fire
(exception 3A1 digital interface) Enable for main scr 031F
a32 a20 a19
12 V CI
SECURITE PRESENCE CI
3A19 3A26
PB PRESENT SAFETY
011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019
/ 020
A–5
3A12 kV mA 829 825 G025
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4011 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
4040 VCC
Q11 Q10 Q8 Q9 Reset Clock Q1
12 Bit Binary counter
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Q12 Q6 Q5 Q7 Q4 Q3 Q2
40106 VCC GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A–6
start exposure 3A19.a18 G33.D

a14 12 103B Presence of xray
SEXP 11 a13 3A3.b12
PRX
035B R15 13
220K
+12V
E1 116C
A R63 R14
a1 R60 2 LF356 6K8 G32.A 10K
+12V +12V R62 R64
6 1 2
C177 C176 C56 C130 C204 C501 100K A55 +12V +12V
a3 E6 10MF 100K 100K 100K 100K 100K
+12V 3 4K7 4K7 Tube arc interupts
0V R61
R59 D65 exposure up to four
Card rack C179 C178 C57 C129 C205 C500 42K2 R52 D53
10MF 100K 100K 100K 100K 100K 100K a5 3A19.a25 times
a4 1M C54
–12V –12V TROU CLQ
R44 R51 470K +12V 031D

R58
5K62 47K
1K87
2 G32.F G32.E 16 G32.D
D49 3A19.a26
R47 R50 12 11 10 6 9 8 a9
6 13 Q3 INT 4 CLQ
R45 A46 G31
kv command 6
40K2
3
33K 2K2 4040 031C Goes low on forth
7 G30.A 10 R3 tube arc to
1v =20kv 3A19.b5 a12 R11 R12 A152.B CONSIGNE kV/20 LF356
D48 1 2
C
Tube arc counter 3K3 terminate exposure
5 025D 028E –12V B
CONSIGNE kV/20
2K2 2K2
kv drops 8 11
for good
098A R10 C13
C42 R40
below 30 G32.B D4
B 100K 10K
kv = tube G30.C
8
10 3 4
5082H
10K 4K7 5 6 9
D43 arc
R41
G30.B 33K G33.C
3A19.a5 a6 R6 R7 3 4
OX a15
Order xray 10K 2K2
RX REQ
starts in steno
031A R5 C8 +12V
220K 10K
goes to digital +12V
and back to here R76
10E G33.B
R81 6
12K1 C77 4 3A12 CI kV / mA – 2

+12V 8 10MF 5
+12V +12V R80 7 3
829 825 G025
D224
R86 220E
Q79
Presence of 100K D83 6 555 2 All unmarked diodes are 1N6263
current in inverter R9
G32.C C82 4 3
3A19.a29 220K C85
a11 6 R84 1K 1
5
C PRI 2
R89 G33.A
040B 1K 2K2 1 5 C78
71K5 Stenoscop 2 Series 6000 / 9000
G34.D 2 Q92.A
8 KHZ D139
R87 D88 10K
9 8
R91
C.C.D. – M.D.A.
3A19.a34 a35 R140 1 3
CLOCK 2K2 Rev. Date Serial No Avt. Mod
1v = 20kv 22K
4K7
A 15/07/96 .
031E R141 E5 R133
4
R101 R93 C95
6A1 220K
2 71K5 0 10/10/96
PL2 PL1 E8 1v = 1kv R181
6K8
6 R103 2 301K Q92.B 7 1K
1 09/01/97
R304 10K 2
D134 A138
6
R135 R136 R100 R98 8 R96 2 2 20/06/97
3 6 6
R189 R302 2
R216 A132 LF356
15K4 A102
9 7 121K0 2K 3 1K 2K2 3 6
Va 6 LF356
30K1 31K6 2K2 A97
LF356 R104 5
anode 46K4 953K0 A315 R309 C137 G34.F
3
Real time kv C303 3 4K7 LF356
3 8 100pF R308 15K4 D99
feedback LF356 2 10K0 R131 12 13
R105
4K87
Mesure kV R305 10K0
6
CONSIGNE kV/20
301K
Gnd 4 9 A312 R113 R117
1M R310 3
C301 R184 022B 95K3 R115
D cathode 100pF 10K0
LF356 R232
4M7
kV COMPOSITE
027E
R110
9
11K0
R116
+12V
8 10 R186 R185 2 121K0 R311 10K0 8 6 10K0
R127
Vc 10K
A114.C R123
6 R111 10 10K0 7 2 6K8 G34.A G34.B
46K4 953K0 A180 LM324
A114.B R126 R128 3A19.a19
121K 2 4
018B 3 R118 5 100K
A122
6 1 3 DEM X
100K LM324
E7 1v =1kv LF356 3 4K7 2K2 Pulse stream to fire
R112
D119 R120 a18 031D inverters
R300 +12V 20K5
2
1M
D125
1 10K
R307 2 LF356 A114.A
D324 3
R121
R316 6 –12V
23K7 10K A313 LM324 E2
+12V 10K R124
3 Desired Kvp
R320 C322 E4 100K
+12V
R318 023B CONSIGNE kV/20
R171 R162 R16
11K0
1M 1K
R170 6K8 R155 47K 10K
R500 024D kV COMPOSITE 2 G34.C
R319 R173 Actual Kvp R161 R163 6 a16 A26.a24
100K 6
4K7 10K 10K R156 A160 5 kV 85 o/o
11K0 2 LF356 13
3 15K 2K2
6
D325 D507 R508 R172 14
081D
R317 A314 A114.D 5K36
R158 D159
E 23K7
R306 3
1K 2K2 12
LM324
D164
10K R321 C323 10K0

D174 R157
–12V 1M 1K 30K1
10 6 R197 R96 R195
9
Fluoro mA 95K3 95K3
2 187K0
8 a27 3A19.a28
C198 D194 D193 A152.C 120 kV
Mesure mA Sc 100K 6 10 exceeded max kv of
A192 LM324 031C
018D C199 3 110 (kvp reached
100K R200 LF356
R202 R201 187K0
120kvp)
7 4 3A19.a23
a8
95K3 95K3
Mesure mA Sc
081E 1v =1mA
6 3 R210 R209 R208
13
Rad mA 95K3 95K3 2 187K0 14 a7
3A26.a32
C211 D207 D206 A152.D Mesure mA Gr
Mesure mA Gr 4K7
A203
6 12
R153 081C 1v = 10mA
LM324
F 018D R215
C212
4K7
R214
R213
3
LF356 R151 2 10K0
5 1 187K0
10K0 1 a10
95K3 95K3 A152.A (Mesure mA Gr)
3
LM324
021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030
A–7
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4012 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4023 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 PL1
40106 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4093 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Dual D Flip Flop

CL D R S Q Q
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4013 0 0 0 0 1 3A19 COMMANDE SCR 2 828 982 G035
Vcc
Q Q C R D S 1 0 0 1 0
X 0 0 Q Q
Q Q C R D S
X X 1 0 0 1
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X X 0 1 1 0
X X 1 1 1 1
1 : High level 0 : Low level X : Don’t care
Dual MONOSTABLE
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
4538 Vcc
C R/C CD +TR –TR Q Q
T =RX X CX
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A–8
+12V Schematic Symbols/Abbreviations
Half way test point: flip S76a closed,
R25 +12V
Fluoro five minute pull 3A1 and fluoro. you should be 100K R24 R21
a13
time shut off able to make xray but will not get any R49 3A3.b18 116C Fluoro
C22
3A12.a26 a30
monitor video. This seperates 47K
2K2
22K 100K
R48 filament
4’ 57’’ mda/generator problems. G119.C SYX SC enable
13
106B 12 10K 10
R27 a15 3A26.a28 goes high
G113.F 12
11 G113.B RAD at 5 minute
OX A OX 3A1.a15 3A7.a7 3A12.a6 a5 R4 R61
13 3 4
C60 R56 R58 13 12 2 G114.A
038A
11
+12V +12V
470E C28 081F fluoro time
1
220E
3 10K out
from 201E 051A 021B S76.A
R3
1K
C59
2K2 G112.D 10K
R55
2K2
1
+12V
OX 3A1.a17 3A3.b28 a6 8 D57
digital 220K 10K 10K
C147 C160
R159
330K
D158
PRE Rad
201C 116F R71 a10 3A26.a31filament
via 3a1 SX 9
10 13
D143
R144
10K
enable
R62 032F +12V
1 2
3A7.b8 +12V 2MF2
D156 470E C19
1K
+12V 11 T1 T2 6 081D
R78 12
220E
G115.C 3 Q 10K
066A D8 D10 D9 100K R34 G117.B R145 R146 G118.B +TR
10K 5 6 G155.A
038A 5 4 G112.A
5
4538 SEXP 032D 021A 116A
1 R35 R88 4 5
G114.C 13 G114.D SEXP
220K 2K2 –TR R84 Start
3A7.a34 RAD R5 S76.D If closed then
3 7 8 11 a18 3A12.a14 3A3.a17
a7 R7 G118.A RAD 6 Q
exposure
BPCL 2 fluoro disabled 4K7 2K2
1
G113.A R 10 12
C86 2
330E C85 3A5.b8
102C 47K 2K2 +12V from hand switch D87 3 1 2 G115.B 038A 8 4 D157 9 10K D31
C6 10K
007B +12V R64 R77 when Rad 2 3 041D
100K 1 3 4
10K selectecd
PL1 PL3 3PL3 100K R37 R90 4
038A G116.A +12V R70
8 G118.C
6 3 1 5
X R79 G117.A 47K
RAD 10 9
4K7 2K2 C213
2
R11 R69 S76.C C89 1K G113.C G112.C
B V a12 9 8 1K
R36
100K 10K R212 R214
5 6
9
10
R17 a11
SYX GR
47K 2K2 +12V 8
X RAY R65 C66 C74 R40 R91 R38 4K7 2K2 470E C18
2A4 100K R80 10K 10K
Hand switch 10K
100K 4K7 2K2 220K
038A +12V(A)
7 2 6 G112.B R39 C93
RAD 4 100K 10K R95 PREPOSITIONNEMENT
A R16 R15 S76.B E239
007C a9 5 R236 C344 CAPA
PEDALE DE SCOPIE R43 R96 220K D174 Q238 R237 1K5 100NF
+12V
FLUORO FOOT SWITCH
R63
47K 2K2
C14 If closed then Fluoro only 4K7 2K2 C176 R242 R241
2N2222 Q235 PL1
5Tb1 R101 220E
BD140
10K 100K C94
–1 No RAd R42
10K One pulse 1K 4K7 Q324
100K 220K
3PL6–L 22K R175 R243
a20 TR248 2N5064
–8 +12V R47 R100 at exposure 6K8
R240 15E4 IT235 R251 3 1 16
E124 3K3
PL1–A 016E start D246
a22 2K2 2K2 BZX85C12 D249 10E
SEC BELLOWS – 12 V R245 C244 2
1N5061 R252
R46 C99 C255
5E21 3A26.a21 085D a23 10K R130
100E
10K D323 220E
STOP mAs 100K
D247 22K 4CR7
10K C253 BZX83C6V2
C 3A12.a9 030B a26 031E 032C Clock
3A19 CI COMMANDE SCR2
1N5061 220K D250 R325 012C
Inhibit INT 4 CLQ
G161.B C322
BZX83C3V3 220E
15
3A12.a27 030E a28 828 982 G035
exposure 120 kV 032D 033D Clock 4 3 –12V(C) 100NF
E304
+12V(A)
a35 +12V
Q1 +12V +12V
033E R301 SELECTION CAPA
R111 C339
Pulse a36
Q1 +12V R127 038A R307 Q303 1K5 100NF AUXILIAIRE
033E 032D 10K D54 G122.B 10K R302
stream to +12V C109 R110 10E G161.C 2N2222 Q300
R53 RAD 5
4 6 R306 BD140
regulate Clock R219
5 220E
R32 2K2 1K 2K2 2K05
C126 6
inverter 100K G120.A 8 10MF 4K7
1 G119.B R221 R218 Q320
3A12.a18 R33 E166 R305 R308
firing rate DEM X a19 3
DEM X
3
6
7 3 +12V
15E4
TR313
R316 2N5064
4 3K3 IT235 2
via closed 10K 2 G128 D311 3 1
030D
+12V
032E 5
R163
3K65 619E0
D220
555
D314 2
RAD
loop kv W165 2 5 R154 BZX85C12 R310 C309 10E R317
470K C153 1N5061
R41 TROU CLQ 6 100K 100E 220E C321
control 100K G119.A C129 +12V
10K D341 22K 4CR4
032D 033D E164 D312 C319 R318
tube spits upto 43A12.a5 a25 R92
2
9
G120.D 035A 6
C162
10K 4
10K
100K 1N5061 220K D315
BZX83C6V2
R343 220E
D TROU CLQ
3K3
1
8
12
11 SEXP 8
G120.C 4
13
5
T1B T2B
14
C340
BZX83C3V3 220E
1
012C
030B 13
10 5 Q
G120.B G114.B G113.D –12V(C) 100NF
R184 TROU CLQ 9 5 G155.B
PRI 4 R140 9 8 4538 C198 R188 R261
G118.D G115.E 031D 11 9 +12V(A)
Presence of Inverter 039B 10K
031D 13
6 +12V
Q
11 11 10 10K 1K5
current to prevent cross Clock TROU CLQ 10K 4K7
+12V 12 R187 R257 C327
firing of scrs 033C 12 033C 14 MAIN SCR
+12V
3 1
6K8 D186 Q259 R258
1K5 100NF
R206
46K4
Clock C Q 2N2222 Q256
R44
LF356 R205 R207 Alternately fires G121.A –12V E260 220E
BD140
6K8 2
G122.C main scrs 5 D 2 031E
a27 R45 R98 6
8 Q Q330
f max A204 22K 220E R208 10 Q1 R263 R264 TR269
3 C209 R272
2N5064
2K2 4K7 100K G161.F R S G122.D G161.E 10K 15E4 IT235 3 1
11
+12V 4K7 9 DEM X 13 D267
D97 R201 12 10 R262
Q210 13 4 6 7 11 11
BZX85C12
R266 C265
D270 10E 2 R273
R199 2N2222 032D 12 1N5061 220E
2M2 4K7 100E
10K
C277
10K0 D329
+12V D268 22K 4CR6
C275 BZX83C6V2 R274
1N5061
Stenoscop 2 Series 6000 / 9000 R200 9
8 220K D271 R331
220E
220E
10 012C
E C.C.D. – M.D.A. 21K5 R183
4K7 Q185
D S
Q
13
C328
BZX83C3V3
–12V(C) 100NF
2N2907 G121.B
C196 C193 E282
Rev. Date Serial No Avt. Mod 10MF 10MF
11
C
12 +12V(A)
R179 D180 Q
A 15/07/96 . R
D182 D107
BZX83C6V2 1K BZX83C6V2 10 R279 C333
0 10/10/96 R285 1K5 MAIN SCR
R181 R177
G122.A 10K Q281 R280
100NF
1 09/01/97 R192 2K26 4K7
2
G161.D 2N2222 Q278
D191 10K R105 R106 R284
2 20/06/97 3 9 8
220E
BD140
1 10K 1K 4K7
D139 Q298
Q1 C108 R283 R286 TR291 2N5064
G161.A 100pF 3K3 15E4 IT235 R294 7
3A12.a35 R52 2 Clock 031E D289 3 1
a34 1 D292
Clock G216.A BZX85C12
R288 C287 10E 2 R295
C104 330E 033C 032A R68 R72 R194 R195 2 R217 1N5061
220E
021C 1 G216.B G216.C G216.F Q178
100E
10K D335
C299
1K SX D290 22K 4CR1
47E 47E 220K 47E 4K7 4 6 12 2N2222 C297 BZX83C6V2 R296
3 5 13 1N5061
C67 C197 D293 R337 220E
012C
R215
G216.D G216.E 4K7 10MF On if missing 220K
BZX83C3V3
220E 6
a21 9 10 11 C328
F C211 470E
8
12 volts –12V(C) 10034
3A26.a20
10K G113.E Do not hang scope in this
a32 R51 R102 10 R190
12 V CI
11
off if mising area. It may trigger scr
018D R50 10K 10K 4K7
12 volt daisy chain 220K C103
10K
Q189 12v unintentionally
2N2222
interlock thru all
boards
031 032 033 034 035
A–9
PL1
3A19 COMMANDE SCR 2 828 982 G035
A–10
3 Schematic Symbols/Abbreviations
+12V
R20
G115.A
A 3A7.a29 a14
100K
R73 R26
1 2 R12 a8 3A26.a36
GR RAD
3K3 1K 470E 081E
C75 C13
066C 10K
10K
RAD 032B 033C
034B 3A12.a32 3A3.a8 3A1.a22
103D 111D D
G115.F
13 12
RAD 032B 032A
+12V
DETECTION I
013A +12V
R167
4Tb1 PL3 10K0
4L1 4TR1
R123- refer to R168 +12V
1b B a16 4 +12V Job card rg 203 10K0 E172
D29 R123
4A1 50K R169
1 2 R81 R83 R150 E125 6K8
R131 2
6K8
B 10K 10K 2
LF356
G115.D
10K0 6 R171 R173 a29 3A12.a11
R149 R152 D133 A137
E1 2b C a17 R30 D82 6
9 8 3
4K7
PRI
1E A135 2K2
Current sense from inverter 3 2W 3
4K7 2K26
021C
D170
4L3 – 12 V D151 R132
R138 C136
R141 R148 2K15 PRI
10K0 1M C134 10K0 22pF 031D

1K
R142
237K0
W350 +12V
–12V
+12V
W351
a1 R226
+ 12 V +12V(A)
10E
C231 C229 C202 C224 C222

100K 10MF 100K 10MF 100K
W354
a3 E233 E234
0V C342 C326 C332 C338
100K 100K 100K 100K
C232 C230 C203 C225 C223

100K 10MF 100K 10MF 100K
W352 L227
R228
a4 –12V(C)
– 12 V
W353
C –12V
10E 100H
3A 19 COMMANDE SCR2
MASSE CARD RACK 828982G035
–12V All unmarked diodes are 1N6263

C.C.D. – M.D.A.
Rev. Date Serial No Avt. Mod
A 15/07/96 .
0 10/10/96
1 09/01/97
D 2 20/06/97
036 037 038 039 040

A–11
BA
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4093 VCC
PL1
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
74LS100 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3A5 MINUTERIE BA
832 501 G015
PL2
COUNTER 7490 BCD COUNT SEQUENCE

Count OUTPUT
Q0 / 12 Q1 / 9 Q2 / 8 Q3 / 11
0 L L L L
1 H L L L
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
2 L H L L
7490 GND
CPO Q0 Q3 Q1 Q2
3 H H L L
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
CP1 MR1 MR2 MS1 MS2 4 L L H L 7447
VCC
VCC 5 H L H L g f a b c d e
BI/
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 6 L H H L B C LT RBO RBI D A
7 H H H L GND
8 L L L H 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 H L L H PIN
MAN 71A
A B C D a b c d e f g 1 Cathode a
MODE SELECTION 0 L L L L L L L L L L H 1 14 2 Cathode f
RESET / SET INPUTS OUTPUT 1 H L L L H L L H H H H a 3 Commun Anode
2 13
MR 1 / 2 MR 2 / 3 MS 1 / 6 MS 2 / 7 Q0 / 12 Q1 / 9 Q2 / 8 Q3 / 11 2 L H L L L L H L L H L 6 NC
3 f
H H L X L L L L 3 H H L L L L L L H H L b 7 Cathode e
4 L L H L H L L H H L L g
H H X L L L L L 8 Cathode d
11
X X H H H L L H 5 H L H L L H L L H L L e c
9 Cathode DP
L X L X Count 6 L H H L H H L L L L L 10 10 Cathode c
X L X L Count 7 H H H L L L L L H H H 11 Cathode g
6 d 9
L X X L Count 8 L L L H L L L L L L L DP 13 Cathode b
X L L X Count 9 H L L H L L L H H L L 7 8 14 Commun Anode
A–12
+ 5V + 5V + 5V PL1 PL2
+ 5V a1
+ 5V + 5V
divide by ten
R219 051A 101B
G184 b7
50 HZ free running oscillator R218 b1
A G142.A G143 DS15
3A12-a30 a5 R4
1
3
G158 R217
b3
R216
PRX CP b2
1K
2 G144 R215
b5
00.01
106B R37 R221
680E b6
R220
b4
7 x 150E
+ 5V + 5V
reset total time
+ 5V R226
divide by 6- 60 sec/min G185 a6
R225
G142.B
R224
a2 DS16 Fluoro
PL1 PL1 4
G159 a5
R39
Sm 19 D6 47K 5
6
R223
a4 00.10 time
R222 a8
a36 a6 R5 R38
b3 9
G142.C
R228
a7
totalizer
8
100E 330E R227 a3
C70 C3 10
100K 4MF7 7 x 150E
051C
2A1 3A7 G142.D + 5V

13 + 5V
MODULE G AD / kV 11
12
B 3A5 MINUTERIE R233 b13
832 501G015 divide by 10 G186 R232 b8 DS17
G160 R231 b12
R230 b10 01.00
R229 b15
R235
PL1-a1 045A b14
R234
b9
a2 PL2-a7 131A 7 x 150E
+ 5V + 5V b11
C178 C179 R236
PL2-a4 10MF
100K 220E
a1 111A + 5V
+ 12V + 12V + 5V
C80 C181 C111 PL2-b13 131E
100K 100K
10MF R241
a3 PL2-a12 a13
0V 051F G187 R240 a9
E214 G161 R239
DS18
C182 C183 C110 a12
10MF 100K 100K
R238
a11 10.00
a4 R237 a15
– 12V – 12V R243
a14
PL2-b6 + 12V With 2.1vdc at R242
a10
a22 7 x 150E
12 volt interlock 111A CdeRX adjust
PRESENCE CI R79 R65 for 0 volts 2A1
4K7 D46 824 607 G015
C 017D a23 out at A82 pin 6 MODULE G
R107 C280
R65 D84
20K 22K
1K
A74.B
R115 R85 R47 IH5020CPA
C72
6 8 R60 response
4K7
1M 100K0 680K R60 a13 3A1-a23
D83 5 7 1M
2 sample and hold E
– 12V C113 + 12V 3A7-b29
High if error 6 integrator a7
3A3-a25 R108 A73 kV/20 AUTO Analog 1v =20 kv
100K >.87 volts 3
R122 R126 058B
120D R35
2
15K
R125 6
10K
a9 3A7-a28
2.1 vdc at 6 R86 R11 1M
7
D127 G141.D
1K69
2 LF356 2
proper b9 R10 6 R80 A82 1
10K
R124 A121.B 12
11 A74.A 058B
brightness
(250mV flat
Cde RX A71
3
LF356 100K 2K2
3
A121.A
5
13 1 3
10K 3
field video at 120D 10K
R81 R66 r66 gain 10K
R123 C.C.D. – M.D.A.
monitor R41 6K8
3PL2
10K
470K C109 + 12V 2 4
1M R36
X b7
10K
Abc "deadband" adjusted for 1.75 volts + 12V 9K09 A 15/07/96 .
accross R67. mA is a function of kvp (via R68
10K0 R120 0 10/10/96
eproms). This circuit prevents oscillation if 10K
– 12V 1 09/01/97
+.87v R119 9
3A19-a18 b8 R9 R40 on the edge of eprom step. D128 G141.C 2 20/06/97
Start D R67 8 8
G141.A G141.B
SEXP 5K R118 10K A121.C 10 5 5
R15 3A7-a6
exposure 4K7 2K2 10 b13
035B C8 9 4 4
Goes low when kv is
-.87v 10K R129 HOLD kV
4K7
HYSTERESIS ABC R69 R117 6 6 470E C13
R45
22K
1K 051A satisfied and pulsed fluoro
3A1-a33 b14 R12 100K R44 All unmarked diodes are 1N6263 10K0
Pulsed fluoro 1M
high if error more is selected
Selected HOLD kV – 12V negative than -.87
4K7 2K2
E C14 volts
100K
041 042 043 044 045 046047048 049

/ 050
A–13
4 Bit Magnitude Comparator Dual D Flip Flop

CL D R S Q Q
INPUTS 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 OUTPUTS 4013 0 0 0 0 1
4585 COMPARING CASCADING Vcc
A3 B3 A > B A B AB
A3>B3 X X X X X 1 0 0 1 X 0 0 Q Q
Cascading Inputs
Q Q C R D S
B2 A2 A = B A > B A B2 X X X X 1 0 0 1 GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X X 0 1 1 0
A3=B3 A2=B2 A1>B1 X X X 1 0 0 1
A3=B3 A2=B2 A1=B1 A0>B0 X X 1 0 0 1 X X 1 1 1 1
A3=B3 A2=B2 A1=B1 A0=B0 0 0 1 0 0 1
A3=B3 A2=B2 A1=B1 A0=B0 0 1 1 0 1 0
A3=B3 A2=B2 A1=B1 A0=B0 1 0 X 1 0 0 Binary UP / DOWN Counter
CL CI U/D PE R ACTION
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
A3=B3 A2=B2 A1=B1 A0<B0 X X X 1 0 0 4516 X 1 X 0 0 No Count
VCC
A3=B3 A2=B2 A1<B1 X X X X 1 0 0 CLOCK Q3 P3 P2 Q2 UP / Reset 0 1 0 0 Count UP
Preset Carry Down
A3=B3 A2<B2 X X X X X 1 0 0 enable Q4 P4 P1 IN Q1 Carry OUT 0 0 0 0 Count DOWN
A3<B3 X X X X X X 1 0 0 GND X X X 1 0 Preset
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 X X X X 1 Reset
A–14
R304 1K Hz
a7 R53 R302 C159 R160 R161
3A19-a5 12 G124.C
470K
G68.A 22K 22K
OX 10K
10 1 2 4 2
10K 1K 13 3 1
031A R46 C40 11
6K8 100K R305
A 045D
3A5-b13 a6 R29 R303 Abc needs more kvp A>B G148.B G148.A
AUTO 470K
low = Abc satisfied HOLD kV 053D 053C +5V
10K 1K 054B AUTO Abc needs less kvp A<B +5V
116B 3A3-a15 R37 C41 G30.A E3
a8
6K8 100K G68.D 1 C51
071B 3A9-b34 8 9 3 +5V +5V 10MF
AUTO W9 +5V +5V desired kvp
R158 2
E2 R162 D163
Q142 W10 C36 G6.D from abc
045A PL1 PL1 2N2222 062A R23
100K
R151 G108
150E R157 E1
10MF 5 6
D180 circuit
+5V 12
G30.D
11
GR 2K2
R27 C146 2K2
1N6263
3A5-a7
a15
10K
100MF R181 R39 b29
+5V R156 13 D12 100K +5V +5V
+5V kV / 20
R62
10K
G70 1N62 1K 3K01
"on" = Sm49 G148.C 63 +5V R43 AUTO
manual
100K
R75 R61 G90 3A5-a9
a1
5 6 +5V 8K66
a28
mode 4K7 2K2
gnd
C164 045A
10K
B 2A1 G149.A
1 300K Hz
3 G48 G126 R35
MODULE G 2 10K
064A
8 C34
10 +5V 470pF
+5V FC110 9
G65.A
R57 12 057D G68.F G149.C 2
4K7 G124.A 11 10 4 1 G30.B
11
R59 R58 1
3
5
b8 2 9 13 5 4
Sm31 8 G149.D 6 +5V G69

220E
C60 22K
R178 G107.D
220K 470K
12 4508
11
G149.B
5
13 G68.B 056E
4
6
3 4
SC G31
C D88
G65.B
9
+5V R84 R87 10 13 BUS kV/20
11
R71 R177 G124.B
12 071C
4K7 100K 2K2
R73 R72 470K 3
6 G107.B AUTO C78 3A9
4 5 1MF
b9 SC b7
Sm32 5 4 G5.C G6.A G6.B -a18 kV C7
220E
C74 22K 052A 11
052D Fluoro = 0v b24
220K
6
12 10 1 2 3 4 -a7 C6
b27 -a17
b5 057E 13
+5V C5
0V 1
G107.A +5V b28 -a6
FC 40 C4
041B 3 +5V a23 -a9
kV CO C3
R13 2 a24 -a13
DS8 053D b23
C2
a13 -a20 C1
G68.C G107.C
DS22 R30 8 AUTO 052A b22 -a19 kV C0
10
b17 6 5
DS21 R29 9
kV CO
PRESENCE CI 057C R300 G138
D DS38 R28 b18 4K7
017D +5V
DS37 R27 C301
R3 116B 3A3-a31
100pF 100K
5 x 150E
SC 063A R4 b5
+5V +5V FC 110 FC 110
a10 SC 056C 470E 3A9-a24 091C
071B 3A9-b31 053B C17
3A3-a19 D8 R7 3 hz to drive kvp slowly for first two seconds kvp 1K
C9 47K
116A a1
up/down switch depressed +5V G97
+12 V +12 V 470pF
3Hz 4508
C13 C14 R10 R11 C21 +5V
a3 10MF +5V +5V D179 68K 470K
100K
1N6263
10K R28
0V C19 C20 1 2 3 4 100K
E4 R33 D32 G125 R24 3A9-a23
5 1MF 10MF b6
a2 G56.A FC 40 FC 40
+5V +5V G56.C 4K7 G6.F
G56.B 470E
G6.E 8 C18 091A
C15 C16 6 R38 R42 R49 13 12 11 10 9 1K
10MF 2
100K
E 2A1 MODULE G
100K 10K 4K7 1
G5.A 3
8 5 6
30Hz SC
D50 G6.D
+5V 045A
10 4
PL1 PL1 C22

9 8 9 G5.B 054C Rad = 5v
DS10 R26 R25
R93 10K 10K
470K 30hz to drive kv quickly after
G30.C AD kV 3A7
a12 13 12 11 10 holding down kv up/down switch
826 853 G 045
150E fo> 2 seconds
G56.F G56.E All unmarked diodes are 1N6263
R106 3A12-a23
CLIGN 106A
2A3 MODULE D 3A5 R105
68K
a19 2 hz square wave Stenoscop 2 Series 6000 / 9000
Q123
CI MINUTERIE 2N2222 G89.B
5
G89.A
2
47K
C.C.D. – M.D.A.
131A R115 4 3
+5V +5V Rev. Date Serial No Avt. Mod
DS24 PL5 PL2 4K7 6 1
F a15
a34 b34 R127 R116
10K
R104
100K
A 15/07/96 .
R95 R96 3A9-b16 0 10/10/96
R18 150E 017F
a12 TH
1 09/01/97
042C 2K2 4K7 a16
DS20 150E
C94 >50 degrees C 2 20/06/97
10K
ready light on = 5v ok
051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058059 / 060
A–15
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
40106 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A–16
PL1 PL1 +5V

a11
R80
100K
R100 R85
b12
+5V
A 470E
C81
470E
045A 470pF Gr 053A SC 052D

G47
+5V G47 G89 R188 b8 3A19-a6
R111 R91 12 6 5
OX
a17 8 9 11
470E 470E 13
C189 R187
10K
032A
C92
Rad Sm26 470pF G139.A
G150
100K
6K8
R76 2 1
a5 300K Hz
150E +5V 058B
AUTO
C119
Extended radiography = R114 R98 10MF
a16 3A7 AD / kV
single pulsed fluoro 470E
C99
470E
D118 R117
826 853 G045
snapshot Sm33 470pF G139.B 1N6263 100K
R77
4 3
a6
150E
W9
+12V
R120 R101
Hlc = High level b17
470E 470E G137.B R143
76B C102 a31
fluoro 6K8 R306
Sm35 470pF G139.C 3 4
R82
a7 6 5
+12V 1K C307
10K
150E D
G137.C R144 116B
R308 3A3-b29 3A1-a31
B R121 R109
5 6 6K8
b31 ER
b14 +12V 1K C309
pulsed fluoro 470E
C110
470E 10k
3A9-b8 071A
Sm48 470pF G139.D
G137.D R135
R83 R310 3A1-a16
a8
8 9
9 8 6K8
a30
BLM
150E 1K C311
10K
+12V
R122 R112 R147
b13 G137.E
normal fluoro 470E 470E 10
6K8 R312 b30 3A1-a6
C113 11
SP
dose Sm52
R86
470pF G139.E
+12V 1K C313
10 11 10k
a9
150E
G137.F R145
12 6K8 R314 b32
13
FL
DS36 G139.F
R103 +12V 1K C315
12 13 10K
a14
R136
"S" led in maS display 150E
G137.A
2
6K8 R316 a29 3A19-a14
1 Gr
R44 1K C317 036A
100K 10k
G56.D
R52 R45 9 8 R318 a21 3A9-a29
b2 BP mA (s)
Sm50 4K7 42K2 C319
C C165
1K
10K
071D UP
10K
a25 3A9-a30
b1
Sm51 BP mA (s)
071E Down
R66 R176 C63

470K
10K 220K
2A1 MODULE G 1 2 3 4 5 6
Stenoscop 2 Series 6000 / 9000 G47.A G47.B G47.C a14 3A9-a34

Clock 1
C.C.D. – M.D.A.
071F
Rev. Date Serial No Avt. Mod 1.2 HZ slow
A 15/07/96 .
change mA/mAS
0 10/10/96
D 1 09/01/97 R54 R55 C64
47K
10K 220K
2 20/06/97 13 12 11 10 9 8
G47.F G47.E G47.D a15 3A9-a33

Clock 2
071F 12 HZ fast
change
mA/mAS
061 062 063 064 065 066067068 069
/ 070
A–17
DUAL 4 BIT LATCH Schematic Symbols/Abbreviations
TRUTH TABLE
4508 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
Vcc Reset Disa- Strobe D input Q output
Q3B D3B Q2B D2B Q1B D1B Q0B D0B Out. Stro. Reset ble
disa B B
B 0 0 1 1 1
3A9 CONSIGNE kV/mA 2 828 980 G035
0 0 1 0 0
0 0 0 X Latched
G65 G132
Out. Voir tableau Voir tableau
disa Stro. Reset
A A A D0A Q0A D1A Q1A D2A Q2A D3A Q3A 1 0 X X 0 See chart See chart
GND
X 1 X X Z
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 G66
1 : High level 0 : Low level X : Don’t care Z : H. Impedance Voir tableau
See chart
B A
G120
Voir tableau
Dual D Flip Flop See chart
CL D R S Q Q
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4013 0 0 0 0 1 PL1
Vcc G121
Q Q C R D S 1 0 0 1 0 Voir tableau
X 0 0 Q Q
See chart
Q Q C R D S
X X 1 0 0 1
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X X 0 1 1 0
X X 1 1 1 1
Binary UP / DOWN Counter

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
4516 X 1 X 0 0 No Count
VCC
CLOCK Q3 P3 P2 Q2 UP / Reset 0 1 0 0 Count UP
Preset Carry Down
enable Q4 P4 P1 IN Q1 Carry OUT 0 0 0 0 Count DOWN
GND X X X 1 0 Preset
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 X X X X 1 Reset
4 Bit Magnitude Comparator

INPUTS
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 OUTPUTS
4585 COMPARING CASCADING
A3 B3 A > B A B3 X X X X X 1 0 0 1
B2 A2 A = B A > B A B2 X X X X 1 0 0 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A3=B3 A2=B2 A1>B1 X X X 1 0 0 1
A3=B3 A2=B2 A1=B1 A0>B0 X X 1 0 0 1
A3=B3 A2=B2 A1=B1 A0=B0 0 0 1 0 0 1

A3=B3 A2=B2 A1=B1 A0=B0 0 1 1 0 1 0
A3=B3 A2=B2 A1=B1 A0=B0 1 0 X 1 0 0
A3=B3 A2=B2 A1=B1 A0<B0 X X X 1 0 0

A3=B3 A2=B2 A1<B1 X X X X 1 0 0
A3=B3 A2<B2 X X X X X 1 0 0
A3<B3 X X X X X X 1 0 0
A–18
RESET + 12V
+ 12V 075F
6saTh2
R7 R9 13
G123.D
11
8
R195 3A9 CONSIGNE kV mA 2 (1)
10K 2K2 TH * 078B 072B 4K22
TH 12 2
A168
1
R79
C100
100K
828980G035
073B
b7 R8 C6 TH 078C 3 AD584
075E
4K99
2
3A26
A 6K8 10K
093A G94 6 CONSIGNE mA SCOPIE a35
3A7 3
A69 a27
4
+ 5V Fluoro mA demand based on kvp
R16 G124.A G124.F 081E
b31 R14 2K2
1 2 13 12
R98
4K7 C91
selected/currently using
ER ER 072B mA / mA s
100K
100K
066B b8 R15 C17 F kV mA 2 + 5V
C71
68K 10K + 5V 100K G120
ER 078C F kV mA LE
SC
072A
+ 5V + 5V G66
ER G90
D75
TH *
R62
G86.A
AUTO HLC To mA / mAs DISPLAYS
100K R47 R63 G127.C 073D
a8 1 C7 094F
AUTO 3 13 12
4K7 2K2 AUTO
B 051A b34 2
D48 073C
+ 5V
+ 5V + 5V
SC 071E 073C + 5V
D76 074E
R55 G127.A G127.E C0
100K BIN DEC
a10 R42 R56 1 2 11 10 FC 01 min fl mA =0.1mA
SC SC 071E 071D G89
051D b31 4K7 2K2
074A 074C G121 FC 0 min Rad mAS =0.16
D77 FC GR max Rad mAS =160
072D mA(s) UP SC 0 logic from Selects maS
C7 a18 FC 01 071E 0,16 to 5mAs integration scale
b7 G86.B G84.B FC 0 071E G127.D
a11 range
5
072B SC
a7 4 3 4 FC GR 071D 8
b24 6
9
a25
C b27
a17 Clock R96 C97 081C
073F 2K2
Digital a6 10K
desired b28 AUTO To mA / mAs DISPLAYS
060D a9 072B
kvp a23 094D
signal a13
a24 BUS kV/20 + 5V + 5V
a20 093E
b23 C78
4K7
G129.A
1 R147 C.C.D. – M.D.A.
a19 3 SC 100K + 5V
b24 Rev. Date Serial No Avt. Mod
C0 2
AUTO + 5V + 5V .
CONS. mA s A 15/07/96
G139.C D148 072B + 5V
13 + 5V
072B SC 10 071E 073C 0 10/10/96
11 5R–500W + 5V + 5V G132
074E D154 G118 G119 1 09/01/97
12
FC GR G139.A 300W LE 4508 4508
8 2 20/06/97
074C R39 R54 9
G128.C mA(s) UP
1 8
a21 4K7 2K2 10
2
mA(s) UP 9 G87
066C a29 R51 C38
R152 G65
D 100K 10K R149
2220K
22K
12 C151
11 10K
C0
13
G128.D
+ 5V
+ 5V R146 1 G128.A
220K 3
R53 2 R153
R52
100K G129.B 22K
a25 2K2 G88
mA(s) 6
4
5 C150 C7 SC SC 073A R164
DOWN a30 R41 C40 5
G139.B 4 10K 4K99
4K7
5 72B 072B C171
66C 4K7 3 6 6 + 5V
+ 5V 100K
4
G128.B
mA(s) G127.B
G129.D
075C FC01 12 DOWN 4
2
11
071F
G86.C
8
3
R165 G133 6
a36
13 10
4K99
A167 a33
072B SC G135 3
E 8
G129.C 9 12 13 4516 081D
072B SC 10 a26
R166
075C FC0 9 + 5V + 5V G127.F 4K7 C169 b30
100K
R112 C170
G83.F 47K D111 100K CONSIGNE mAs
mA(s) UP 13 12
G86.D R57 G83.G + 5V C113 G125.C mA(s) UP
072D 13 C106 8
G125.A G85.B
4K7 4 470pf D104 10 3 072D + 5V
11 3 2
G83.E 1MF G83.A
G83.G 9 3 5 6
mA(s) DOWN 11 10 R109 R110 5 6 R102 R103 1 2
1 4
Clock
12 C99
11
G85.C 072C
072E 100pF 100K 2K2 220K 2K2 + 5V + 5V
12 10
R46 R59 C107 G134
13
a14 a34 4K7 2K2 D108 10MF
+ 5V
R114 4516
G83.D D210 R208
Clock1 47K
100K
066D 8 9 R207
R44 R60 R61 C45 R116
F a15 a33 4K7 2K2 100K 4K7 47K D117
G125.B G84.C 2K2
5
Clock2 SC 4 6
C211
5
RESET 10MF
066D R58 C43 072B C115 6
SC 071A
071
100K 4K7
072 073
470K
072B 074 075
A–19
DUAL 4 BIT LATCH Schematic Symbols/Abbreviations
TRUTH TABLE
3A9 CONSIGNE kV/mA 2 828 980 G035 / G045
4508 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 G65 G132
Reset Disa- Strobe D input Q output Voir tableau Voir tableau
Vcc See chart See chart
Q3B D3B Q2B D2B Q1B D1B Q0B D0B Out. Stro. Reset ble
disa B B
B 0 0 1 1 1
G66
0 0 1 0 0 Voir tableau
0 0 0 X Latched See chart
Out. B A
disa Stro. Reset
A A A D0A Q0A D1A Q1A D2A Q2A D3A Q3A 1 0 X X 0
GND
X 1 X X Z
G120
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Voir tableau
1 : High level 0 : Low level X : Don’t care Z : H. Impedance See chart
G121 PL1
Dual D Flip Flop Voir tableau
CL D R S Q Q See chart
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4013 0 0 0 0 1
Vcc
Q Q C R D S 1 0 0 1 0
X 0 0 Q Q
Q Q C R D S
X X 1 0 0 1
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X X 0 1 1 0
X X 1 1 1 1
Binary UP / DOWN Counter

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
4516 X 1 X 0 0 No Count
VCC
CLOCK Q3 P3 P2 Q2 UP / Reset 0 1 0 0 Count UP
Preset Carry Down
enable Q4 P4 P1 IN Q1 Carry OUT 0 0 0 0 Count DOWN
GND X X X 1 0 Preset
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3A9 CI Consigne kV / mA
X X X X 1 Reset
3A9 Consigne kV / mA PCB
828 980 G035

4 Bit Magnitude Comparator Eprom 5R – 500W
INPUTS G65 828 230 P605
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 OUTPUTS
A3 B3 A > B A B AB G66 828 232 P605
Dis. kV
B2 A2 A = B A > B A B2 X X X X 1 0 0 1 G67 828 229 P305
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A3=B3 A2=B2 A1>B1 X X X 1 0 0 1 mA / mAs
A3=B3 A2=B2 A1=B1 A0>B0 X X 1 0 0 1 G120 828 234 P305
BIN DEC
A3=B3 A2=B2 A1=B1 A0=B0 0 0 1 0 0 1 G121 828 233 P305
A3=B3 A2=B2 A1=B1 A0=B0 0 1 1 0 1 0 Cons. mAs
A3=B3 A2=B2 A1=B1 A0=B0 1 0 X 1 0 0 G132 828 231 P305
A3=B3 A2=B2 A1=B1 A0<B0 X X X 1 0 0

A3=B3 A2=B2 A1<B1 X X X X 1 0 0
A3=B3 A2<B2 X X X X X 1 0 0
PROGAMMATION CI 2A1 PUPITRE MODULE G
A3<B3 X X X X X X 1 0 0
1 : High level 0 : Low level X : Don’t care Fonction de Sm35
Sm35 function
Sm58. 1–4 (A) ON ON

2–3 (B) ON ON
Sm59. 1–4 (A) ON ON

2–3 (B) OFF OFF
Sm60. 1–4 (A) OFF OFF

2–3 (B) OFF OFF
A–20
A 2A1 PL3 PL1

R243
MODULE G2 150E
+5V b20 2 4
Q242 G130.A
2N2222 G126.D 1
DS61 S246.B 8 9 3 OX HLC 077D
HLC 2
See programming R244 Iris controls
4K7
+5V
dose. Normal
+5V
R65 R231 HLC and HLC
Sm35 100E 150E
b22 +5V 072B
HLC
4 1 Q62 MODULE 8
2N2222
079C
3 2
G122.B
IMAGER
S58 R64
150E In U.S. when 50 degrees C is b32 +24V XJ1
B 1
hit system stays in HLC. In +5V

14
S59 125D
R144 R145 Q141 b33 R
4 Europe system drops to 1K5 2N2907
10K IRIS
Normal Dose. R155
R228 R230 G124.B G124.C 470E R143 R64
4K7 2K2 TH* 9
G123.C 1K S140.B 1K
4 6
b21 3 5
072A 10 Q131 3 2
8 H11A5100
R227 C229 +5V G124.D R142 C49
2 2 1 100K 10K 9 8 47K 220K 0V (24V) 3PL2
R156 G126.A
S60 S60 10K 2 b35 125D
S59 6
G123.B 1
3 3 4 G130.D
4 13
PL1 Closed for 2
G123.A 5 11 G126.B
A U.S.A. S140.A
b17 a7 3 12
G130.B
3 4
1 5
C TH 4
G126.C HLC 077B
6
072A
+5V 5 6
G122.A
R245 G126.F
4 1 100K 13 12
ER
3A3.a29 R10 R12 G124.E 072A S246.A
Order xray and High 10K 2K2 11 10
OX HLC
level dose selected 120F
b6 R11 C13
OX HLC
6K8 10K
078A

3A9 CONSIGNE kV mA 2 (2) C.C.D. – M.D.A.
E 828980G035 A 15/07/96 .
0 10/10/96
1 09/01/97
2 20/06/97
076 077 078 079 080

A–21
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4011 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4023 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
40106 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A–22
+12V R107
3A3 DIAPHRAGMES
reduced power switch R68
derates mA at a17 R27 22E
RP 083C
+12V 2 2K2
R51
selected kv's
7 22E R49 19K6 R106 A105
6
C.C.D. – M.D.A.
A S133–B RP C66 3 3A26 CI CHAUFFAGE FILAMENTS 4
100K G185.C G185.D Rev. Date Serial No Avt. Mod
117E 2 a13 R23 R65 5 6 9 8 R102 6K81
R50 C104
10K LF356
R113 R114 R109 R115 R116 R117
829 357 G055 .
19K6 220K R529 53K6 48K7 90K9 61K9 71K5 100K0
A 15/07/96
10K 2K2 4K7 Q103 82E5 All unmarked diodes are 1N6263 0 10/10/96
R24 C67 +5V 2N2222 2 Q108.A
3 IH5020CPA
1K 100K 1 09/01/97
R11 S528–B 4
3A9.a14 100K R10 R52 3
a5 2 2 20/06/97
55 mA / 50–59kV
+5V 4K7 2K2 Q108.B
098A C53 1
6
5
R13 10K
3A9.a10 a6 100K R12 R54 7
60 mA / 40–49kV
+5V 4K7 2K2 Q110.A
098A 8 3
C55 IH5012CDE
4
R15 10K
3A9.b36 a7 100K R14 R56 2
33 mA / 80–99kV
Selected +5V 4K7 2K2 Q110.D If closed allows fluoro on large R215
Rad mA
098B C57 1 14
focal spot for tube alignment
13 Q216.A
based kvp R17 10K CONSIGNE CHAUFFAGE
B 3A9.a12 a8 100K R16 R58
15 PRECHAUFFAGE GRAPHIE R4
R244 R576
3
IH5019CPA
1
R563 2
105K
FILAMENTS
Rad 1v = 10mA
47 mA / 60–69kV +5V Q110.C RAD PREHEATING 5K 2 6
098A 4K7
C59
2K2
16
11 100K
C577
1K 1K
A214 087E FL 1v = 1mA
R19
12 R527 1K
4 2 3
3A9.a8 a9 100K R18
10K
R60
R243 1K0 L C571
C564
LF356
10 33K 1K FILAMENT HEATING
1 1K
41 mA / 70–79kV S528–A REFERENCE VOLTAGE
+5V 4K7 Q110.B
098B C61 9
5
6 IH5012CDE C148 –12V 4 L RAD
R21 10K
3A9.a16 a10 100K R20 R62 4K7 082D
30 mA / 100–110kV
7
R111 Prevents
4K7 2K2
filament boost
C63 8 (rad) until kvp
098A selected rad mA based on selected kvp R150 2
44K2 Q287.A
10K reaches 85%
R252 R149 R597 IH5019CPA
R112 2K2 6 3 1Rad
A105
100K0 C135 R144 3 1K
3A12.a7 a32 R39 R90 2 Q217.A 44K2 4K7
LF356 G186.A C598
Mesure mA Gr R245 IH5019CPA kV 85% 1 1K
4 2
Rad mA feedback 030F 2K15 100K0 6 3 1 4K7 22E R151 C599 Fluoro
R40 C91 A284 2 082D 3 12 1K
3 D146 100K
1v = 10mA 33K2 2K2 R5 4K02
R93 2 11
a19 6
C +12V
R286
AD741KH 5K
Q217.B
4 2
1K
A134
3
R142
2K2 R289
+12V PRE 13
PRESENCE CI
018F R80 47K R246 IH5019CPA
C560 C198 LF356
+12V R293 2 6K8 5 082D G186.D
a20 6 8 1K 4 exposure
100K
CONSIGNE mAs R291 R288
154K0 4MF7 C147 R143 47K A292
6 6 start
R6 2
3A9.a11 a25 R31 100K 5 7 081D 100K 3 4K7 2K2 G186.B 8
0 logic from 0.16 R139 2 4MF7 R145 R181 G188.A R295 LF356
10
6
mAs to 5 mAs 075C 22K Q83 C561 G184.D R140 A180 1
9
10K D290 9
1K 2K2 6 3 33K 2
Controls mAS R81 2N2222 9 8 A138 2K2
10K 3 AD741KH D141 8 G186.C
integrator gain mAS integrator 100K
Not used
3A9.b30 a26 LF356 R294
G187.B 100K
stop Rad exposure at
075E D189 G187.A 4
3
1N914
RP
1 2 –12V selected maS. No photo
3A9.a36 a33 R41 R94 082D PRE
R190 G188.C timing
Consigne mAs CONSIGNE mAs D250 G184.E
33K
100K 082A D248 11
R76 R30 a21 3A19.a23
selected/desired 075E R42 C95
33K G184.A G187.D G187.C 12 10 11 10
STOP mAs
mAS 100K 10K
083C kV 85%
1 2 13
+12V R247 R249 8 9 6 5 1K 1K 031C
084C 22K 100K C78
R32 G185.E G185.F +12V 10K
D
kV 85%
3A12.a16 a24 100K R33 R82 11 10 13 12
kV 85% R7 R8
G187.E
10 13
G187.F
12
11
4K7 C85
028C 2K2 100K 100K
10K 83E
G185.A +12V 220 volt power reduced power 120
3A19.a10 R37 R88 G589 C203
a31 1 2
backup set for 7sec 100MF volt backup timer set
PRE PRE 082D 084C for 15 seconds
Presence of 035A 4K7
C89
2K2 082E
x-ray R38
100K 10K G185.B 085D 087B
+12V
3 4 G184.B G184.C G188.B
RAD 087B 088D +12V D592 3 Q216.B
R48 G184.F 4 5 6 6
3 4 IH5019CPA
3A19.a8 a36 100K R47 R100 12 PRECHAUFFAGE SCOPIE 3 R241 R575 8
13
RAD R3 6
RAD 085B 086E 5
FLUORO PREHEATING 5K 2
040A 4K7 C101 2K2 R590 R591 100K 1K
10K
087B 088C 1 C574 5 7
1K
2K2 2K2
R242
C593 33K
10K C570
RAD 1K
C285 R254 –12V 082D
082D
E RAD
R305 100K 10E
2 R253
+12V
150K R256 D255 6
R595
C219 2K2 D259 10K
A257
2K2 3
100K LF356 kV85%
actual Fl mA 030E R218 R258 082D
R224 C260 100K
R596
feedback 100K0
3A12.a8 a23 R36 R199 2
Mesure mA SC 33K 4MF7 10K
6
R221 R585 2 Q287.B
100K0 FL mA adjust 2K2
1V/mA 3A9.a35 R87 A105 R225 R581 IH5019CPA
a27 3 220K 6 6 8
1K
Consigne mA SC C586 A222
LF356 3
46K4 100K 1K
desired fl mA 075A C223 R9 R251
1K
C582
100K AD741KH 5 7
eprom based 1MF 100K0 1K
C580
+12V 1K
R34
F
SYX SC
3A19.a15 a28 100K R35 R86
Fluoro exp start 4K7 2K2

035A C84
10K
081 082 083 084 085

A–23
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4011 VCC
GND
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
A–24
+12V
R510
R511 1K
a18
A 8K66
Q503 +12V
3PL4 PL3
2N2907 Rad
R512 R515 R 6
D509
68K1 BZX83 V+ Rad
+12V R514 R516 C3V3
10E R27
R513 10E 1N5061
3K32
4K7 4K7
R131
22E
R132 D25 MODULE 6
R153 +12V Q504 R517 Q505 1W
22E
1W
C75 Q21 X RAY HEAD
100E 2N2222 2N2222 R77 2K2 MJE
4K7
13009 D14
RAD G183 R179
Q128 D17
12 C175 470E 2N4920 R12
11 10MF 330E
C154 D231 R229 082D D C26 D18 1E
D5
10MF 1N914 10K 13
D170
Q129 470K 2W
C232 R228 G182 R169 2N4920 Q20 1N5406

8 R13 10.015
10 1 G182
1K D173 Q176
R178
680E R130
D79
R25 a14 100E0
PL2 6PL1
4 8 2K2 2K2 C G183 BZX83 M 2
R157 R230 9 3 1 2N2222 10E
A R168 C6V2 R133
33K2
7
R233 220K 2 3 1W Q125 1K21
100E A 2N5192 R74 R22 R8 1 5–2 K
RAD 2 15K C92
C172 R174
10E 1W 470E
470pF
100E0 0E18
G155 22K 7W X–RAY
B R158
18K7
555 3
+12V
082D 5 G182
4
+12V
4K7 a15 N 3 4
free B C171 R166
R72 C73 R7 TUBE
6 G182 6 22K 4K7 R120 R23
running R204 R207
12
11 R126 10E 470E 470pF
48E7
0E15
VHV C
2 5 D208 G183 R26 a16 7W
C159 180 HZ 33K 100K D 5
R127
2K2 Q162 1W
P 5 2 5–1 J
100K 1
13
8
G183
B
4 D165 2N2907 Q123 D3
C156 10 2N4920 487E C43
6 R161 D10 R16 2x1N5406 3
100K
RAD
C 10K 180 Q124 Q122
D69 1K 1E
9
degree 2N2907 D164 680E 4 Masse cuve
2N5192
D9 2W
082D phase Q15 C4
Q206 BZX83 D6 10K
2N2222 shift C9V1 MJE
R167 R160 R70 D24 5852
R205 33K C163
330E 1N5061
3K3 10MF
180 470E C71 Q121 Q11
R119 2K2 2N5192 R19
degree R118 10.015
47E 100E0
phase Q507 R518 1W
47E
2N2907 4K7
Q506
1W Current
shift R523 R521
Fluoro PL1
3K22 2N2907 safety V–
C R522
4K7 R520
4K7
R519
–12V
Fluoro
V+
3
68K1 D526 10E
Q508 BZX83 R65
C3
2N2222 C3V3 5A1 CI PUISSANCE 47K
470MF
R524
+12V 8K66 R525 CHAUFFAGE 4
1K 2 + 5TR1
+12V Q213.A Rad current feedback 829 355 G015 5CR3
R267 16
IH5019CPA ~ ~
R268 10K Q266 1 3 R194 R64 a11
4 C4
8A
2N2907 –12V
+12V C280 470MF 5F3 Primary
33K 1K69 56K2
D270 D
G Q265 2 4 – 004F
2N5457 C274 R283 10pF C195
R272 1K RAD 1
S C209 10K V–
R271 9 082D 17
100K0 2 R193
10K
R269 2K2 4K7 1
1M 8 3 6 6
2 R273 A278 A282 1K10
–12V AD534 4 3 C552
6 7 LF356
22K6 6 1K
A234 10 R281 Q213.B Fluoro current feedback
D D211 R235 LF356
3 C275
10K
10K
IH5019CPA
R22 a12
2 R557 100K 5 8 6
Pulse width R212 6 100K C 21K5

A237 R556 7 5
modulated 10K
3 1K
–12V
LF356
R236 C553
100K 1K RAD
D210
100K 082D
C238 C555
1K
Filament drive to achieve disired mA
470K R240 R239
RAD CONSIGNE CHAUFFAGE FILAMENT
C296 100K 1M FILAMENT HEATING REFERENCE VOLTAGE
082D
470K D279 085B
If actual current feedback > desired

current then comparator goes high
E and interrupts 180 HZ inverter Stenoscop 2 Series 6000 / 9000
3A26 CI CHAUFFAGE FILAMENTS 4
829 357 G055 C.C.D. – M.D.A.
All unmarked diodes are 1N6263 A 15/07/96 .
0 10/10/96
a2 1 09/01/97
+5V +5V
2 20/06/97
a1
+12V +12V
C261 C226 C136 C559 C277 C262
a3 E192 10MF 100K 100K 1K 100K 100K
C263 C227 C137 C558 C276 C264

10MF 100K 100K 1K 100K 100K
a4
–12V –12V
086 087 088 089 090

A–25
3A9 CONSIGNE kV/mA 2 828 980 G035
PIN
MAN 71A
1 Cathode a
1 14 2 Cathode f
a 3 Commun Anode
2 13
B A
6 NC
3 f b 7 Cathode e
DIS kV
g
8 Cathode d
11 828229 P305
e 9 Cathode DP
c
10 10 Cathode c PL1
11 Cathode g
6 d 9
DP 13 Cathode b
7 8 14 Commun Anode
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
4 Bit Magnitude Comparator

INPUTS
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 OUTPUTS
A3 B3 A > B A B A B2 X X X X 1 0 0 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A3=B3 A2=B2 A1>B1 X X X 1 0 0 1 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 A B C D a b c d e f g
7447
VCC 0 L L L L L L L L L L H
A3=B3 A2=B2 A1=B1 A0>B0 X X 1 0 0 1
g f a b c d e
BI/ 1 H L L L H L L H H H H
B C LT RBO RBI D A
A3=B3 A2=B2 A1=B1 A0=B0 0 0 1 0 0 1 2 L H L L L L H L L H L
GND
A3=B3 A2=B2 A1=B1 A0=B0 0 1 1 0 1 0 3 H H L L L L L L H H L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A3=B3 A2=B2 A1=B1 A0=B0 1 0 X 1 0 0 4 L L H L H L L H H L L
5 H L H L L H L L H L L
A3=B3 A2=B2 A1=B1 A0<B0 X X X 1 0 0 6 L H H L H H L L L L L
A3=B3 A2=B2 A1<B1 X X X X 1 0 0 7 H H H L L L L L H H H
A3=B3 A2<B2 X X X X X 1 0 0 8 L L L H L L L L L L L
A3<B3 X X X X X X 1 0 0 9 H L L H L L L H H L L
A–26
072A R105
2K87
R82
5K62 3A9 CONSIGNE kV / mA 2 828980G035 b5
3A12 021B desire/selected kvp 1v = 20kv
R81 C92 a12 CONSIGNE kV / 20
10K0 100K
220 volt Full power mA values
2 G36.B 3A26
6 3 4 R32 a16 081A
A G94
3
A69 +5 V
1K C33
a10 30 mA 100 / 110 kV
a10
R80 G36.A 10K a6 60 mA 40 / 49 kV
10K0 D26 1 2 R37 a14
C70 55 mA 50 / 59 kV
100K D23
a5
C0 C7 1K C50
a12
C93 D25 G36.F 10K a8 47 mA 60 / 69 kV 081B
100K
G84.E
D24 13 12 R35 a8
3A7.b6 a9 41 mA 70 / 79 kV
FC40 a23 10 1K C34
11
b36
minimum kv value (40) +5 V G36.D 10K a7 33 mA 80 / 99 kV
058E 8 R31
9
C7 1K C72
D28
+5V G22
D27 G36.E 10K 2A1 MODULE G2
G18 11 10 R30
1K C73
DISPLAY kV +5 V
G36.C 10K PL1 PL3
B 5 6 R29
a1 +5V DS25
+5 V
+5 V R205
1K C74 b2
10K
10K
R225
a20
a21 100
G19 R226
+5 V R206 +5 V
10K 2 x 150E +5 V
Q241
2N2222 R185
C0 Q240 G138 a18 DS24
R204 2N2222 R220
10K a13
R221
G84.F
G67 R203 a14
3A7.b5 a24 10K
R219
a12
FC110
12 13 DIS kV R224
a19
C 058D +5 V C7 Eprom R222
a15
+5 V C7
R223
a17 010
7 x 150E
+5V +5 V
G21
G172 R214 a11 DS23
R216 a6
R215 a5
+5 V C0 R212 a2
+5 V R217 a7
R193 R213 a3
110kV E3 G121
10K
Q233
R218 a10 001
W245 2N2222 7 x 150E
Q232
E4 R192 2N2222 +5 V
105K G20 074C 10K
+5 V
D E5
Eprom
R191
10K R189
DISPLAY mA / mAs
R196 R45
C0 10K
b24 R46 DS41
2 x 22E
Q235 R44
a21 Q234 2N2222 b25 R47
R195 R190
2N2222
10K R42
C7 R43
018D PWB Presence R194
10K
12v interlock R199
6 x 100E
BUS kV / 20 10K
R187
071C Q237
a22 Q236 2N2222 b18
R198 +5 V 22E +5 V
2N2222
10K
C0 R197 R184 b15
a/b2 10K G137 DS40
+5 V +5 V
R183 b14
E R181 b12
a/b1 C159 C160
R180 b11
+ 12 V + 12 V 100K 10MF
R209 b16
R188 b23
C162 C161
R186 b17
10MF 100K
a/b3 7 x 150E
0 V R182
G120 R202
10K b13
C158 C157 Q239 22E
10MF 100K 2N2222
a/b4 Q238 +5 V +5 V
– 12 V – 12 V R201 2N2222
074B 10K
R200
Stenoscop 2 Series 6000 / 9000 Eprom 10K G136
R177 b8 DS39
C.C.D. – M.D.A.
R176 b7
R174 b3
F Rev. Date Serial No Avt. Mod R173 b1
A 15/07/96 . R179 b10
0 10/10/96
R175 b5
1 09/01/97
R178 b9
7 x 150E
2 20/06/97
091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098099 / 100

A–27
3A12 kV mA 829 825 G025
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4012 VCC 40106 VCC
GND GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
Dual MONOSTABLE
4023 VCC 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
4538 Vcc
T =RX X CX
GND C R/C CD +TR –TR Q Q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
4040 VCC
Q11 Q10 Q8 Q9 Reset Clock Q1
12 Bit Binary counter
Q12 Q6 Q5 Q7 Q4 Q3 Q2
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A–28
+12V for thermal display lights

R17 R18 and intermittant operation
Stenoscop 2 Series 6000 / 9000 +12V
R66 1M C19 1M of buzzer
10e G35 G35 470K
A C.C.D. – M.D.A. R143
G35 CLIGN
2 13 12 3 4 a 23
Rev. Date Serial No Avt. Mod 46K4 + +12V
8 C67 1
A 15/07/96 . See job card 3A7 - a19 3A3 - a10
RG 206 5 10MF 2 HZ Oscillator
0 10/10/96 R72 054F 111C
minute timer R217 10K
1 09/01/97
accuracy 100K 7 3 9 G36
2 20/06/97 10
G69 13
R71 R73 11
100K0 6
555 10K CR25 CR26 R24 12
100K
C70 2 5
E3
100K
C68 +12V +12V
4 1 100K
16 16
G37 15 G37
4040 Q11 4040
2A1 MODULE G 10 10 9
3A7 AD kV CLK Q12 1 CLK Q1
Low = stop high voltage
14 7
Q10 Q2 inverter
+12V +12V R R 2 G36
PL1 11 8 11 8 3 4’57”
RAZ MINUTERIE SCOPIE 1 a 26
PL1 R21 CR20 4
Sm14 FLUORO TIMER RESET 3A19 - a30
100K G35 5
a 33 a 21 031A
B 045A b 15 5 6
x-ray on indicator
+12V R22
2K2 PRX.CP (50Hz)
a4 a 30
R130 Q141 R131 C23
150E G35 3A5 - a5
2N2222 4K7 470K
a 26 a 19 041A
10 11
+5 V Sm7 PL1 BP COMMANDE CLICHE 4’26”
045A R154 R132
X RAY CONTROL BP 150E 10K 2 HZ PRX present when
a3 G35 xrays are emitted +12V
051C +12V 8 9
PRX
3A12 kV mA – 2
C29 R28 829825G025
b 16 026A
470K 470K
Q140 R153 G74 5
2N2222 4K7
a 26 a 33 4 +12V
6
console 3A5 a 34 1 2 16
X-ray 2A3 MODULE D CI MINUTERIE R152
10K
switches C R/C
+5 V Sm26 PL5 PL2 R155 4 6 1 G74
131A Q
150E +TR 3
a36 b33
a13 2
G39.A
C 042B +12V 4538 +12V
a29 5 7
b1 -TR Q
+12V R108
+12V 220K
BP Cl 3A19 - a7 CD
R222
031B 100K 3 8
+ W109
+12V
C223 CR221
10MF
9PL1 002C 150 RAD R106 G75
+12V
PL4 9A1 TRANSPANEL 140 210 a 32 8 G74 220K 11
29 9Tb1.12 10 12
9 3A19 - a8
10
27 VAC 9
R27 13
Monitor Cart 003C C39 040A 220K W107
Q142
220K PL11 9PL1 2N2222
10 12 G74
15 14
X–RAY R38 11
100E
+12V
C R/C DS175
13
ON 27 Sonalert
7 1 +12V
12
003C +TR Q 10
D D42 W220
R623 R503 G39.B G75

10K W230 3
9Tb1.7 K37 22 22E R627 4538
24 3 a 36 +12V 4
8 4K7 13 6
0 VAC -TR Q 9
003C
Y 5
D624 W231
1N5359 Q625 CD
3PL6 R504
2N2222 10K
MODULE 9 – INTERFACE 13
101 102 103 104 105 106

107 108109
/ 110
A–29
Dual D Flip Flop
CL D R S Q Q 3A3 DIAPHRAGMES 2 832 502 G015
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4013 0 0 0 0 1
Vcc
Q Q C R D S 1 0 0 1 0
X 0 0 Q Q
Q Q C R D S
X X 1 0 0 1
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X X 0 1 1 0
X X 1 1 1 1
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4016 VCC In
Contr. Out
Contr. 4 Out
In 1 3 In
Out 2 Contr.
Out Contr.
In
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4023 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Dual MONOSTABLE
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
4538 Vcc
T =RX X CX
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
BA
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
40106 VCC
PL 1
M 1.1
PL1
GND
E2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E3
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
7A1 FROTTEURS 4093 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3A5 MINUTERIE BA
832 501 G015
PL2
A–30
b31 b30
PL5 PL12 R39 D89
3PL1 PL1 ROTATION
BPF1
3A3 CI DIAPHRAGMES 2 832 502 G015 +12V
100E BZX83
C6V2 D 10 M.1.2 + – slip ring
Sm11 BP01 8 G159.A C92 D90 7M1 collimator
A R245 b31 FC Sc1 2 9 R219
100K BZX83
C6V2
R16 continuous turn
Collimator b9 Stenoscop 2 Series 6000 / 9000 1 4K7 154E
+ = cw
47E FC Sc1 112E Z R220 Q218 M.1.1
rotation
Sm12
7W C.C.D. – M.D.A. 1
G169.A
G168.B
12
G159.C
R221 2N2907
- = ccw
switches 2 9 5 3
G159.B 11 10 4K7
Serial No RAD
R8 C246 Rev. Date Avt. Mod 8 4 5 6 13 Q222 115F
100K . 4K7 2N2222 R217
b5 A 15/07/96 6 4 – +
BP01
680E a21 6 3
47E J 7 7M3
7W 0 10/10/96 R214 Lead blades
a4 +12V G157.C G160.A G168.A
1 09/01/97 BPF1 8 3 2 2
R215 10K R223 D225 +12 = close
XX 4 6 8 9 11 G160.C 3 Q216 R210 100E BZX83
300E
VOLETS SUPERIEURS - 12 =open
b6
2 20/06/97 Z 2N2907 680E C2V7
–12V FC GR1 9 5 1 12 10 1 UPPER BLADES
33K R213 C224 D226
121A G160.B 13
100K
+12V 3
G169.B BZX83
+12V BPF1 RAD FC GR1 4K7 C2V7
Sm15 5 6
R212
Q211
R7 G156.E G156.D RAD 4 2N2222
b33 a7 100K R8 R56 11 10 9 8 D 5 G157.B 1K
a8 BPF1 112B 12 G168.D 4
BP01 G169.C +12V
4K7 11 FC Sc1 –12V
2K2 G164.E 11 6 FC Sc1
Lead 131A +12V C55 BP01 RAD
12 10
G158.A G156.E R6
opaque B +5V
Sm16
R3
10K
G166.E G158.B Z
11 10 13 13
2 1 2 1
R54 R5 100K a6
T 1 12 9
7Sa1
b35 a5 R4 R52 FC Sc1 FC Sc1 limit

blades 100K 11 10 3 4
BP01
112E RAD + Z 2K2 4K7 NO
a1 +12V switches
4K7 FC GR1 C53
2K2
10K FC GR1 close when
C51 G158.E G156.C R12 max
a35 a22 R35 a9 9 6 7Sa3
a14 10K G161.B 10 11 6 5 R60 R11 100K U 4 opening
6 5 G157.B G164.E FC GR1
R144 FC GR1 RAD reached
150E
Q140 XX
4 11 10 2K2 4K7 NO
3A5 2N2222 FC Sc2 C59 +12V
4K7 5 6
MINUTERIE 112E Z 10K FC Sc2
G156.F G156.B R24 7Sa2
+12V R72 R23 100K a16 8 5
BPF2 12 13
4 3 W 5
Sm13 FC Sc2
R17 G164.A G164.F +12V 2K2 4K7 NO
b36 a13 100K R18 R66 1 2 13 12 FC GR2 C71 +12V
b7 R86 W85 G157.A
Aluminum 4K7
BPF2 2
RAD G162.B G162.A
10K
R30
FC GR2
2K2 100K
a18 7Sa4
radio +12V C65 BP02
3
4 3 2 1 R80 R29 100K X 3 10 7
Sm14 10K 1 FC GR2
transluscent R19 G166.F G158.F CLIGN
2K2 4K7 NO
b34 a14 R20 R68 BPF2
blades C a3
100K 13 12 13 12 C78
BP02 Causes blades to flash on console +12V
10K
4K7 2K2
C67 if blades need to be opened. BP02 8 G179.A
10K
FC Sc2
2 9 R248
a33 a28 R36 1 4K7 7A1 CI 7A2 CI
G163.C
a16 9 FC Sc2 112E Z R250 Q249 FROTTEURS DISQUE
150E
Q141 R138 10 G180.A G179.C 2N2907
+12V 8 12
2N2222 9 G163.B G179.B 10
R252 4K7
4K7 8 2 5 4 11
FC GR2 RAD
3A12–a23 a10
R13
R14 R62 1 4 3 6 13 Q251 R247
100K 4K7 +12V 2N2222
CLIGN CLIGN 6 2 680E a20 – +
4K7
BP02 Z 8 5 2 +12 = close
2K2 7M2
106A +12V C61 RAD 112B 112E R244 - 12 = open
RAD G181.A G168.C R253
10K
G164.C G164.B
5 8 8 R245 20K5 D255 300E
3A19–a8 a8
R9 118E 2 4 6 2 9 11 G180.C 10 Q246 R240 100E BZX83 VOLETS INFERIEURS
100K R10 R58 6 4
BPF2 Z 2N2907 680E C2V7
5 3 RAD 12 10
RAD 3 3 1 9
33K C254 LOWERS BLADES
4K7 112E 13 R243 D256
2K2
FC GR2 1 G180.B 100K
040A C57 3 G181.B
BZX83
Transluscent
G163.A FC GR2 4K7 C2V7
10K
RAD + Z
4 6
R242 Q241
5 2N2222
D BP02
1K
12 G181.C
Z1 119C
2A3 PUPITRE a21 RAD 11 10 –12V
MODULE D 2 b27 R135 G172.B
13 R203 R201
FC Sc2 3 4
150E
Q142 R137
832 440 G015 2N2222 +12V +12V 13K3 10K
4K7 +12V
R106
R502 220K D50 G176.A
+12V 1N5061 R196
1K 3 C109 2
S501.B G167.C
C109
3
G176.C
47E Q189 lead
Sm17 S501.A R500 MONO OFF 5 6 10MF 8 BD139 CHAMP/FIELD 16 aperature for
1 R204 LM324
MONO OFF 2
+5V +12V
4 1 47K
10K T1A T2A G176.B 10 2
– +
6 inch field of
+12V a23 11 8 view.
R108 D110 +TR QA 6 9 40K2
A175.A
1 E 2
7M5
78F R33 6 14 100K 1N914 4 R202 3
a2 100K G167 112D G178.C 5 20K5
Q190
b26 R34 R84 G165.A 1 G155.A BD140 R198
a30 G167.D
b2 1 2 3
C Q RAD
9 +12V +12V 4538 +12V 100E UNIQUEMENT EN
9 8 –12V
4K7 2K2 4013 8
10
G178.B
R112 D111
-TR QA G172.E D193 R195 C199
BICHAMPS
6 inch field of view switch C83 5 2 9 8 5 R231 ONLY WITH 2
832 501 G015 10K
D Q 4
C113 100K 1N914 CD 11 10 47E 100K
FIELDS II
E G164
Z 6
10K 4K7
–12V
4 7 112B 113A
113D
G172.C R205
Low for 9 inch fov +12V +12V R207
5 6
10K
high for six inch fov R105 1N5061 RAD
13K3
+12V
+12V +12V G167.E D49
zoom 220K
G177.A R227
CHAMP/FIELD 16
11 10 C104 2
1 FIELD II
R121 G172.A 3 47E Q191
100K D125 C116 G177.B CHAMP/FIELD 22
1N914 G167.F +12V 1 2 10MF 1 5 BD139
R208 LM324 2 FIELDS II
RAD 9 inch II
R122 R123 13 12 10K T1A T2A G177.C
4 6
a24
C128 C 6 7 4 – + normal fov or
R115 D117 +TR QA 8 6
40K2
7
4K7 2K2 220K G167.B 100K 1N914 10
A175.B 7M4 6 inch II norml
R206
C124
R126 R127 3 4 G155.B 9 20K5
5 Q192 M.1.1 115A
fov
4MF7 BD140
+12V 100K 1K +12V +12V 4538 RAD +12V R229
8 –12V 100E F 9 4 1
R114 2 G178.A R119 D118 -TR QA G172.D
D194 R228
C120 R232
10K G165.B 100K 1N914 CD 9 8 47E C230
F C Q 13 3
100K 0V(12V)
1 4K7
9 4013 12
RAD 10K
G178.D
–12V 007C
D Q 12
G172.F
R76 b19 3A1.a19
11 13 12 T
10 13 C74
470E
1K C

A–31
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4093 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
40106 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A–32
R26 R75
3A19.a18 4K7 2K2
a17
Start Exp SEXP J6 423
R25 C73 G171 5V POWER SUPPLY R95 R43 3PL2
A
035B
100K 10K
G161.D R139 *
G171.B
* 1K 1K
a32 M 16
12 10K 5 +12V 1.9
11 4
1 5 CLTV_
13 6
Q145 C147
+12V
R143 D237
H11A5100 220K
R32 R82 6K8 1N6263 2 4 a33 0V (24V)
R31 R94
3A7.a10 4K7 2K2 G161.A
a19 100K 1 3K3 126D
Fluoro selected 3 R239
SC
051D C81
2
G171.A
* R236 200K R238 R42 8
+12V 10K 1 10K 10K 4K7 S133.A
CAG
3
R38 R88 2
1 CCD
R37 G162.F + Interconnect board
3A7.b31 4K7 2K2 C235
Electronic Radiography b29 100K 12 ER Q148
13
10MF
ER 2N2222
(Single pulsed fluoro) C87 117F
065B 10K
close to turn on
"Snapshot" R70
R22 2K2 AGC for service
3A7.a8 4K7 mode
a15
B AUTO
051A R21 C69 Open to unblank
100K 10K +12V
R513 R514
Unblank tv
+12V
R41 R93
tv without xray 1K 1K 18 when logic
R40 R511 a27 V 1.18
3A7.b5 4K7 2K2 R503 G166.C
a31 100K GOTO BLACK 2K2 1 5 high
GO TO BLACK
Max Kv FC110 100K 5 6
Q512 C515
C91 5 4 H11A5100 220K
058D +12V 10K S133.D 2 4
R28 R77 R134 G166.C G158.C G158.D R129

3A19.a15 4K7 2K2 BEAM 1K R130 R27
b18 100K 5 6 5 6 9 8 100E 100E 15
Low during Fluoro SYX Sc 6 3
b20 S BEAM MAX
X – RAY ON_
035A C79 R532
S133.C 1 5
1.15
10K 100K Q132 C131 Monicon only
H11A5100 220K high = sets max
SYX Sc
Open = down = off to set up 2 4
117F beam to 1500nA
+12V camera standby beam
C R16 R64 b32 + 24V low = standby
R15 (400nA) when fluoroing R151
3A12.a13
b12 100K 4K7 2K2 1
126C beam = 400nA.
13 Q209 100K
PRX 4016 Q149
030A C63 2
2N2907
10K + 5v R150
10K
1 5
R96
Q145 1K R44
H11A5100 1K 10
4 b33 L 1.7 ZOOM
2 MODE 1
+12V Z1 C98
112D R136 220K Mag to 6 inch
R45 R46 R99 4K7
100K 4K7 2K2 fov on 9 inch I.I.
a34
C97 G163.D R154
+12V 10K
13
11 10K
Sm 21 12
D PL5 PL2
R47 R48 R101 3PL2
4K7 2K2 R153 3A5.b9 1
a32 a35 100K 2K2 Q152 W 1.11
b15 2N2222 Cde RX –ABD
C100 041D
a6 10K
PRESENCE
CI
a11 3A3 DIAPHRAGMES 2/CCD
3PL5
016D a12 9A1 (K27)
+12V a36 A Transpanel
a/b1 G155.16 832 502 G015
a9 +12V 004C
E188 C184
+
C185 C200 C103
+
C102 MODULE 8
3A5 a/3 100K 10MF 100K 100K 10MF Auxiliary coil
0V
Stenoscop 2 Series 6000 / 9000 R173 IMAGER
2A3 PUPITRE (12V)
C186
+
C187 C197 100K
a/b4 100K 10MF 100K
C.C.D. – M.D.A.
Emergency
off buttons
MODULE D MINUT. –12V
Rev. Date Serial No Avt. Mod 301 to 440
on console
–12V . -
A 15/07/96
E Sm 4 PL1 3A7 a/b2 0 10/10/96 +
+5V +5V
1 09/01/97 A175.D
PL1 +
a35 C182 C183
b4 100K 10MF 2 20/06/97 R174 3A5.b10
PL2 100K a25
b17
AD / kV 3A26. RAD 041C
a17 b17 120 Vac -
PL1 7
112D
ON = POWER DERATING
a17 081A SYX Sc +
a13 b13 S133.B G177.D R520 A175.C
ER 117C G162.E 3A9.b6
2 1K
12
11 14 12 a29
117B G176.D 13
a16 +12V 13 11 C521 077C OX HLC
R517 R518 G161.C 10K
b16 3A5 3A19.a6
R516
47K 9
12
100K 2K2
MINUT. b28 8
10
F OX
031A C519
100K
2A1 PUPITRE
MODULE G
116 117 118 119 120
A–33
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
40106 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4093 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
32 22 1 32 22 12
TB2 F5 24
2
24
34 14 34 14
11 11
3 21 31 21
1
K34 K44
a b a b
PL1
W41 W42
1A1 MOTEUR ARCEAU DC
TB3 F18 832 359 G015
A–34
PUPITRE MOD. D MINUTERIE PL1
+24V
111B 2A3 3A5 +12V 1 +12V 1A1 MOTEUR ARCEAU DC
PL5 PL2 006B 7
C36 C37
+12V Sm23 R27
006D 10MF 100K D35
A 2 1K5 Q28 832 359 G015
b3 a31 0V 0V +12V 2N2907
1N5061
R26
Sm22 (12V)
3PL3 G16.A G16.B 1 5 10K K34
b4 b32 9 R10 R11 G17.B Q25
E 1 2 3 4 5
4 R24 H11A5100 b a 0V (24V)
47K 2K2 2 4
R9 C8 6 1K 0V (24V) +24V
100K 10K
PL1 PL1 007B R32 D45

1K5 Q33
b6
b35
2N2907 1N5061
+12V +12V R31
Sm5 1 5 K44
10K
b11 a32 G17.A Q30
1
Sm9 G16.F G16.E 3 R29 H11A5100 b a
2 4
F 8 R14 R15 12 10 0V (24V)
13 11
b7 b36
2 1K 0V (24V)
47K 2K2
2A1 3A7 R13 C12 PL1 C ARM MODULE 8 IMAGER
100K 10K 14
PUPITRE MOD. G AD kV
B D7 1N5061
11 UP / DOWN
301 to 440
D3
12 14
6
MOTION MOTOR
K6 11
2 x 1N5061 D4 24 12
1 2 21 R50 R49
Tb2– 0V
22 24 46E4 46E4 CCD
21
F5
(12V)
1M1 INTERCONNECT
21 1 5
3A 4 22 BOARD
C48
34 34 4MF7
3 D23 D22 31 31 10
22
27VAC 32 32
3PL4 3PL2 J6
23 5E20 2 D21 D20
4Tb1– 423
R51
4 x MR752 +24V b Y Y 1–24 7
5TR1 Tb3– F18
6E8–7W 3PL6.c
19 3–1 1 +24V 4a c 141B
C 005D
X902 11
3A
W42
4 Z Z 1–25 8
+24V
3 d a a 1–26 9
Not
006C 18VAC 5 0V (24V) 3A3.b32 119C
connected 3A9.b32
20 E2–3–2 b b 080B b 1–27 4
2 W41
X902 12 0V (24V) 3a c 1–28
c c 5
3PL6.W
0V
141B
d d d 1–29 6
This print is wrong. 24 volts comes from low voltage power
supply to TB3-1. F18 is not on the supply side but is actually 3PL3.T
3A9.b35
on the return gnd side. This supply is fused in the camera.
080B 3A3.a33
D 119A
2
To BNC–BNC Connector
(Module 3) Video
141A 3 0V +24V
J4
2 1
427E
MODULE 7 COLLIMATOR
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ Blue White
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
BNC/BNC Plug
SGNL
E
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
Stenoscop 2 Series 6000 / 9000 ION
C.C.D. – M.D.A. H.T.
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
CHAMBER
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
A 15/07/96 .
0 10/10/96
1 09/01/97 DR4/MD10 memories only ELECTRONIC
2 20/06/97 DR4/MD10 memories only DAP
mGycm2 MODULE
F MDA memory only

SG.DAP
White 1
3PL2.D Test
141B Red 2
3PL2.K Pulses
129
121 122 123 124 125 126 / 130
127128
A–35
BA
PL1
S32
3A5 MINUTERIE BA
832 501 G015
PL2
Dual D Flip Flop CL D R S Q Q
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 0 0 0 0 1
4013
Vcc 1 0 0 1 0
Q Q C R D S
X 0 0 Q Q
Q Q C R D S
X X 1 0 0 1
GND X X 0 1 1 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
X X 1 1 1 1
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
40106 VCC 4023 VCC
GND GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A–36
+5V
PL5 PL2 3A5 MINUTERIE :
051F 101C 111B 046B 111E H / V SWEEP INVERSIONS
a7 +5V R248 H/V Sweep Inversions – TV Monitors Coil Rotation
150E G140.A R25 R24
a11 +5V 100E 100E
2 1 a25
Q195 Not connected
1 3
A 2N2907 C27
470K
Sm10 +5V G140.D R101 2 4
+5V 470E
9 8
Q55 Stenoscop 2 Series 6000 / 9000
4N32
R256
R255 R203 G140.B C.C.D. – M.D.A.
S32–2 100K
4K7 2K2
3 4 Rev. Date Serial No Avt. Mod
b16 R29 R28
A 15/07/96 .
C202 G106 +5V 100E 100E a26
10K 4013 Not connected 0 10/10/96
+5V 1 3
C31 a27
1 09/01/97
470K Not connected 2 20/06/97
R257 G140.C G140.E
S32–1 R258 R205 R105
100K 2 4
Not connected
4K7 2K2 11 470E
5 6 10
b17 Q57 a28
C204 4N32
10K
B
Sm9 MODULE 9
R247
MONITOR CART INTERFACE
150E G140.F
a10
12 13
+5V +5V Q194

PL5
2N2907
+ 12V
6
R167 D164 G163.A
R156
100K 1N6263
2K2
1 2
DSM uses monitor yoke rotation R41
D46 K36
1K
+ C165 MDA does not
C Rotate Monitor A +5V 10MF
TV MONITORS COIL ROTATION 5 MONITOR A
when used with
Sm8 R148 3PL5 9PL1 PL11 DR4 / MD10
R251 G163.B 22E R43
R252 R199 R149 a24 M 3–5 38 4 D44 K35
100K 1K
4K7 2K2 470E
3 4
b14 47
8
C198 Q151 D152
10K R150 2N2222 1N5359B
+5V 10K
R153
Sm7
R262
R265
100K
R266 G163.C R154 22E b25 K 3–1 34 5 9A1 TRANSPANEL
2K2 2K2 470E
5 6 002C 102D
b12 43
C261 D263 Q156 D157 150 210
10K 1N6263 R155 2N2222 1N5359B + 12V B 27 1
+5V 10K
007B PL6
R168
D Sm6 R249
R250 R197 G163.D R169 22E b24 S 3–3 36 6 + 12V
100K 6
4K7 2K2 470E
9 8
b8 45
C196 Q171 D172 R47
R170 1N5359B D48 K34
10K 2N2222 1K
+5V 10K
5 MONITOR B
R173
Sm5 D210 R212 when used with
R209 100K R213 G163.E R174 22E b26 U 3–8 41 7
1N6263 2K2
DR4 / MD10
2K2 470E
11 10 R45 K33
a5 50 D40
1K
C208 Q176 D177
10K D211 D264 R175 2N2222 1N5359B 8
1N6263 1N6263 10K
RAZ R33
b23 ROTATION 2K2 Q59
Rotate Monitor B Not connected
2N2222
E C58 + R34
PL20
1MF 1K5
5 23 21 22
A/B selection (split screens) forces both
a17
monitors to drive fully ccw when split screen
b11 selected on DSM 200 (DSM 600 did not rotate)
b13 MDA digital uses electronic rotation
042C R193 3A5 MINUTERIE AVIAS MDA
150E
b10 MEMORY
832 501 G015 5 23 21 22
a2
2A3 MODULE D2
F
a21
131 132 133 134 135 136 137138139

/ 140
A–37
With MDA Memory
liv. A–38
2 172 555
With DR4 & MD10 Memories
2 172 563
A–38
MODULE 9
3PL6 9PL1 PL12 PL11 MONITOR CART INTERFACE PL20
210 AVIAS
L 10 15 17 9 9
X PERM 3A1 – a20 X PERM
A M 7 2 15
MF + 3A1 – a27 MF + 27 27
F 17 10 12 8
MEMO + 3A1 – a26 MEMO + 8
K 2 9 14
MG + 3A1 – a24 MG + 7 7
E 14 3 13
VISU + 3A1 – a25 VISU + 25 25
BNC – BNC
Video 30 8 VIDEO
from Imager 6 6
31 9 from Imager
(module 8) 24 24
126D
J 1 1 18
Common 3A1 – a30 26 26
SW52 Connection used 38
+12 volts Connection used
H Solder when MDA
used to 11 8 16 when DR4 / MD10 39
X PERM + 3A1 – a8 9A1 TRANSPANEL : junction
generate C 9 7 SW53
X PERM N.U. 3A1 – a9 2 172 555 : MDA PL11 33 33
D 16 14 Solder junction
N.U. 3A1 – a14 2 172 563 : DR4 & MD10 PL12 15 15
N 8 12 002C 102D
N.U. 3A1 – a35 34 34
PL13 140 210
16 16
W 37 20 2
B 0V (24V) ( 3PL4-c ) 125D 35 35
c 42 21 3
+24V ( 3PL4-Z ) 125C 17 17
32 32
Electronic D b 57 23 5
TEST 14 14
DAP module 22 4
K Z 47 31
From Imager PULSES 31
(module 8) 13
13
126F 3PL2 12 12
30 30
B 27 1 7805 28
+12 V 28
007B
0F47
10 10
0F47
3PL5 PL10
29 29
134
5 11 11
11 36 36
CARM 10 18 18
MODULE 3 4 37 37
C CARD RACK 3 7 7 19 19
3 4 10 11 5
2 4 1 3 3 1 7 2 4 1 3
PL7
GND PL17 PL18
PL14 PL15 PL16 PL23 PL22 PL21
+ 5V TXD
MDA
Remote Remote VCR VCR Video
OUT IN
MEMORY
Printer Printer OUT
1 C–OUT Y–OUT y–OUT C–IN Y–IN

5 1 2 4 0V–C 0V–Y 0V–Y 0V–C 0V–Y J2 J2
IR RECEIVER Video 1 2 1 2
Printer AUX OUT Video board Video board
Stenoscop 2 Series 6000 / 9000 PL1
PAPER FILM VCR SVHS 523B 523B
C.C.D. – M.D.A. DAP PRINTER PRINTER
Interface board
Rev. Date Serial No Avt. Mod Electro. Sony VCR Monitor B Monitor A
A 15/07/96 .
Luminesc. SK1 0V SVBK–120 Interface SPARE MODEM
Touch Screen Power Supply Power Supply
0 10/10/96 Display Video in Video out
Control 002B 002B
1 09/01/97
2 3 5
2 20/06/97
D
Display
Driver COM3 COM4
2 5 Multi RS232
COM2 COM6 COM5
COM1
MDA P
MEMORY
141 142 143 144 145 146

147 148149
/ 150
A–39
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4012 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4023 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4093 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
40106 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Dual D Flip Flop

CL D R S Q Q
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4013 0 0 0 0 1
Vcc
Q Q C R D S 1 0 0 1 0
X 0 0 Q Q
Q Q C R D S
X X 1 0 0 1
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X X 0 1 1 0
X X 1 1 1 1
Dual MONOSTABLE
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
4538 Vcc
T =RX X CX
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A–40
+12V
3A1 INTERFACE DSM
+12V
T1 R151
200K +12V
+12V +12V +12V 209D
R150 R107 X PERM T4 R152

100K +12V
C141
4MF7
R142
100K D143 +12V +12V
A 200K 100E
+12V G82.B
12 C138 R140 D139
G119.A C147 R148
R132
C108 10
9
13
4MF7 68K D149 +12V +12V 4MF7 187K0
10MF R114 G116.D 11
150K 100K
9 8 OX*R1
C144 R146 D145
E123
R111 Q110 E125
G106.C
5 6
4MF7 187K0 204D +12V G117.B
T2
470E 555
E121 4 E126 +12V E124
+12V G117.A
202D SP C112
C109
G81.B
G622.A
T5 T1
4MF7 201B
3
G82.A G105.A
R113 100K 6 5 +12V G622.A E127
204D OX*R1 5 2 201F T2
2
11 1 100E T4 205C
4 205C
204B T1 201B 208C
G104.A G105.E 208A
1
208B T5 208B 209A
203B T4 +12V +12V 202E STOP HYST 3 11 10 9
G643.C 208B
2 10 209C
C619 R620 D621
B C613
10K 10K 220K 203B ON RESET + MCH 13
G104.D G105.B
8
G601.A 12
11 3 4 2
Normal Fluoro SN 3
11
203F R614 D615 208D STOP DSM 12 13
1 12
100K 1N914 1
G104.A G105.E 11 1
G600.A G600.D
STOP HYST 3 11 10 2
G500.A
13 3
G622.A 202E 2 3
G500.D 2
+12V +12V 1
R617 D618 G600.C G105.D OX* 5

G500.B
100K 1n914 9 G104.D G105.B G601.C
10 9 8 204C 13 4 9
G81.D
Pulsed Fluoro SP
+12V +12V 8
11 3 4 6 12
11
10
C616 12 8
202D STOP DSM G81.C 12
10K 1
G80.C 9 13
11
208D 10
C624 C630 R631 D632 +12V 3 5 6
13
10K 10K 220K 2 ON RESET + MCH 8 5
C29 40 G601.D
C Electronic Rad ER 10MF
G106.B G643.A
202B 202C
+12V G116.B
6
R28
( single pulsed 202E R625
100K
D626
1N914
3 4
ON RESET R501 3 4 G600.B
fluoro) 1K 201C 100E
G80.D SN
R27 D26 203D 9 8 203F
G622.A 100K 1N914
+12V +12V
1
R628 D629 S502.A ON RESET + MCH 1 4
100K 1N914 4 S602.A C603
202E SP 203B
Radiographic RAD
10K
C627 +12V OX OUT Normally closed

202D
10K 206C G103.A
ON RESET R13 R44
G79.E G77.A G78.A G79.B
3A19–b19 a19 202C 100K
R12 2K2
11 10 5
1
3 1 2 R54 R56 3 4
C.C.D. – M.D.A.
4K7
40 2
2K2 2K2 Rev. Date Serial No Avt. Mod
Order Xray 114F C45 6
.
R42 G78.F G78.E +12V 203B 205C A 15/07/96
from 3A19 OX Manager OX*
D 3A19–a6 a17 R10 2K2 12 10
10K
G77.B C57
13 11
10K 0 10/10/96
OX OX 203D 207C G103.B D33
4K7 OX OUT 1N914 1 09/01/97
031A R11 C43 G116.F
100K 10K
202D OX 3
4 12 G105.F G106.A 2 20/06/97
13
RAD 201C 202E 202F 203D G79.D 5 R34 R35
R50 12 2
G78.B G78.D 2 11 13 1
3A19–a8 2K2 9 8 202D RAD OX*R1 201A 204A
a22 R17 3 4 9 8
G101.A 2K2 2K2 208A
RAD RAD 207C
X PERM
4K7 209D C74
040A R18 C51
100K 10K
10K
D83
R36 G100.D G105.C
SP 201B 202F 208C
1N914
3A7–b30 a6 R3 2K2 8 6 202C 12 G100.C G100.F
SP
9 5
SP 201A 201F 202C ON RESET 9 13
11
5 6 R92 R84 13 12
Pulsed 066B R4
100K
4K7
C37
209B
202D OX
10
OX*R2 209B 209C
G101.B 2K2 2K2
Fluoro 10K +12V +12V
204E ACP C91
+12V +12V 10K
G116.C C633 C135 R136 D137
E R31 ER 202F 209C 5 6
10K 1MF 61K9
R71 G106.F G106.D R604 OX*
100K
3A7–b31 R14 2K2 200K +12V
ER
a31 100K
13 12 9 8
ER 201C 203E 204C R634
100K
D635
1N914 T3
066B C72 C607 R606
+12V 10K 10MF 100K D605
G115.A E122
T1 + T2 +12V +12V
R20 R52 G80.F C70 G80.E
100K 208C G99.C R637 D638
3A5–a13 R19 2K2
13 12
1K
11 10
9
5 100K 1n914
10 205B T2 T3
HYST STOP HYST R611 R610
ACP
40
045C a23 4K7
C53 R69 D68 ER
8 201F
6 207C
100K 1N914 202B 203B 47K 2K2 +12V G115.B 204B T1 C636
100K 202E G601.B 10K
2 second delay for anode cooling R641 G116.E
between ER pulses 470E C612 ACP 203D +12V
a18 10 11 100K G119.B
ACP ACP 204E
3
G642.D
C640
1K
S602.B E608 208D 9 8
202D RAD SN 207B 208C 2 STOP DSM

G81.A
F 3A5–a13 a33 3 1
SP 202D 8
G116.A G118.A 209B
9 2 R609
HOLD kV 202D SP
1 1
SN 201B 204C 100K
041D C73
R32 2
T1 204B 2
470E 208C 209A
1K 206C OX OUT
202E C67 R66 D65
ER 10K 1N914
100K
201 202 203 204 205

A–41
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4012 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4023 VCC
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
GND
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
ÇÇÇÇÇ
4093 VCC
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
40106 VCC
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
GND
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Dual D Flip Flop
CL D R S Q Q
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4013 0 0 0 0 1
Vcc
Q Q C R D S 1 0 0 1 0
X 0 0 Q Q
Q Q C R D S
X X 1 0 0 1
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X X 0 1 1 0
X X 1 1 1 1
Dual MONOSTABLE
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
4538 Vcc
T =RX X CX
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A–42
G642.E MODULE 9 – INTERFACE

9PL1
3A1 INTERFACE “DSM” 204D OX*R1
11 10
A
828 988 G 035 5
4
3PL6
9A1 002C 140
205B T2 TRANSPANEL 102D 150
G643.B G118.C
13 E59
11 10
204B T1 PL12 PL11
Stenoscop 2 Series 6000 / 9000 12
R24
C.C.D. – M.D.A. 203F SN
6
1K a26 F 17 10 12
4
Rev. Date Serial No Avt. Mod 5 MEMO +
A 15/07/96 . C60
G102.B
203E 13 10K
0 10/10/96 SN 11
1 09/01/97 12
2 20/06/97 G102.D
8
205B T2 10
9
203B T5
G102.C
E58
B
G100.A
9
10 13 2
R23
1 13
12
11 11
1K a25 E 14 3 13
12 VISU +
G75.B
G77.D C22
202D 5 10K
SP 4
204D 6
OX*R2
G76.B
SN 203E
T5 203B
G99.B
D95 G106.E R21
G99.A
4 6
11 10
1K a24 K 2 9 14
3 2 1N914 202E ER MG +
R86 R94
C 5
1
T4 203B
C55
2K2 2K2 10K
C93
10K
R25
5
+ 12 V 202E ER 4
1K a27 M 7 2 15
D650 6 MF +
R639 202D SP
1N914 G104.B C61
G75.A 100K
G500.C R652 R651 10K
G79.C
3
6 5 2 10 9
2K2 2K2
SN
OX OUT 11
4
5 S502.B 203E
a30 J 1 1 18
202C 205D 8 C653 COMMON
100K
G76.D T3 205C
11 13
OX OUT D89
D 202D
G76.A
12
X PERM 209D
1N914
R90 R98
3A19.a5 a15 3 2 T1 204B
OX OUT 2K2 2K2
R9 C97
031A C41 1
G77.C
470E G99.D 2K2
1K 202D
10 8
OX
11 13
RAD 202D T1 + T2
9
12 D87
203E
1N914
R88 R96
T2 205B
2K2 2K2 + 12 V
C95
10K
G76.C
a3 OX*R2 204D R38
+ 12 V + 12 V
E 007C C128 C129 C130
10 9
202A 203D
220E
a8 H 11 8 16
SN 203F 207C G116.E
10MF 100K 100K 8
0V
a35 10 11 C5 C6 X PERM.
X PERM 10MF 100K
E49
007C
E131 X PERM. +
Card rack G79.A C62 G79.F R46
10K 2K2 a20 L 10
12 1 12 13 R14 15 17
STOP DSM
4K7
203B 204C D64 R63 C43 R15
1N914 100K 10K 4K7
205F a9 C 9 7
A/B+
RAZ ROTATION G80.B G80.A R39
3A5–b23 2K2 a14 D 16 14
F a21 4 3 2 1 R7
4K7
Not used C48
R16
C40 R8 A/B
470E 4K7
1K 10K
206 207 208 209 210

A–43
211 to 300 : reserve.

441 to 500
A–44
SCHEMATICS :
IMAGER 16/22
A–45
IMAGER 16 STENO CCD 625l

MIS CABLES
A–46
IMAGER 22 STENO CCD 625l

MIS CABLES
A–47
INTERFACE CCD BOARD
Video out to To video Board

video Board
CCD
Gain
A–48
INTERFACE CCD 50 or 60 Hz
A
-9 volts
B Ribbon
Composite
cable
sync
CCD
chip
Not used (for
r&f LIH)
+7 volts +5 volts
V. Drive
H Drive
C
CCD
D Gain
Raw video out to

J2 on video Board

C.C.D. – M.D.A.
A 15/07/96 .
0 10/10/96
1 09/01/97
2 20/06/97
301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310
A–49
CCD POWER SUPPLY BOARD
A–50
CCD POWER SUPPLY BOARD

A
Stenoscop 2 Series 6000 / 9000 J 1

5 V C.C.D. – M.D.A. T P 2
5 V Rev. Date Serial No Avt. Mod
1
A 15/07/96 . E D GE 6 2
5 V 0 10/10/96 A1 B1
R 5 L S 1 1 09/01/97
1
4. 22K T P 5 T MB _ 0 5 2 20/06/97 A2 B2
1 5 80 degree C
0 V A3 B3 0 V
2
I + B
6 8 U 2 2 warning
l m3 1 1
5 V S buzzer does A4 B4
B R 6
V + 7
681 V –
O not shut off
A5 B5
3 camera
G
I – 4
U 3 A6 B6
1
3
L M3 5 D
A7 B7
GND
+ Vs
0 V 0 V 0 V
0 V A8 B8
Vo u t 2
A9 B9
1
5 V 0 V
T P 1 A1 0 B1 0
P T 1
Thermal sensor 10 1 A1 1 B1 1
C mV/degree C – 1 5 V
1 A1 2 B1 2
P S 1
1 D S 2
24T5. 15K
C 3 $555–2303 A1 3 B1 3
11 S E NS E _ + 5 V GRE E N
2 4 V
2 mm
47uF A1 4 B1 4
2 35V 2
8 S E NS E _ 0 _ 5 V L 2
0 V 0 V A1 5 B1 5 0 V
1
L 1 10
+5V
2
4 + Vi 1 + 1 5 V T P 3 A1 6 B1 6
5 9 1uH
1uH
+ Vi 2 0_5V 0 V
1
24 volt supply from
0 V A1 7 B1 7 2 4 V
1 0 V L 3 stenoscop LVLE
1
D S 1
2 – Vi 1 +15V 14
A1 8 B1 8 supply to 1A1
3
$555–2303
GR E E N
– Vi 2
13 1uH 1 0 V elevator board to
0_15V 0 V
D 2 mm C 5 1
C 1
6 ON| OF F L 4
D S 3
$555–2303
A1 9 B1 9
CCD power supply.
1
2 –15V 12 GR E E N
100nF 1 A2 0 B2 0
7 2 mm
50V 220uF CA S E C 2
2 50V 1uH
R 2 2 A2 1 B2 1
3. 83K R 1 47uF
4. 75K 2 35V
R 3 A2 2 B2 2
2. 15K 2 4 VI N 2 AT _ 2 5 0 V 1
2
A2 3 B2 3
3
1
F 1 4
A2 4 B2 4
5
0 V 0 V 0 V 0 V 0 V
6
A2 5 B2 5
0 V
A2 6 B2 6 S 1
1 ON / OF F
E D S 4 A2 7 B2 7
1 $555–2303 0 V
GRE E N
C 4 A2 8 B2 8
2 mm
0 V
47uF 2 A2 9 B2 9
2 35V
R 4 – 1 5 V T P 4 A3 0 B3 0
2. 15K
1 A3 1 B3 1
Ma l e
0 V St r a i g h t 0 V
Ed g e
F
31
311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320
A–51
CCD INTERFACE BOARD
A–52

C.C.D. – M.D.A.
CCD INTERFACE BOARD Rev. Date Serial No Avt. Mod
A ( 1/3 ) A 15/07/96 .
0 10/10/96
1 09/01/97
2 20/06/97
Auto = 5volts
manual = 0volts
+9 volts DC AGC on/off

J1
CCD Interface Board

B
R&F
331B only
333D
Auto (for
AGC on/off)
C Iris 331D
Control
Not used
to video board
5 volts = fluoro on
unblank camera
D
Mag
to video board
331B
R&F
331B
Sweep
reversal
not used
J1
F J1 CCD Interface Board

CCD Interface Board

321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330
A–53

C.C.D. – M.D.A.
CCD INTERFACE BOARD Rev. Date Serial No Avt. Mod
.
A ( 2/3 ) A
0
15/07/96
10/10/96
1 09/01/97
2 20/06/97
DS1 Getter gas Edge focus

326D detection. Flashes Center focus
at power up then
goes out.
327B
B
326D Edge focus
Size
I.I. size
C
Center focus Zeners
limit
voltage to
Iris motor
D
348B
326C
330B
To
Iris

HLC
E high dose
Iris feedback
331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340
A–54
CCD INTERFACE BOARD

( 3/3 )
A Parabola generator

333D

Roundness

E

Agc/Abd
window size = Size
40% image
diameter

C.C.D. – M.D.A.
A 15/07/96 .
0 10/10/96
F 1 09/01/97
2 20/06/97
341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350
A–55
VIDEO CCD BOARD
Agc display switch

R = normal
S = display Preamp video To monitor (MDA)
TP35 is the solder dot
R10 Cal
X1 video cal Gen. level
generator = B adjust
pos
A–56

VIDEO CCD BOARD C.C.D. – M.D.A.
A ( 1/7 ) A 15/07/96 .
0 10/10/96
1 09/01/97
+ 1 5 V
2 20/06/97
C6
R2 4 3
+ 1 5 V 0 V R2 2 6
+ 1 5 V 100 + 1 5 V
100
1 0 0 n F6 3 V
C1 1 1
C7 L 1 3
0 V
1 2 2 Q1 8
0 V Q1 3
2 100nF 63V
S O3 9 0 4 SST 4 4 0 Q2 0 R2 2 8
27pF 4. 7uH R2 4 4 C1 2 2 3K T P 1 2
B 63V 1
3 G D S O3 9 0 4
33
Bandwidth R3 5 1
S T P 1 1 R2 2 5 1
47nF variable gain amp 0.5 to 5 times in AGC 22
factory adjusted
R2 4 6 R2 2 4
63V 1
2. 7K 1 2K
+1 5 V 2. 7K 3
C1 5 4. 7uF 25V R2 2 7 R8 video to black level
– 1 5 V R3 7 C2 2
R2 0 3 R2 6 150 +1 5 V 2. 7K and threshold
R2 4 1 1K 2 2K 2 1
0 V 0 V DE T V OL
1 2 R2 2 3 4. 7K
100 1 150
+1 5 V – 1 5 V R2 5 – 1 5 V 4. 7uF 25V R3 8
3 A R1
7 4 8
– 1 5 V 1 1K
L T12 2 3 1
220 I + V + R3 2 C1 9 V – 1
6 6 S O3 9 0 6 S
– 1 5 V L 2
2 I – 5 Main video to Gamma
2
Q1 8 O2O 2 O1
O 1 22 Q2 1 33pF O2O P OS T A GC1
R2 4 0 7 G D 2 I – 5
D SST 4 4 0 S 4. 7uH 2 63V R3 4 220 6
R2 3 R2 2 3
3 G 4 V – 1 I + V + L T1 2 2 3
33 33 CL P 1 A S 0 V R3 9
C 1K SU 4 8 3 7 A R2
0 V 750
clamp to 0 volts Q1 9 S 5 R2 7 C1 6
C1 1 0 R2 2 9 C2 0
1 1 2
SST 2 1 1 0 V 100nF 63V 100 +1 5 V
2 1
1 R2 2 2 – 1 5 V 150 33pF P OS T A GC2
2 C1 0 4. 7uF25V R3 6 150 C2 1
C1 1 100 63V 4. 7uF 25V
C1 1 3
To AGC command
0 V
1. 5uF 1. 5uF R2 0 0 V 100nF 63V
2 25V 1 220 R3 1 2K
25V
VCC – 1 5 V
B P G1 _ U T 1M
R2 3 2
0 V 0 V R2 3 6
1
– 1 5 V 1K
1
X 9
D
I N
7 R2 3 3 C1 1 4
R2 1 V– MA X GA I N
33 4 1 2
V+
100
1
D 0 V 3
GN 2
R7
+ 1 5 V 1. 5uF 25V 0 V
5 200 factory R2 3 4
VL A R1 1 2
S2
S1
adjusted 7
1 0 V
l t 1012
C9 R2 8 3 R2 3 0 V + I – 1K
U1 6
8
100K OO 2
4. 7uF R2 0 4 4. 7K O1 Q2 2
2 10V DG4 1 9 8 I + 3
S
10 + 1 5 V R3 0 G
1 V –
1
T P 2 1. 8K
0 V 5 4
G
C1 1 5 SST 3 0 9
Preamp video (for abc) R2 4 5 51 1
2
3
P RE A GC 2. 2nF
R2 3 1
R2 4 2 Q3 R1 4 4 63V
3 G D R2 3 5
R2 4 8 2K SST 1 1 2 100 0 V – 1 5 V
CA L GA I N S 100 C1 1 2
C6 6 2
10 C1 4 R2 9 1. 5uF 0 V
Cal Gen. video 1 47K
J 2 33K 0 V NON
25V
E 2 5. 6pF 3
R1 4 3
CABL
100nF63V
VI DEO 3 1 5 3 3
63V 1 2
I N 2
4 R1 R2 0 V Q1 5 V T E S T C1 C1 1 6
from CCD S O3 9 0 4 3. 3K V TEST = 1 volt pulses in CR1 9
200 200 $ B A R4 3
2 2 C6 7 1 manual varies in auto. 0 V 8. 5–40pF 33pF
R1 4 6 R1 4 5
1 1 Integrated ABC brightness 3 100V 63V
1 2 – 1 5 V pulses injected during blanking
4. 7K 2. 2K
interval for AGC.
S COP I E GRA P HI E 10uF 16V
AGC gain control 0 V
GA I NCONT
CL P 2 A
R1 = fluoro gain preset. with 100mV at

TP2 adjust R1 to give 250mV at TP3
F TP1 = GND TP1 = GND
351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360
A–57

VIDEO CCD BOARD C.C.D. – M.D.A.
A ( 2/7 ) Rev. Date Serial No Avt. Mod
A 15/07/96 .
0 10/10/96
1 09/01/97
2 20/06/97
Gamma &AGC
corrected video
Post AGC
video
C
Fluoro on
V. Rate
Gamma ADJ. job card 353. With 1000mv at

tp2 (preamp) video, adjust R9 to get 640mV
at TP3 (monitor). This presents "blooming"
and saturation of digital A/D (saturates at 1v
composite
F
361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370
A–58
A
VIDEO CCD BOARD
( 3/7 )
50 mV black
level setup
Gamma and
AGC corrected
B
video
H clamp

C.C.D. – M.D.A.
A 15/07/96 .
0 10/10/96
1 09/01/97
F 2 20/06/97
371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380
A–59
VIDEO CCD BOARD

( 4/7 )

C.C.D. – M.D.A.
A 15/07/96 .
B 0 10/10/96
1 09/01/97
2 20/06/97
C
Integrator
DC voltage to
D variable AGC
gain Amp
E manual gain (fixed

resistor in manual
mode).
AGC gain (adjust for

250mV at TP3 flat field
5 pulses during video in "AUTO")
vertical blanking
interval
381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390
A–60
A Stenoscop 2 Series 6000 / 9000 VIDEO CCD BOARD

C.C.D. – M.D.A.
( 5/7 )
A 15/07/96 .
0 10/10/96
1 09/01/97
2 20/06/97
Integrated
ABC dc video
pulses added
5 pulses during to V. blanking
V. blanking interval for
interval AGC operation
TP2
preamp video
D
Black level threshold
compensated AGC window
To ABD to develop
2.1 volts dc at proper
brightness (Used by
steno for ABC)
391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400
A–61
A Stenoscop 2 Series 6000 / 9000

C.C.D. – M.D.A.
VIDEO CCD BOARD Rev. Date Serial No Avt. Mod
A 15/07/96 .
( 6/7 ) 0 10/10/96
1 09/01/97
2 20/06/97
H blank 12 micro
seconds
X1 = test signal generator

A = normal
B = cal. mode
Remove J2 coax before
turning on test generator
E
401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410
A–62

A C.C.D. – M.D.A. VIDEO CCD BOARD
.
( 7/7 )
A 15/07/96
0 10/10/96
1 09/01/97
2 20/06/97
Collimator black level

threshold adj. Black level Treshold
compensated AGC
window
E
AGC window
411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420
A–63
CCD STENOSCOP INTERCONNECT BOARD
A–64

A C.C.D. – M.D.A.
CCD STENOSCOP Rev. Date Serial No Avt. Mod
INTERCONNECT BOARD A 15/07/96 .
0 10/10/96
( 1/2 ) 1 09/01/97
2 20/06/97
421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430
A–65
CCD STENOSCOP INTERCONNECT BOARD Stenoscop 2 Series 6000 / 9000

A ( 2/2 ) C.C.D. – M.D.A.
A 15/07/96 .
0 10/10/96
1 09/01/97
2 20/06/97
431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440
A–66
SCHEMATICS : MONITOR
BLOCK DIAGRAM
H. YOKE
LIGHT FR
SENSOR W3 W2
BOARD
BRT 220K SELECTION W4

100 / 120 Hz W1 BOARD W2
W6
CONT 12V
W7 120/100 Hz NC BR 0V NC
W8 GND
J1 1 2 3 4 5 6
NC
1 2 3 4
1
1 2 3 4 5 J4 C VID
2
J1 H. COIL GND 3 W4 W2
V. INP 4 1 VIDEO IN
W3 W1
J7 OUT IN 2 GND
1
V. COIL J2 1
2 2
J2 CONT. F1 8
3
10K
4 K 7 CRT
J5 J1
FOCUS 4
DEFLECTION BLK 6 W11 G2 3
YOKE
HS 5 W5 G1 2
BOARD G1 4 W6 F2 1
0V 3 W7
0V 2
5V 1 W9 VIDEO GND
J6
W2
BOARD TB1
0V 27V 62V 12V 95V

4 3 2 1 W8 W7 W6 W5 W3
J3
W8
1 2 3 4 5 6
TB2
FOCUS
G2
2 3 4 5 6 7
27V
HPV 0V J2
95V W5
0V W6
H.V. 6.3V W8
L.V.
POWER +12V W7
POWER
SUPPLY NC W9
SUPPLY
W2 W1 GP1
VAC
ANODIC V
A–67
DEFLECTION BOARD
TOP VIEW OF MONITOR

WITH CARDS LOCATION
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
1 : L.V. Power supply

3 : H.V. Power supply
4 : Video board
5 : Selection board
A–68
From L.V. Power supply Schematic Symbols/Abbreviations
549A
545E
Brightness control
A 549B
549C
549B
508
DEFLECTION BOARD
( 1/2 )
509
C.C.D. – M.D.A.
A 15/07/96 .
F 0 10/10/96
1 09/01/97
2 20/06/97
501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510
A–69
DEFLECTION BOARD
TOP VIEW OF MONITOR

WITH CARDS LOCATION
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
ÍÍ

4 : Video board
5 : Selection board
A–70
A Stenoscop 2 Series 6000 / 9000 DEFLECTION BOARD

C.C.D. – M.D.A. ( 2/2 )
A 15/07/96 .
0 10/10/96
1 09/01/97
2 20/06/97
511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520
A–71
TOP VIEW OF MONITOR

WITH CARDS LOCATION
VIDEO BOARD
ÍÍÍÍÍ

4 : Video board
5 : Selection board
A–72
122D
or
144C
VIDEO BOARD

E C.C.D. – M.D.A.
A 15/07/96 .
0 10/10/96
1 09/01/97
2 20/06/97
521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530
A–73
TOP VIEW OF MONITOR

WITH CARDS LOCATION
H.V. POWER SUPPLY BOARD

4 : Video board
5 : Selection board
A–74
A Stenoscop 2 Series 6000 / 9000

H.V. POWER SUPPLY BOARD C.C.D. – M.D.A.
A 15/07/96 .
0 10/10/96
1 09/01/97
2 20/06/97
531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540
A–75
L. V. POWER SUPPLY BOARD

TOP VIEW OF MONITOR
WITH CARDS LOCATION

4 : Video board
5 : Selection board
A–76
MODULE 9 – INTERFACE
9Tb1.
A 4
or
11
220 VAC
from
9TR1
002B
2
or
9
1
or
8
E CON. 4 pin CON. 7 pin
L.V. POWER SUPPLY BOARD

C.C.D. – M.D.A.
A 15/07/96 .
F 0 10/10/96
1 09/01/97
2 20/06/97
541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550
A–77
Blank page
A–78
TOC Preinstallation Installation Functional Check
Functional Check Service Procedures Renewal Parts Schematics TOC Theory
GE Medical Systems
STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 Series
Technical Supplement
REV 1
SECTION 1 - THEORY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
SECTION 7 - THEORY 7-1

7-1 MODULE 9, POWER CIRCUITS (MONITOR CART) 7-3
7-2 CONVERTER MODULE 4 7-5
7-3 HV CIRCUITS 7-9
7-4 BOARD 3A12 kV/mA 7-11
7-5 3A19 SCR COMMAND 7-13
7-6 3A19 BOARD 7-15
7-7 ABC HYSTERESIS 7-17
7-8 TIMER DISPLAY 7-17
7-9 3A7AD-kV BOARD 7-19
7-10 3A7 AD/kV BOARD 7-21
7-11 3A9 kV/mA BOARD 7-23
7-11-1 Auto Fluoro Mode 7-23
7-11-2 Manual Fluoro Mode 7-23
7-11-3 Rad mAs Reference 7-23
7-12 3A26 FILAMENT CIRCUITS 7-27
7-12-1 Fluoro Mode 7-27
7-12-2 Rad Mode 7-27
7-13 3A26 FILAMENT CIRCUITS 7-29
7-14 FLUORO TIMER 7-31
7-15 3A3 COLLIMATORS 7-33
7-15-1 6” Single Field Image Tube 7-33
7-15-2 6”-9” Dual Field Image Tube 7-33
7-15-3 Circular Collimators 7-33
7-16 3A3 BOARD 7-35
7-17 C-ARM MOTOR DRIVE 7-37
7-18 3A5 TIMER 7-39
7-18-1 TV Monitor Image Rotation 7-39
7-19 LAB EXERCISE 7-41
7-20 TV CAMERA 7-43
7-20-1 Power Supply (PL1) 7-43
7-20-2 Pre-Amp and Video Board (PL2) 7-45
7-21 SYNC AND MASK BOARD (PL3) 7-47
7-22 SCAN CONVERTER AND FOCUS (PL5) 7-49
7-23 IRIS CONTROL 7-51
7-24 DSM VMI MONITOR CIRCUITS 7-53
7-25 1010 FORMATTER 7-63
7-26 VIDEO AMPLIFIER 7-69
7-26-1 Smoothing Board 7-69
7-26-2 V Defl 7-69
7-26-3 H Defl 7-69
7-26-4 CRT Board 7-69
7-26-5 Output Board 7-69
7- 1
GE Medical Systems
7-27 ELECTRONIC ADJUSTMENT LAB EXERCISE 7-71

7-28 MONICON 3 LAB EXERCISE 7-73
7- 2
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
M
K1 9 PL1
Delay
220V to Monitors & DSM
R1 and R2
Power on
275V
230/120
AC Module 4
Converter
9Sm1
Line Transformer
9TR1
5TR1
Module 3 To LV PS
(Console Panel 1
stop
+ 12v, +5v
K3 buttons)
X-ray Tube
Filaments
C Arm
K1 Motor
Safety
Interlock (9PL1)
K5
Image
System
9 A4
Module 5
MSI XR 0348
7- 3
GE Medical Systems
Module 9, Power Circuits (Monitor Cart)

Illustration 7-1
7- 4
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
1-1 MODULE 9, POWER CIRCUITS (MONITOR CART)
Refer to Illustration 7-1.
Line Transformer 9TR1, input tapped for either 120 or 230v AC, 60Hz operation.
9TR1 supplies 275VAC to the converter on Module 4 and 5TRI on Module 5
5TR1 supplies power to the ± 12 v and + 5v DC supplies on Panel 1, the x-ray tube filament circuits, C-Arm drive motor and the image system.
9TR1 also provides power for the TV Monitors and the Memory System.
Power to 9TR1 is applied by depressing the 9Sm1 Power ON button (back side of Memory Display Cart).
9Sml is released by actuating the Console Stop buttons energizing relay K3 and the auxiliary coil of 9Sml.
On “power-up,” Line Transformer 9TR1 is energized through R1 and R2 (current limiting) and then through K1 after the delay M. (R2 used only
on 120 VAC operation)
If the interconnecting cable plug, 9PL1, to the Memory Display is removed, relay K5 will be energized and will open 9Sml by energizing its
auxiliary coil.
7- 5
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
CR1
CC V1 CR2 L1
Rectifier 12 VL
275V AC & VA 4TR1
from Filter HV
L3
9TR1 CC V2 CR5
34 Load CR6
4CR7
4TR1- TOROIDAL TRANSFORMER
TR2- H.V. TRANSFORMER
LOAD- HIGH VOLTAGE RECTIFIERS, VOLTAGE DOUBLER, FILTER AND X-RAY TUBE.
3A19 3PL3
C
1R3 a17
1 2 36B B
a16
MODULE 4 1 2 4Tbl
CONVERTER
4DS1 4TR2
4A2
PL2
4CR2 5
4R2 4C1 6
4C2
1
4CR3 4A1
4E10 -1 + L1 4TR1
-1 + E1
+
4C6 4CR7 4C5 4 H.V.
2 4CR4
- - - - L3
Transfor.
Pri.
2
4Tb1-8 4CR5 CR7
7
5B
4C4 4C3 4E 7
4R 3 4A2
PL2
4A2 1 4CR6
4R4
6 5 PL2
R10 2
6 4A2
4A1
PL1 1
SELECT. CAPA
2
AUX.
16
CAPA PREPO 15
7
MAIN SCR
6
MAIN SCR
11
3A19
10
COMMANDE SCR MSI XR 0349
Module 4
Illustration 7-2
7- 6
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
1-2 CONVERTER MODULE 4
Refer to drawing top of Illustration 7-2.
At T=0 assume CR1 is turned on in the RAD mode. Capacitors C1 and C2 discharge through CR1, 4TR1 and HV.
At the same time C3 and C4 are charging up.
When C1 and C2 are discharged CR1 turns off.
Next CR6 is triggered ON. Now C3 and C4 discharge through HV, 4TR1 and CR6.
Current flow through HV primary produces the high voltage in its secondary to the transformer load consisting of voltage doublers and the X-ray
tube.
When C3 and C4 are discharged CR6 turns off and the process is repeated.
Power to the input of HV is proportional to the value of C, the voltage Va and the pulse frequency, or the rate at which CR1 and CR6 are
triggered. Refer to the actual Converter Schematic (lower drawing Illustration 2), minimum triggering between CR1 and CR6 is 30 µsec; and
established by the SCR command Board 3A19.
3A19 Board enables selecting capacitors C1 and C4 in the RAD mode by turning on CR4.
3A19 Board enables controlling CR7 to permit presetting capacitors C3 and C4.
4TR1 is used to sense CR1 and CR6 conduction current. The current flow data is used on board 3A19.
In fluoro, only capacitors C2 and C3 are used.
7- 7
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
This page intentionally left blank.
7- 8
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
6A1
CI DIVISEUR
8 24 428 G15
PCB Presence Safety

Illustration 7-3
7- 9
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
Doubler 6A1
1000 / 1
From H. V. Divider Kv Measured Kv
Converter LS SS Measuring to 3A12
Transformer
Module 4 Ckt
Doubler
Measured mA Sc
(FL)
6A1
MA / MAS
MEASURING CKT Measured mA Gr
(Rad)
Rad (+)
Fil.
5A1 Trans
FL (-)
3A19 Open 6 Sa1
stops converter
Open at 70_C 6 Sa1
+12V
Open at 50_C 6 SaTH2
3A3 TH
3A7
MSI XR 0 347
HV Circuits
Illustration 7-4
7- 10
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
1-3 HV CIRCUITS
Board Interlock Circuit.
The HV Transformer derives its input power from the converter on Module 4
The secondary of the HV Transformer is fed to doubler circuits, the output of which is applied to the x-ray tube.
The 2000/1 divider furnishes the actual measured kV to 3A12.
The MA/MAS measuring circuit provides an indication of the actual MA/MAS during fluoro and rad operation.
If the x-ray Tube Head temperature reaches 70°C, 6Sa1 opens and stops the converter.
6SaTH2 opens at 50 °C head temperature to develop the TH signal used on 3A7. It reduces the fluoro power to 154W, and actuates the
temperature indicator on the Console Display. A positive pulsed filament transformer output energizes the x-ray tube large focal spot for rad
operation
A negative pulsed filament transformer output energizes the x-ray tube small focal spot for fluoro operation.
7- 11
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
FL Timer
3A19
SEXP Op 55, G32, 3A3
G33 PRX
a5 3A19
Arc Det Op46 TROU CLQ
3A19
OX Monostable G32, 3A19
G30 ,Counter (Shuts down
G31 Converter
Indicates after 4
shutdown arcs)
CR4
3A19 OSC G79 INT4 CLQ
PRI
Integrator Op 97
3A19 KV* = ( KV -1 ) 1.1
Clock Compare
20 20
3A9 Selected Kv/20
Op102 Op114
KV Error 3A19
6A1 Op122 Demx
Measured Op180 Op132
Kv C137 Compare
Adder
Select KV/20 Op114
R232
KV Composite
6A1 Op160 3A26 KV85%
Measured mA SC Op168 3A19
(FL) 120KV
6A1 Op 152, 192, 203

Measured mA Gr 3A26
(Followers)
(Rad)
Measured mASc
Measured mAGr
MSI XR 0353
Board 3A12 kV/mA

Illustration 7-5
7- 12
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
1-4 BOARD 3A12 kV/mA
SEXP from 3A19 generates x-ray ON. It is used to produce the PRX signal to 3A3. PRX increments the fluoro time counter and the total x-
ray exposure time counter on 3A3.
Op46 detects arcing in the HV system. A large voltage drop in the high voltage system is considered due to arcing. Counter G31 after
counting four arcs, interrupts x-ray. LED CR4 indicates the x-ray shutdown. The signal indicating any arcing on A5 is used by the hysteresis
safety circuit on 3A19.
kV measured and MA fluoro measured are combined to produce the kV composite signal. MA measured corrects for HV system bleeder
current.
The kV composite is stored on capacitor C137 and fed to the comparator Op102. Op102 compares this signal with the kV/20 selected value.
The clock input resets C137 to update the information to the comparator.
Op97 integrates the error output from Op102. G79 activates the integrator Op97 when it is triggered by the PR1 signal . When the exposure
starts, the converter is running at maximum frequency to rapidly increase the kV. During this time the DEMX is present to 3A19. When the
kV/20 composite reaches the kV/20* reference at the input to comparator OP122, the converter frequency is changed to now correct for any
OP97 integrator error output. Each error correction again requires developing the DEMX signal.
PRI monitors the main SCR’s current and is used to trigger the monostable osc G79.
Op160 compares the kV/20 Composite with its reference kV/20 selected input. It produces the kV 85 output when the kV/20 composite
reaches 85 of the selected kV/20 level.
Op 168 produces the 120kV output when the kV/20 composite exceeds its reference input.
7- 13
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
Signal through Bistable SEXP 3A12, 3A5, 3A3

memory Closed if Flip-Flop
OX S76A memory
G114, G117 PRE 3A26
Interface interface
is not used. G115, G155 SYXSC 3A26
X-ray Button Q235 TR248
BPCL Q238 To converter
G112, 116,118 4CR7 (Preset C3 & C4)
FS Logic
Rad Rad
Sec Bellows To converter 4CR4
G118, 113, 117, TR313 (Select all
(3A26) Stop MAS G128 Q303
115 Logic 555 Clock Timer Q300 capacitors in
(3A12) INT4 CLQ (Rad)
(3A12) 120 Kv Clock
Clock
SEXP Q256 TR269 To converter 4CR6
Q Q259 Main SCR
PRI G119, 120 G122D
Logic G121A
3A12 TROU CLQ _
3A12 DEMX Q Q281 TR291 To converter 4CR1
G122A Q278 Main SCR
3A26 +12V G216, G113,

Q189, Q178 To Q181, Q259, Q303, Q238
& SX
MSI XR 0354
3A19 SCR Command

Illustration 7-6
7- 14
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
1-5 3A19 SCR COMMAND
The signal OX (command X-ray) is developed by any of the following to the logic circuits:
a) BPCL - Console X-ray button
b) FS - Foot Switch fluoro
c) FS - Foot Switch Rad
OX signal is passed through the Memory System and returned. If Memory is not used, S76A must be closed and board 3A1 must be removed.
OX flips the bi-stable Flip-Flop to momentarily turn on Q238 and Q235 and switch ON converter SCR CR7. This enables discharging converter
capacitors C3 in fluror, and C3 and C4 in RAD.
The action takes place provided:

Sec Bellows =1 (x-ray head temperature less than 70°C)
Int 4 CLQ =1 (no arcing)
Stop MAS =1 (not end of Rad exposure)
120kV =1 (not at 120kV)
The OX signal also enables developing the SEXP, PRE (Rad) and SYX SC (FL) signals.
When SEXP =1 to flip-flop G119Band 120B) , G121A latch Q and Q outputs alternately enable the drive circuits to TR269 and TR291.
Converter SCR’s CR6 and CR1 thus cannot be switched ON simultaneously. They will be driven alternately by the G128 clock output.
The clock G128 is triggered by PRI = 1 and the following input signals:
DEMX = 0
TROU CLQ =1 (no HV leakage )
SEXP = 1
In RAD operation TR313 will switch ON converter SCR CR4. This enables selecting additional converter capacitors.
All drivers Q181, Q259, Q303 and Q238 will be locked out if SX is not present or +12V supply drops below 6.2V.
7- 15
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
Comparator
A135 +
4TR1
E125
GR G115 Rad
3A7
G115 Rad
3A19 Current Detector

Illustration 7-7
7- 16
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
1-6 3A19 BOARD
4TR1 senses the Converter current through the main SCR’s CR1 and CR6.
The secondary of 4TR1 is rectified and drives the comparator A135. A135 compares the level from 4TR1 with that on its positive input.
The output of the G115 inverts the A135 output during the SCR conduction interval and switches the input to A137. This produces the PRI
signal to 3A12 to trigger the G79 Timer on 3A12 and G128 on 3A19.
PRI indicates SCR current present.
R123 sets the threshold level for switching A137.
A137 acts as a low pass filter and prevents false triggering due to noise.
GR input develops the RAD and RAD signals.
7- 17
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
RX Sample & Hold Gain

(From TV A71 , 82 R66 A74B KV/20 Auto
camera)
(To 3A7)
+V
Integrator A73
A121
+V Comparators
Ref. R65
R67
Threshold
(3A12) PRX CP Counters G143, 144 Decoders G184,

(50 Hz) 158, 159, 160, 161 185, 186, 187 Displays
DS 15 (.01)
DS 16 (.1)
DS 17 (1.0)
DS 18 (10.0)
3A7
Console Reset
Counts to 99.99
Timer
Module G
MSI XR 0350
ABC Hysteresis
Illustration 7-8
7- 18
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
1-7 ABC HYSTERESIS
The purpose of this circuit is to provide a kV/20 reference in the auto mode using the RX control signal from the TV Camera. This assures
correct kV’s for an optimum TV image.
The RX signal from the TV Camera is fed to the input sample and hold circuit involving amplifiers A71 and A82. A82 acts as a comparator with
a reference set by R65.
The output of A82 is fed through a system gain adjust R66 to integrator A73.
A74B will not pass the RX output of A82 unless it is greater than or less than the threshold determined by hysteresis adjustment R67.
When the RX signal is not present the output will provide a kV/20 of 2V, equal to 40 RV reference.
1-8 TIMER DISPLAY
PRX CP clock signal of 50Hz is fed to counters G143 and G144 and divided by 50.
G144 drives the 4 bit counter G158.
The output is decoded on G184 which drives the 7 segment DS15 1/100 sec display.
After 10 sec. the Q3 output of G158 drives counter and decoder G159 and G185 to display 1/10 second on DS16. G159 counts 6 and drives
G160 to display minutes on DS17.
Finally G161 receives a pulse from G160 to display tens of minutes on DS18 display.
SM19 on the Console enables resetting the counters and displays.
7- 19
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
1KHz
(3A19) OJC G148
WR
OX A>B A>B 4 bit comparators A/D
G108, 126 Analog
G90
Auto= closed KV/20
Sm49 from 3A5
& TV Camera
Up-down Latch G69
Logic Ckts Controls FL
& Latch G48, 31
G70
300 KHz
To G150
SC
(3A5) Clock To 3A9
Hold Kv
(3A9) 40-110Kv Latch G97
Limits Clock Rad
SC
SC
(3A9)
3Hz & 30 Hz Up-down
OSC & Counters
2Sec delay G138, 125
MSI XR 0352
3A7 AD-kV
Illustration 7-9
7- 20
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
1-9 3A7 AD-kV BOARD
The major function of this board is to generate the kV reference in both the auto & manual modes.
Operating mode is selected by console switch SM49. Console buttons SM31 & SM32 increment and decrement respectively the up-down
counters G48 & G31 and set the Latch G69 in fluoro manual.
Counters G138 & G125 and Latch G97 are incremented or decremented in the Rad mode.
The 8 bit Latch output data G69 (fluoro) or G97 (Rad) is transmitted on the kV Bus to 3A9 for kV reference.
If either 40 or 110 kV is reached FC40 or FC110 signals from 3A9 will stop the counters.
In either fluoro or Rad manual, the clock inputs to the counters are driven by the 3Hz & 30Hz oscillators which provide, first a 2 sec 3Hz slow
drive, followed by the 30 Hz fast drive.
Pressing SM49 to select the TV auto mode deactivates SM31 & SM32. kV reference is now generated using the TV camera RX signal.
In the auto mode the TV Camera analog signal is converted to digital by A/D G90. The G90 digital output is compared with the kV bus by the
digital comparators G108 & G126. The comparators output A>B or A<B activates the G48 & G31 counters at the frequency of 1 kHz until the
TV kV reference & kV bus data agree (A=B).
7- 21
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
7- 22
GE Medical Systems
PL1 PL1 +5V
+5V
Rad 13 16
45A Gr SC Clock
10 Inhibit 14
+5V Sm26 2 300 kHz from G90
4
G150
7 +5V
ER
3 +
Reset
Sm33
8 15
HLC
+12V
G137 A to F
Sm35
GR
+12V
Pulsed FL 3A3, 3A1
+12V ER
Sm48
+12V
FL
Sm52 3A1
+12V
D536 •S"
+12V
+5V
3A19 Gr
mA(S) +
BP mA(s)
Up
Sm50 3A9
mA(S) -
G139 A to F
3A9
Sm51 BP mA(s)
1.2 & 12Hz 3A9 Clock 1 Down
OSC
G47 3A9 Clock 2
2A1 MODULE G
7- 23
GE Medical Systems
3A7 AD/kV Board

Illustration 7-10
7- 24
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
1-10 3A7 AD/kV BOARD
The circuit enables selection of the operating mode through activation of counter G150.
When power is switched ON, Fluoro mode is automatically selected G150 pins 1 to 9 = 0, except pin 3 = 1,
pin 13 = 1.
When another operating mode is selected, G150 pin 13 = 0 counter counts clock input pulses on pin 14 until the selected mode output of G150
equals a logic 1.
Counter now locks on selected mode, until another mode is selected.
Counter output turns on the selected mode LED through G139.
Counter indicates the operating mode signal through G137.
Output signals are as follows:

A. ER & SP to Memory Interface
B. + mAs to kV/mA board 3A9
C. Gr to SCR control 3A19
Two clock signals enable changing mA/mAs at two different speeds.
7- 25
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
3A9 CONSIGNE kV / mA
Sm35 S140B
+5v Logic Ckts To Module 8
G122, Q141 TVCamera aperture
FC110
REFERENCE VOLT.
G21 G68
G20 kV/20
DAC 3A12
3A7 Lim.110 kV/mA
Logic Ckts
FC40 BCD to 7 Segm. DECODER U 2A1
EPROM G138 MODULE
G18 G172 G
G19 G67 D
Lim.40
Dis.kV BCD to DECIMAL DECODER
888
C
Comparators G22 kV
REFERENCE VOLT.
mA Rad 3A26
REFERENCE VOLT.
G94 mA FL
DAC 3A26 FIL
EPROM
G136 2A1
G120
EPROM COUNTER G137 MODULE
3A7 K/20 Bus G
G66 G89
kV/mA
G90 EPROM 888
G121 mA- mAs
FL 3A26
BIN FCO
ER HLC TH SC DEC FC01
Clk FCGR
Sm35 EPROM
Mod.G HLC mA (s)Up
3A7 ER Logic Mod.8 G118 G119 G132
Ckt G133 3A26 FIL
Ther mal Sw. TH TV Lens Cons. DAC
Aperture
(3A7) + MA, SC, CLOCK mA.mAs Latch Latch mAs
EPROM G87 SC SC
G88 (3A7)
G65 G134
5R B A mA(s) Up G135
500W Clock
ER HLC TH
Comparators mA-mAs COUNTER
3A9 kV/mA
Illustration 7-11
7- 26
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
1-11 3A9 kV/mA BOARD
1-11-1 Auto Fluoro Mode

The kV/20 bus addresses EPROM G66. G66 on its output bus sets an optimum mA value for each kV input. The mA level depends on the
operating mode selected and equipment safety.
Auto Mode
HLC (High Dose Fluoro)
ER (Electronic Radiography)
TH (X-ray tube head safety)
Digital counters G89 and G90 output data is converted to analog by G94. This sets the reference mA level for the X-ray tube filament control
circuits on 3A26.
1-11-2 Manual Fluoro Mode

The counters G89 and G90 start from the EPROM memory data previously established before manual mode selection.
The counters are then incremented or decremented by the +/- mA input to the value manually selected. The clock 1 & 2 inputs from 3A7,
determines the mA change speed.
Counters G89 and G90 outputs are fed to D/A G94 and Latch G118 as in the auto mode.
G87 and G88 compare the EPROM G65 output data with the G89 and G90 counter outputs to set the counters for A=B. The counters input to
the Latch G118 to display the mA level on 2A1, through EPROM G120 and decoders G136 and G137. Latch G118 is set by the sc input.
G65 output data depends on the operating mode.
Fluoro - MA x 5R (154W)
ER & HLC - MA x 15R (500W)
TH - Reduce Power Operation
When the G65 output data equals the G89, and G90 counters the mA UP counting sequence stops. Counting down is automatic if A>B.
1-11-3 Rad mAs Reference

The mAs (up) data from 3A7 (up-down) 4 bit counters G134 and G135. The counters address EPROM G132 varying from .16 to 160 mAs in
31 steps.
The digital data drives the D/A converted G133 to provide the analog mAs reference to the x-ray tube filament circuits on 3A26 in the Rad mode.
7- 27
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
7- 28
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
The counter G134,G135 outputs also drive the EPROM G120 and G121 through the latch G119. The latch is set by the SC input in Rad.
G120 provides data for the 2A1 display through Decoders G136 and G137.
G121 outputs the following:
Information for the 2A1 Display

Logic signals to select the high or low integrators on 3A26
FC01 - Fluoro min mA value (.1 mA)
FC0 - Rad mAs min (.16 mAs)
FCGR - Rad mAs max ( 160 mAs)
kV/20 bus data is fed to the upper & lower kV limit comparators G20 and G21, and G18 and G19 respectively.
At limits the FC40 or FC110 comparator output is fed to the logic circuits on 3A7.
kV/20 bus data is converted to analog by G68 which provides the kV reference signal to 3A12.
Finally the kV/20 bus data addresses the EPROM G67, the output of which is decoded by G138 and G172 to drive the 2A1 kV Display. BCD to
Decimal Decoder G22 outputs additional information to the 2A1 Display and provides data to the Rad, mA circuits on 3A26 to taper the mA over
the kV range of 40 to 110 kV.
When HLC is selected by closing SM35, the logic circuits G122 & Q141 drive the TV camera aperture. The action closes down the TV camera
lens aperture to force increasing the radiation input to the Image Tube to the required HLC level. S140B must be closed to enable driving the
aperture.
7- 29
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
Pre heat
3A3 Power S133B (Reduced Power) Q216 (Rad)
reduction RP
(Closed) KV/MA Tapes
Q108, 110
3A9 Adder Amp Fil.
KV/MA A152 A214 Ret
from G22
Q287A 85%KV
& PRE
A138 A180 G188,

3A12 A284 184, 3A19
Measured MA Amp Integrator Compare
187 Stop mAs
(Rad)
3A9 Integ. Gain

Q83, Q217
0= .16 to 5mAs
1= 5 to 160 mAs
mAs Ret 3A9
Pre Safety Delay (Rad)

Q193, 194, 197,
RP G184, 187
Pre heat
R3
R7 R8 Q26 (FL)
MEASURED mA
(FL) 3A12 A220 Compare
A222 Low Pass
Filter
R9 Q287B (FL)
SYX (FL) 3A19
MSI XR 0360
3A26 Filament Circuits

Illustration 7-12
7- 30
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
1-12 3A26 FILAMENT CIRCUITS
1-12-1 Fluoro Mode

A220 compares the measured (actual) mA from 3A12 and the reference mA from 3A9. Fluoro rate is set by R9.
The output of A220 is fed through low-pass filter A222 and drives amplifier A214 through FET Q287.
Q287 is ON in fluoro because of the SYX SC to its gate.
R3 also drives A214 through Q216B for pre-heating the x-ray tube filament. Q216B is on in fluoro.
1-12-2 Rad Mode

The Rad mA measured signal from 3A12 through A284 is added to the mA Gr reference at the input of A152. The reference is selected by the
FET’s Q108 and Q110. These are switched to taper the Rad mA in six steps over the range from 40 to 110 kV. The gate signals to the FET’S
come from G22 on 3A9.
S133B enables changing the reference mA values for reduced x-ray tube power consumption. S133B must be closed when the Stenoscop is
operated from 120V AC power source (reduced power).
A152 drives A214 to develop the filament reference signal in the Rad mode. Q287 is ON if the 85 kV and PRE signals are present on its gate.
R4 enables setting the x-ray tube pre-heat level for the Rad mode. It is switched by Q216A
Integrator A138 calculates the mAs. The integrator has two speeds because of the wide range of mAs (.16 to 160 mAs).
Integrator gain is set by Q83 and Q217 using the logic signals from 3A9. (0 = .16 to 5 mAs, 1 = 6 to 160 mAs).
A180 compares the integrator for A138 output with the mAs reference signal. When these are equal, the stop mAs output to 3A19 is
developed. On 3A19, the signal prevents sending trigger pulses to the main SCR’s on the converter, stopping the Rad exposure.
Maximum Rad exposures are limited to two different times, depending on whether reduced power operation is or is not selected by S133B.
If reduced power is selected ( S133B is closed), maximum Rad exposure time is limited to 11 seconds. RP is a logic 0. R8 enables setting the
Rad safety delay in this mode.
When reduced power is not selected ( S133B open), maximum Rad exposure time is limited to 7 seconds. RP is a logic 1 and R7 enables
adjusting the safety delay.
When the safety delay time elapses and the exposure is not complete the stop mAs is generated, terminating x-ray emission.
7- 31
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
Rad Rad
Rad
5A1
G155 Selector
Pre amp & Amp Limiters Drivers
180 Hz Logic Q21, 20,
Q206 Q176, 129, Q125, 128 To X-ray
OSC G182,183 15, 11
Q124 162, 122 Q123, 121 head
Fil. Trans.
Current
FL Sense
Integrator Low Pass
A234, n2 n FL/Rad
Filter A282 Selector
Q265 Voltage
& Multiplier Q213 A & B
Q266 Source
A278 5TR1, 5CR3,
RMS C3 & C4
Compare
A237 +V
Fil Ref
(A214) +
Voltage
Source
Q20 C35TR1
5CR3
-
C4
.5 1.8
Q11
MSI XR 0364
-V
3A26 Filament Circuits
Illustration 7-13
7- 32
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
1-13 3A26 FILAMENT CIRCUITS
Oscillator G155 generates a positive going 180 Hz square wave pulse.
Q206 inverts the G155 output and drives the selector logic circuit. The pulse output of the selector logic is negative going in fluoro and positive
in Rad depending on the Rad or Rad input.
The selector logic output drives the push-pull complementary amplifier consisting of Q176, Q129, Q162 and Q122.
The amplifier output is finally applied to the x-ray tube filament transformer input drivers on 5A1 consisting of Q11, 15, 20 & 21.
The limiters (Q121, 123, 125, & 128) sense the 5A1 driver outputs. If an overdrive condition is measured, the limiters ground the push-pull
amplifier output at R133.
The RMS current in the 5A1 final driver outputs is measured by A282 through FET’S Q213A in the Rad mode and Q213B in fluoro. A282 acts
as a low-pass filter and drives the multiplier A278. The RMS2 output is now integrated by A234. The signal output of Q206 is used to reset
the integrator through Q266 and Q265.
Finally the integrator output is compared with the filament reference from A124. If the integrator RMS level exceeds the reference value, A124
inhibits the pulses at Q206.
Referring to the simplified 5A1 output driver circuit, operation is as follows:
C3 charges up to +175V approximate, furnished by the floating DC supply consisting of 5CR3 and 5TR1.
During Rad positive drive pulses to Q20 cause it to conduct and discharge C3 through Q20, and the filament transformer primary and
charging C4.
During fluoro operation positive drive pulses turn ON Q11, allowing C4 to discharge through the filament transformer and Q11.
Switching the polarity of the current pulses through the filament transformer primary enables selecting the small focal spot of the x-ray tube in
fluoro and the large focal spot in Rad. The energy input to the transformer is controlled by varying the pulse width.
7- 33
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
2Hz OSC
(3A5) PRX-CP G35
Timer Display
G69 Counters Logic 4' 57"

50Hz G38, 37 Ckts (3A19)
OSC G36 Stop Convt
SCR'S
R217
G35
PRX
Sm14
Timer
Reset 4' 26" LED FLASH
Module G
2A1 Sm 7 PRX Logic
Ckts
G74,75
DS175
X-ray Buzzer
Exposure BPCL G39
Sm26 (3A19)
RAD
3A12
Module D
2A3 MSI EX 0363
Fluoro Timer/X-ray On Lamp

Illustration 7-14
7- 34
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
1-14 FLUORO TIMER
Depressing the exposure buttons, either SM7 or SM26, produces the BPCL signal to 3A19. This initiates the exposure by switching ON the
converter main SCR’s.
BPCL is further processed on 3A19 to produce the SEXP logic signal to 3A12. 3A12 then develops the PRX signal to trigger the oscillator
G69 and G39.
After the counters G37,38 count 4’57’’ the 4'57" signal goes to 3A19 board to stop the converter SCR’s.
At a count of 4’26’’ the 2Hz oscillator G35 begins to flash the SM14 Timer reset LED.
PRX also triggers the monostable G39 which enables energizing the DS175 buzzer for .25 seconds, after releasing the exposure button.
G74 energizes the x-ray exposure buttons LED.
Depressing SM14 resets the timer counters.
Stenoscop 6000/9000 monitor cart x-ray on lamp.
7- 35
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
Sm11 (CCW)
-12V Collimator
Rotation
7M1
+12V
Sm12 (CW)
FC GR1
Sm15
(Close) G168, 157,
169, Q218
160, 159, 7M3 Opaque
Q211
164, 156 Collimators
Sm16 (Open) Logic Ckts
Rad
FC Sc1
Sm13
(Open) G180, 163
181, 179, Semi-transparent
Q249
164, 166, 158 Collimators7M2
Q241
Sm14 (Close) Logic Ckts
FC GR2
Circular Coll
Q189 9" Tube
Q190 7M5
Rad only
Sm17 G165 Latch

G155 Monostable Q191
Logic Ckts 7M4 Circular Coll
Q192 6" or 9" Tubes
Zoom
Rad Z=0= Not zoom

S501A & B
Open for 6" tube
MSI XR 0362
3A3 Collimators
Illustration 7-15
7- 36
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
1-15 3A3 COLLIMATORS
Refer to Ilustration 7-15.
Motor 7M1 rotates the collimator. Depressing Sm11 or 12 energizes the motor for desired direction of rotation.
Either a 6” or dual field 6”-9” image tube can be use on the Stenoscop.
1-15-1 6” Single Field Image Tube

7M3 moves the upper opaque collimator blades. These are controlled by Sm15 and Sm16. Q218 and Q211 enable reversing the voltage to
7M3 to open or close the blades.
The collimator blades can be moved provided that:
Maximum opening limit switches are not actuated, FC SC1 (Fluoro) FCGR1 (Rad) console settings are
compatible with operating mode selected (Fluoro or Rad).
7M2 drives the lower semi-transparent collimator blades. These are controlled by SM13 and Sm14. Q249 and Q241 enable reversing power to
7M2 to open and close the blades.
Collimator drive is enabled provided that the maximum opening switches are not activated FCSC2 (Fluoro) FCGR2 (Rad).
When the operating mode is switched from Rad to Fluoro all the collimator blades are automatically driven to limit x-ray emission to the input field
size of the image tube 6”, (16cm) FCSC1 and FCSC2 actuated.
When changing from Fluoro to Rad, the collimator blades must be manually positioned. LED’s for SM14 and SM16 will be flashing.
Repositioning the blades for Rad mode stops the flashing.
7M5 is not used with the 6” Image Tube.
1-15-2 6”-9” Dual Field Image Tube

Sm17 Console button enables selecting the desired field size. S501 A&B must be closed.
Opening and closing of the collimator blades is the same as for the 6” Image Tube.
In the 9” mode, the Z signal =0. This changes the limit switch selection for the collimator blades. The maximum opening now depends on
FCGR1 and FCGR2 instead of FCSC1 and FCSC2 in Fluoro.
In the 6” mode, the Z signal = 1. Collimator blades will now be automatically set to the FCSC1 and FCSC2 limit positions.
Flashing of the control switch LED’s is identical to that for the 6” Image Tube.
1-15-3 Circular Collimators

These are driven by 7M5 and 7M4. They function to confine the x-ray beam emission.
In the Rad mode both circular collimators are moved out of the x-ray beam.
In the Fluoro 6” mode 7M5 moves the 6” circular collimator in the x-ray field to limit x-ray emission to the 6” input field size of the image tube.
In the Fluoro 9” mode 7M4 moves the 9” circular collimator in the x-ray field to limit emission to the 9” Image Tube input view field.
With a single field 6” image tube, 7M4 is used to move the 6” circular collimator to limit input field size.
7- 37
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
Module 8 TV Camera
Q145
(3A7) Auto Gain Control (CAG)
Auto
(3A7) Delay
ER Logic Ckts
G161, 162, Q148
(3A5) 170, 171
Sexp R239
C235
(3A7) S133A
F110
S133D
Syx Sc
(3A19) G166 G166 Q512 Video Blank
S133C
Q132 Beam (Max)
+24v
Zoom (Mag mode)

Zoom Z1 Q149
Q146
9Sml
Sm21 Aux Coil
2A3
Module D G163
Q152
2A1
Module G
Sm 4
+5V
Time Time
PRX Counter Counter
(3A12) K233 K510
Q209
SYXSC
OX Logic Ckts OX HLC

(3A19) G162, 176, 177 (3A9)
RAD
3A3 Board
Illustration 7-16
7- 38
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
1-16 3A3 BOARD
TV Camera Automatic Gain Control (CAG) operates during:
Auto Fluoro or Electronic Rad (ER)
During x-ray ON (SEXP)
KV at upper limit (F110 )
S133A permits activating the AGC without the above signals (closed).
The delay circuit inhibits CAG at the start to enable TV camera reaching stability.
S133D enables unblanking the TV camera without x-ray Syx Sc.

S133C enables setting TV vidicon beam current to low beam during x-ray emission Syx Sc.
Depressing either Sm21 or Sm4 energizes the auxiliary coil of 95ml switching the unit OFF.
In High Dose Fluoro (HLC), the OX logic signal generates the OX HLC to 3A9 to close down the TV aperture (iris) in the HLC mode. The
Syx Sc holds the HLC during pulsed Fluoro. OX HLC is defeated in the Rad mode.
With a dual field tube, in the 6” mode Z1 logic signal enables switching the image tube electron optics for the magnify mode.
PRX logic (x-ray on) activates Time Counter K233 to record x-ray on time. Time Counter K510 is active as soon as power is turned ON.
Therefore it records the total ON time of the Stenoscop.
7- 39
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
Mod D (2A3) 3A5

1A1 Board
Sm22
Sm23
Drivers
Logic Ckts Q28
G16, Q17 K34
Q25, Q30
Mod G (2A1) 3A7 Q33
K44
Sm5
Sm9
K6 K34, K44
Trans Polarity Up/Down
5TR1 Reverse 1M1 Drive Motor
Power
Supply
+24V
To Module 8
MSI XR 0359
C-Arm Motor Drive
Illustration 7-17
7- 40
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
1-17 C-ARM MOTOR DRIVE
Up/down motion of the C-Arm is performed by the 1M1 motor.
Depressing either Sm23 or Sm5 produces UP drive.
Depressing either Sm22 or Sm9 produces Down motion.
Depressing any of the above console buttons energizes K6 to enable applying power to the 1M1 motor.
The power supply also furnishes +24v DC to Module 8 (Image Tube and TV Camera).
7- 41
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
Q195
G140A +24V
H Sweep
G140D 24
Sm10 Q Q55
G106 To Module 8
Sm9 TV Camera
G140E
Q Q57 23
V Sweep
Q194 +24V
G140F
Sm8 G163B
Q151
K7 Monitor 1
12V
Sm7 G163C
Q156
K5 9A1
12V
Sm6 G163D
Q171
K7 Monitor 2
12V
Sm5 G163E
Q176
K5 9A2
12V
MSI XR 0368
3A5 Timer
Illustration 7-18
7- 42
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
1-18 3A5 TIMER
Added to the Timer Board functions already covered, the Board performs the following additional functions:
TV Camera Sweep reversal
Camera sweep reversal is controlled by Sm9 and Sm10 buttons on the control console. Sm9 enables horizontal image reversal while Sm10
permits vertical reversal of the TV Camera image.
Depressing the console buttons flips the G106 dual bistable. The bistable outputs drive opto couplers Q55 and 57 to switch +24V to the TV
Camera H and V sweep circuits. The Q outputs of G106 also drive transistors Q195 and Q194 to energize the selected button LED’S.
1-18-1 TV Monitor Image Rotation

Console buttons Sm7 and Sm8 switch ON transistors Q156 and Q151 respectively to drive the sweep rotation coil relays K5 and K7 for Monitor
1. The relays energize the motor drive circuit for image rotation on Monitor 1.
Console buttons Sm5 and Sm6 switch transistors Q176 and Q171 to energize Monitor 2 sweep rotation relays K5 and K7 for Monitor 2.
The 3A5 Board also contains circuitry for Monitor brightness control. The circuits, however, are not used.
7- 43
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
7- 44
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
1-19 LAB EXERCISE
Refer to Stenoscop 2 Manual Part 1, Section 5.
Have the students do the following Lab Exercises as outlined in the above:
Guide Wheel/Adjustment
Handle Position
C-Arm Rotation Brake
Travel Safety
Fluoro mA
Fluoro Pre Heating
Fluoro Timer
Rad Safety
Rad Pre Heating
FL/Rad Switch Verification
mAs Integrators
Auto Fluoro Systems
7- 45
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
TP2
24V. VRI +18V
R1
TP7
AGC Delay
MNI AGC (On/Off)
To Camera Video Amp
TP9
R9
-15V
DS3
+24V GI 15
TP8
VR2
+10V
TP3
TP4
NOR R2 G3
MAI G3
MAG R3 G3 CR3
To image tube
MX1 power supply
NOR R5 G2 TP5
MAI G2
MAG R6 G2 CR4
*MAG R10 TP6
R
NOR R8 MA2 G1
MX2 CR2
MAG DH2
Mode 1
+15V
IRIS DH1
+15V
To Iris Control MSI XR 0378
*Only on 45560536
Power Supply (PL1)

Illustration 7-19
7- 46
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
1-20 TV Camera
1-20-1 Power Supply (PL1)

24v input to voltage regulator VR1 provides a +18v output for the TV Camera circuits. R1 enables adj to 18 v ± .1v.
In fluoro, with CL/ON and x-ray/ON inputs both high, the AGC is active when the kV reaches 110 kV after a delay set by MN1. R9 enables
setting the AGC delay. The delay permits the TV Camera circuits to stabilize before AGC becomes active.
24v input to Regulator G1 produces the ±15v DC output.
The LED, DS3 is energized if the Image Tube current exceeds 1µA.
Regulator VR2 furnishes +10v to the image tube electrode adjustment pots R2, R3, R5, R6, R8 and R10. The pots enable adjusting the Image
Tube G1, G2 and G3 electrostatic lens voltages in the normal and magnify modes as indicated.
External control signals for image tube (normal and +mag) mode switching and iris HQ mode positioning is through the opto-couplers DH2, and
DH1, respectively.
CR3, CR4 and CR2 protect against overvoltage.
7- 47
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
TP1 ImV=InA TP4

Newvicon Q5, 6, 7 To Sync & Mask PL3
Target Q1,2,3 & 4 MA1-1,2 Q8 RX
Signal MX1-1,2,3 (Auto Brightness)
Hclamp
Black R1
Window S4 Black Level
Adjust.
R2 Max Gain TP11
MA3, 4
Q9, 10, 11, 12 Q17, 18, 19 Composite
Video
to Memory DSM
R7 & Monitors
Comp Q16 Video Blk
Blanking Level (Set-up)
250 mV
Q20 B/W
Comp
Sync
MA5-2 Gamma & Edge 50 mV Set-up

MX2-1, 2, 3 enhance Q13,
F110 Q15 14, S2, S3
R6 R5
AGC Gain Man. Gain R4 Gamma - wht clip
MSI XR 0376
Pre-Amp and Video Board (PL2)

Illustration 7-20
7- 48
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
1-20-2 Pre-Amp and Video Board (PL2)

The Newvicon target video signal drives the series connected amplifiers Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4. At TP1, the level is
1mV = 1nA.
Next we feed the black level circuit consisting of Q5, Q6 and Q7, MA1 and MA2 and electronic switches MX1-1, MX1-2 & MX1-3. The output is
applied to Q8 to provide the (Rx) auto brightness signal.
R1 enables setting the video black level to the Newvicon dark current level.
The black level circuit utilizes the H clamp and black window signal inputs.
The signal at TP4 also drives the MA3 and MA4 attenuator and amplifier. R2 sets the maximum gain and is a factory adjustment.
The output of Q12 is applied to differential amplifier Q17 and Q18 and an emitter output Q19 for the composite video output at TP11.
Note that composite sync and blanking are added to form the composite output.
R7 enables establishing the video black level 50 mV above blanking.
The output of Q12 is also fed to the Gamma and white clip and Edge Enhancement circuits formed by Q13 & 14. Switching S2 enables
Gamma and white clip correction by means of R4. S2 permits injecting Edge Enhancement.
The output of MA5-1 drives the AGC circuits consisting of MA5-2 and 3 and electronic switches MX2-1, 2 and 3. R5 is used for manual gain
setting while R6 is for setting the AGC gain in the active mode. The circuit is active in the auto fluoro and electronic radiographic modes when
maximum kV = 110 is reached.
7- 49
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
Crystal Comp Sync & blanking

OSC & MN2 TP6
5.04 MHz Divider MUX HD
(525 line MNI
rate) VD
TP7
MN5 TP11
MA3 MA6-1 Video Circular
2X Int Blanking
MA5 R4 Size
R1 H cent
MN6
MA4 R3
MA6-2 Blk Window
2xInt Roundness
R2 R6 Size
Vcent
MA 7
ABC Window
TP12 R5
Size
Amp
Video Rx Q2, 3, 4, 5, & 6
MX2- 1, 2, 3 Video ABC
(From Pre Amp (To 3A5)
PL2)
TP13
MSI XR 0377
Sync and Mask Board (PL3)

Illustration 7-21
7- 50
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
1-21 SYNC AND MASK BOARD (PL3)
The master oscillator and divider (MN1) is crystal controlled at 5.04 mHz and provides RS170 sync and blanking for the 525 line rate.
The Mux (MN2) outputs produces the composite sync and blanking and horizontal and vertical drive outputs.
The horizontal and vertical drive square wave signals are each integrated twice to generate the parabola signals required for the video, black
window and ABC window circular patterns.
R1 enables horizontal circular mask centering and R2 centers the circular mask patterns vertically. R3 is adjusted for circular mask roundness.
Video blanking diameter is set by R4, and the Black Window and ABC window sizes are adjusted by R6 and R5, respectively.
The Rx signal from the Video Board is passed through the series connected amplifiers consisting of Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and Q6 and electronic
switches MX2-1, MX2-2 and MX2-3 to produce the ABC window video to the hysteresis circuit on 3A5. Q6 enables averaging of the video data
in the sample window area.
7- 51
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
VD
MA1-1 MA2-1, 2
MX2-1, 2, 3 Vsweep
(Defl)
R5 Vcent NOR
V size R1
R2 Vcent Rev
VD Q6 ,Q7 Cathode
HD (Newvicon)
R8 H cent
HD Rev
Q5 ,TRI
R6 H sweep
H size R7 H Lin K1 (Defl)
R9
H cent
NOR
R10 MA4, Q8 Focus

Focus
R12 Target
Target 0 to +80V.
To
Q3 TR2 G2 300V Newvicon
HD
MA3 G3 450V
G4 630V
R4 Stand-by
R3
) G1 Beam
(G 2 ,G 3 , G 4 K2
R11 Normal
+18V VRI 6.3V Filament
MSI XR 0375
Scan Converter and Focus (PL5)

Illustration 7-22
7- 52
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
1-22 SCAN CONVERTER AND FOCUS (PL5)
Vertical Drive to MA1 and MA2 amplifiers and electronic switching MX2 provides Vertical Sweep to the Camera tube Vertical Deflection Coil.
R5 permits sweep size adjustment while R1 and R2 enable vertical raster centering on the camera tube target for normal and reverse
presentations, respectively.
Vertical and Horizontal Drive to Q6 and Q7 produces Camera Tube Cathode blanking.
Horizontal Drive to Q5 and Transformer TR1 develops the horizontal sweep to the Camera tube H Deflection coil.
R6 and R7 are for H size and H linearity corrections, respectively. R8 and R9 enable centering the raster horizontally on the Camera tube target
in the normal and reverse modes.
R10 adjustment, fed to MA4 amplifier and driver output Q8 to the Camera Tube focus coil enables focusing the beam on the Newvicon target.
H Drive to the circuit consisting of Q3, MA3 and Transformer TR2 enables setting Newvicon operating potentials as follows:
R12 established the required target voltage.
A single adjustment, R3, sets the G2, G3 and G4 Camera tube electrode potentials.
R4 and R11 set the Newvicon G1 beam potentials for STAND-BY (no x-ray exposure) and NORMAL (x-ray) modes. K2 relay is driven
by the control circuits on Board 3A3.
Filament voltage (6.3v DC) for the Camera pick-up tube is obtained from regulator VR1.
7- 53
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
+24V
From IRIS SIG

3A9
B3 B2
Std FL -
P1 B1
X
+
HLC -
M IRIS
P2 +
63 mm
- (Max open)
B1
+
+V
Servo
B2 Position
MSI XR 0374
Iris Control
Illustration 7-23
7- 54
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
1-23 IRIS CONTROL
The iris, or aperture, has only two positions. One is for setting the standard fluoro light input to the TV Camera pick-up tube. The second is for
the HLC operating mode.
These iris openings are established by adjustment of P1 for standard fluoro and P2 for HLC. In the HLC mode, the iris is closed down from its
fluoro position.
The iris is physically located in front of the TV Camera lens. Its maximum physical opening is 63mm.
Let’s consider we are adjusting P1 to establish the iris opening for standard fluoro. Assume we develop a positive voltage output at X of B3.
This is fed through follower B2 applies a positive input to the inverter input of B1 and develops a negative output voltage across the top side of
motor M.
Note that the positive output of follower B2 is also applied to the positive input of the lower B1 on the drawing. Its output will, therefore, be
positive applied to the lower side of motor M. Simply, we have a voltage across the motor and the iris motor drives and changes the iris
opening.
Note that the servo position pot is physically tied to the motor. Thus, we now develop an increasing positive input position voltage to the
remaining inputs of both B1 output drivers. This is applied through the lower follower, B2, as the position of the servo pot is changed.
When the sum of the inputs to both B1 drivers is zero, their outputs will be zero and the motor stops.
Adjusting P2 will result in the same action, and we will close down the iris opening for HLC operation.
7- 55
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
(Sync separator)
H
U4 U3
U2 U1 (Sync) Remote
Q1 Q2 contrast
V
Q11
Blk Level
Clamp
Q6
Video
In Q3,4,5 Q7, 8 Q1 0
C17
Diff. Amp Follower
R29 Gain
Q9
R45
BIAS
Remote
Q6 Brightness
Grid
Q1 Q2, 3, 4, 5 to CRT
Cathode
Follower Diff amps

cascaded
H-V Blanking
blanking control circuit Q101
Ext to Q105
blanking
R32 XR0386
BIAS
Video Preamp and Output Amplifier
Illustration 7-24
7- 56
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
1-24 DSM VMI MONITOR CIRCUITS
The camera video output is fed to series connected buffers Q3, 4 and 5. R29 sets the video level gain. Output buffer Q5 is capacity coupled to
a differential amplifier (Q7 and Q8).
At the output of the differential amplifier, R45 driving Q9 enables setting the video black level to zero as measured on the collector of Q8. Also,
the remote contrast permits establishing the desired contrast setting through Q11.
Q10 follower applies the video to Q1 which in turn drives the differential amplifier (Q2 and Q3). These now drive a pair of cascade output
amplifiers (Q4 and Q5). The collector of Q5 drives the CRT cathode while the Q4 output is applied to the grid of the CRT.
Remote brightness adjust fed to Q6 enables establishing the desired video brightness level on the grid of the CRT.
The composite signal applied to the sync separator circuits strips the video portion and produces the H and V sync outputs.
Q6 clamps the video black level.
The blanking circuit will permit blanking the video during H and V retrace periods or upon an external blanking commands.
7- 57
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
+V
H hold B+ +Video
R113 Boost V. T102 & Reg -150V.
U105, U104, +6V.
U106 +5V.
-5V.
Q101 Pre Amp
H OSC - PLL T101
Sync U101, U102 Q104 Output Amp
H Defl
+V Phase
Delay
R110
L 102 Lin
L 103 Width
To Q303 To Q301
(Sweep dynamic
protect) focus
L 101
H cent
Simplified H Sweep Circuit

Illustration 7-25
7- 58
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
The PLL oscillator, U102, driving the preamp, Q101, and output amplifier, Q104, locks the deflection output pulse to the H sync input.
Q104 feeds the series connected horizontal deflection coil, H linearity L102, width coil L103 and the H centering L101.
Q104 also switches the current input to T102 primary at the horizontal sweep rate (15.75 kHz). The secondary of T102 driving the voltage
regulators U105, U104 and U103 produces the +6v and ±5v regulated outputs. In addition, T102 supplies the -150v and +video unregulated
outputs.
R110 sets the phase of oscillator U102 while R113 enables adjustment of the horizontal hold to within ±150 Hz of the H sync.
L102, L103 and L101 permit adjusting H linearity, width and centering, respectively.
Notice that the H drive current through the width coil L103 is also fed to Q303 for sweep failure protection and to Q301 for dynamic focus.
7- 59
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
V L 103
V Sync Q201 Inverter Defl H. width
U201-
OSC,Ramp gen,power amp.
+V
V
shape
R207 R219
V cent H sweep Q303 To CRT
R205A Q304 (Control Grid)
V freq.
Q202 V sweep
R212 (Sweep failure
Q203 protection)
V size
R213
V linearity
To dynamic focus
ckt (V parabola)
XR0387
Simplified V Sweep Circuit

Illustration 7-26
7- 60
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
U201 is an oscillator, a ramp generator and power amplifier. The oscillator is locked to the V inverted sync input while the output power
amplifier drives the vertical deflection yoke.
R219 enables vertical raster centering.
Q303 and Q304 protect the CRT against either an H or V sweep drive failure. Should a sweep failure occur, the control grid of the CRT will be
driven to cut-off.
Q202 and Q203 furnish a V parabola signal to the dynamic focus circuit.
R205A is the vertical hold adjustment.
R212 enables adjusting the vertical raster size.
R213 adds the parabola signal to the ramp generator section of U201 for setting the top and bottom V raster size to center size ratio.
R207 enables fine adjustment of V sweep linearity.
7- 61
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
+V
+300V
Q302
R311
H Focus
C307
CR308
+V C309
T301 C304
To CRT
V (FOCUS GRID)
Parabola C302 &
C303
R310 CR304
Corner
focus
V Focus
+V
+V
L103
Width R321 To CRT
DC Focus (G2)
Q301 G2
R323
Adj.
-150 V
Simplifed Dynamic Focus Circuit

Illustration 7-27
7- 62
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
Transformer T301 and capacitors C302 and C303 form a tuned resonant circuit at the H rate. The tank circuit is excited by the H sweep through
Q301.
Thus, the output at T301 is a sinusoid at the H frequency, coupled to the Monitor CRT focus electrode through C304.
The H oscillations are modulated by the V parabola applied to the base of Q301 and controlled by R309. This particularly effects the focus at
the corners of the raster scan.
R311 controls the peak amplitude of the H oscillations and therefore must be set for best focus at the edges of the H sweep.
R310 controls the amplitude of the V parabola driving Q302 and enables adjusting the V focus at the top and bottom edges of the vertical
sweep.
The DC focus potential is set by R323. It is set to provide best center focus.
The final resultant signal output to the CRT focus grid is a sinusoid at the H frequency, amplitude modulated by the V parabola and added to
the DC level set by R323.
R321 enables adjusting the CRT, G2 electrode potential.
7- 63
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
T2
L-C
T1 Filter
R5&6
CR9
220V
AC HV Supply
C13 (sealed)
Nonserviceable
To CRT
CR1 Accel
Anode
CR8
U1
R11 U2 Switcher Q1 &2
U3 & U4 R33
XR0390
Simplified Switching Mode Power Supply (SMPS)

Illustration 7-28
7- 64
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
220v AC is fed to bridge rectifier CR9.
Current through R5 and R6 charges C13 to the threshold level (16v) and starts switcher U1. U1 drives Q1 and Q2 and energizes T1.
T1 output current through T2 feeds the RC filter network to produce the +24v regulated output.
T2 secondary continues to supply the switcher U1 through CR1.
If the T2 supply is too high, the crowbar circuit involving U2 and CR8 is activated for circuit protection.
The feedback voltage across R33 driving the Zener U4 and the opto-coupler U3 determines the duty cycle (ON-OFF) time of switcher U1. The
+24v DC output of the power supply is thus regulated to within +24v ±.5v.
R11 and R33 are factory set and should require no further adjustment.
7- 65
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
Rear Panel Light Sensor

Switch Bd. Board
Photo Cell
Film Cassette
Main Board Lens Plate
Board M Shutter
Alpha Switch
Numeric Interface CRT
Display Board
Monitor
Matrix 1010 (Model 1) Block Diagram

Illustration 7-29
7- 66
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
1-25 1010 FORMATTER
The main board performs the following functions:
• It accepts operator-selected exposure parameters through the Rear Panel Switch Board and the Switch Interface Board.
• It drives the Alphanumeric Display
• The Main Board uses the photocell brightness control signal to control monitor CRT brightness for constant film exposure density
• The Main Board controls opening and closing of the shutter drive motor through the lens Plate Board.
• It houses the Z80 microprocessor and memories that control Matrix functions.
7- 67
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
Mirror
CRT
Shutter
Lens Photo Cell
Mirror
Mirror
Film cassette
xr0395
Matrix 1010 Optical Path

Illustration 7-30
7- 68
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
The folded optical light path is as shown in the drawing.
Note the position of the photocell on the second mirror. The photocell is used to manage monitor CRT brightness.
The shutter remains closed before each film exposure to set-up the brightness loop in a calibration mode. It then opens for the film exposure.
Actual film exposure time is controlled by unblanking the monitor CRT.
7- 69
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
CRT Photo cell
Integrator
Monitor light sensor
board
Mux
D/A
Contrast, blanking
& brightness
Compare
A/D
Memory mp
Operator
Select
Contrast Exposure time

& brightness XR0393
Brightness Exposure Control Loop
Illustration 7-31
7- 70
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
The operator programs the monitor brightness, contrast and exposure time for the desired film density and film to be used. The operator data is
stored in memory. Up to eight sets of values can be stored using four for positive images and four for negative images.
Using the set exposure parameters, the brightness feedback loop maintains monitor brightness for consistent film density. The photocell
operates in conjunction with the microprocessor and the video monitor. It reads monitor brightness and produces an output current proportional
to brightness.
Before each film exposure, the microprocessor commands the monitor to display a calibration pattern.
The photocell measures the monitor CRT light output with the “Cal” pattern and the microprocessor then compares this with a reference level
represented by the brightness number stored in memory. The microprocessor then adjusts the monitor brightness to match the reference value.
When this occurs, the calibration cycle is completed, the CRT displays the video image, the shutter opens and the exposure takes place.
The block diagram shows the photocell current output integrated on the Light Sensor Board, passed through a mux and then to a comparator
and A/D converter to the microprocessor. The microprocessor looks at the stored memory exposure data, compares this with the photocell
signal and then provides a correction through a D/A to the monitor brightness circuit to satisfy the loop. Stored memory data with respect to
contrast and exposure time is also fed to the monitor circuits. Exposure timing is controlled by unblanking the monitor.
7- 71
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
Comp Video
Unblanking Comp Video & Blanking
Video Amp.
Contrast
Scan & DYN Focus
Brightness
Output Board CRT
Comp Sync
V Scan &
Blanking +750V.
V Sweep
X Smoothing
Sync Board V. Defl
CRT
Filament
V Defl. Coil
CRT Board
H Defl. Coil
-150 & +750v
H Sync
H Defl
H Scan & H. V. Power
PLL Sync Blanking Supply
Brightness
Scan Fail
XR0394
Matrix Video Monitor Block Diagram

Illustration 7-32
7- 72
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
1-26 VIDEO AMPLIFIER
Composite video from the Mother Board is applied to the Video Amplifier. The video signal is amplified and stripped of sync. Composite video
drives the Output Board and is then applied to the CRT cathode. Composite sync is fed to the V Defl and the Smoothing Board. Contrast signal
from the Mother Board sets the gain on the Video Amplifier while the unblanking input drives the cathode of the CRT to control exposure time.
1-26-1 Smoothing Board

Composite sync from the Video Amplifier is used to develop H Sync and V Sweep on the Smoothing Board. H Sync is applied to the H Defl
while V Sweep is used on the V Defl. PLL sync from the H Defl to the Smoothing board is used as a line clock. The X Sync output to the
external circuits (Mother Board) is for blanking control for photographic applications.
1-26-2 V Defl
The V Defl produces the V drive the the Vert deflection coil and applies V scan and blanking to the CRT Board. These are derived from the
ramp signal from the Smoothing Board and the composite sync from the Vertical Amplifier. Adjustable blanking from composite sync is used for
dynamic focus on the CRT Board.
1-26-3 H Defl
The H Defl furnishes H scan and blanking to the CRT Board. These are developed by processing the H sync input from the Smoothing Board.
The H sync also produces the H sweep to the Horizontal CRT deflection coil.
1-26-4 CRT Board

The board functions to detect H or V sweep failures. Should such occur, the scan fail signal is developed and fed to the external control circuits.
The brightness signal from the Mother Board controls a brightness amplifier which in turn drives the G1 electrode of the CRT (through the
Output Board). H and V blanking inputs together with the -150V to +750V potentials from the HV supply are used for static and dynamic focus
to the Output Board. The CRT Board also has a filament regulator for the CRT filament.
1-26-5 Output Board

Summing of the static and dynamic focus signal inputs from the CRT Board enables applying focus control potentials to the G4 electrode of the
CRT. The brightness signal and +750v inputs fed through low pass filters produce potentials for the G1 (brightness) and G2 electrodes of the
CRT.
A regulated filament voltage passes through the Output Board to the filament of the CRT. Finally, the composite video from the Video Amplifier
fed through a final cathode amplifier drives the CRT cathode. Blanking from the Video Amplifier enables controlling the Output Board cathode
amplifier to either blank or unblank the CRT.
7- 73
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
7- 74
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
1-27 ELECTRONIC ADJUSTMENT LAB EXERCISE
DESCRIPTION:
This lab will provide the student with experience doing the electronic adjustments for the X-ray portion of the Stenoscop.
REFERENCES:
XR012 Stenoscop II Series Technical Supplement - Section 19
COMPETENCIES:
Upon completion student will be able to perform the following:
S kVp measurement
S Travel safety
S Fluoro mA adjustment
S Fluoro Preheating
S Fluoro Timer
S Rad Safety
S Rad mA Preheating
S Rad/Fluoro switch test
S mAs Integrators
PROCEDURE TIME: 2.5 to 3.0 hr
SAFETY:
Use proper radiation safety as stated in Section 2-1 of XR012 Stenoscop II Series Technical Supplement Radiation Safety Policy.
PROCEDURE:
Follow the adjustments procedures given in Section 19 of XR012 Stenoscop II Series Technical Supplement. Use the Service Manual that was
received with the equipment to insure that we are using the most current directions.
7- 75
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
7- 76
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
1-28 MONICON 3 LAB EXERCISE
DESCRIPTION:
This lab will provide necessary experience for the student for calibration of the Stenoscop Image System.
REFERENCES:
XR012 Stenoscop II Series Technical Supplement - Section 13
COMPETENCIES:
Upon completion student will be able to perform the following:
S Calibration of the Monicon 3 Camera System
S Calibration of the Imageur Image System
S Calibration of the Stenoscop Auto Brightness Loop
S Use of the DSM Image Quality Tests
PROCEDURE TIME: 4.0 to 6.0 hr
SAFETY:
Use proper radiation safety as stated in Section 2-1 of XR012 Stenoscop II Series Technical Supplement Radiation Safety Policy, Static Control -
ESD and Energy Control and Power Lock Out.
PROCEDURE:
Follow the calibration in XR012 Stenoscop II Series Technical Supplement, Section 11 Monicon 3 TV Calibration.
7- 77
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
7- 78

TENOSCOP 2 6000 - 9000 C.C.D - M.D.A. Service Manual PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

TENOSCOP 2 6000 - 9000 C.C.D - M.D.A. Service Manual PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

e Medical Systems

STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 C.C.D. – M.D.A.

Copyright 1998 GE Medical Systems

GE Medical Systems STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 C.C.D. – M.D.A.

2–1 BASIC CONFIGURATION – OPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. 1

2–2 DOSE AREA PRODUCT METER SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. 4

2–3 IMAGER 16/22 CCD SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. 5

2–4 MONITOR SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. 11

3–1 RECEPTION OF THE MOBILE SURGICAL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. 1

3–2 MAIN SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. 5

3–4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. 7

3–5 CDRH CERTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. 8

3–6 DR4 / MD10 COMPONENTS INTERCONNECTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . 10

3–7 MDA COMPONENTS INTERCONNECTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . 11

3–8 COMPONENTS POWER SUPPLY WIRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . 12

3–9 CCM 620 – Photography parameters setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . 13

4–1 MECHANICAL TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. 3

4–2 CDRH COMPLIANCE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. 5

GE Medical Systems STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 C.C.D. – M.D.A.

6–1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. 1

6–2 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. 3

6–3 JOB CARDS SYNOPTIC TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. 6

6–4 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY SHEETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. 6

6–5 ADJUSTMENT SHEETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. 110

MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. 111

7–2 SCHOTTKY DIODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. 3

7–3 LIST OF SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. 3

7–4 LIST OF THE ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THE SCHEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. 4

7–5 USE OF THE SCHEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. 8

9–1 STENOSCOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1

9–3 DOSE AREA PRODUCT METER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 72

9–7 KITS (MONITOR CART) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . 92

SCHEMATICS A3 (see TOC page A – i) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–i

GE Medical Systems STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 C.C.D. – M.D.A.

REV DATE TYPE OF MODIFICATION

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION

GE Medical Systems STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 C.C.D. – M.D.A.

GE Medical Systems STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 C.C.D. – M.D.A.

2–1 STENOSCOP : BASIC CONFIGURATION – OPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1

2–2 DOSE AREA PRODUCT METER SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4

2–2–1 Model 841–SO Chamber : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4

2–3 IMAGER 16/22 CCD SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5

2–3–1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5

2–4 MONITOR SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . 11

2–4–1 Physical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . 11

GE Medical Systems STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 C.C.D. – M.D.A.

GE Medical Systems STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 C.C.D. – M.D.A.

MODEL TCB92 601 P 478 STENO 2 6000 CCD 50 Hz

OO : OBLIGATORY option necessary for the operation of the unit

ACC : Spécific components

USA : Supplied direct by GE – USA following the GE – CGR spécifications.

GE Medical Systems STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 C.C.D. – M.D.A.

STENOSCOP 2 CONFIGURATION – Only for information

COMPONENTS DESCRIPTION CATALOG 478 479 480 481

IMAGER 16 (6”) CCD 50 Hz OO

16 CCD IMAGER KIT (collimator + screened mylar) OO OO

CASSETTE HOLDER (16) 24 x 30 cm (1) B92 601 P325 OF OF

RAD COLLIMATOR KIT 24 x 30 cm B92 601 P453 OO OO OO OO

TV MONITOR FFD NOT ROT.( with MDA ) 2153979 OO OO OO OO

GE Medical Systems STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 C.C.D. – M.D.A.

COMPONENTS DESCRIPTION CATALOG Nber 448 449 450 451

PAPER IMAGER UP890 CEI/ 220V 861 190 P035